OWNER HANDBOOK

cop lum Stelvio GB.indd 1 15/11/16 12:52

Noi che abbiamo ideato, progettato e costruito il tuo veicolo, lo conosciamo davvero in ogni singolo dettaglio e componente. Nelle officine autorizzate

Fiat Professional Service

trovi tecnici formati direttamente da noi che ti offrono qualità e professionalità in tutti gli interventi di manutenzione. Le officine Fiat Professional sono sempre al tuo fianco per la manutenzione periodica,

i controlli di stagione e per i consigli pratici dei nostri esperti.Con i Ricambi Originali Fiat Professional, mantieni nel tempo le caratteristiche di affidabilità,

comfort e performance per cui hai scelto il tuo nuovo veicolo.Chiedi sempre i Ricambi Originali dei componenti che utilizziamo per costruire le nostre auto e che ti

raccomandiamo perché sono il risultato del nostro costante impegno nella ricerca e nello sviluppo di tecnologie sempre più innovative.

Per tutti questi motivi affidati ai Ricambi Originali:

i soli appositamente progettati da Fiat Professional per il tuo veicolo.

SICUREZZA:SISTEMA FRENANTE

ECOLOGIA: FILTRI ANTIPARTICOLATO, MANUTENZIONE CLIMATIZZATORE

COMFORT: SOSPENSIONI E TERGICRISTALLI

PERFORMANCE: CANDELE, INIETTORI E BATTERIE

LINEA ACCESSORI: BARRE PORTA TUTTO, CERCHI

PERCHÈ SCEGLIERERICAMBI ORIGINALI

COP FULL BACK LUM IT.qxp_500 UM ITA 23/02/16 09:51 Pagina 2

Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing an Alfa Romeo.We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. This vehicleis intended for daily use as well as for specific uses. Please take your time to familiarise with all the dynamic features of your car.Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best performancefrom the technical features of your Alfa Romeo.You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and above allwith those concerning brakes, steering and gearbox; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behaviour on different roadsurfaces.This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care andmaintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time.After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains onboard the vehicle should it be sold.In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find the description of the Services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers, theWarranty Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new car and the service provided by the people at AlfaRomeo.Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!

READTHIS CAREFULLY

REFUELLING

Do not use petrol containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vitalcomponents of the supply system.For further details on the use of the correct fuel see the "Refuelling the vehicle" paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Make sure that the electric parking brake is engaged and that the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral), press the brake pedal and then press theignition device button.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammablematerial: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect theenvironment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact an Alfa RomeoDealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness andlow running costs for a long time to come.

VEHICLE CHANGES /ALTERATIONSWARNINGAny change or alteration of the car might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupantscould even be fatally injured.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNERIf after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satelliteanti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case burden the electrical supply, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership, whosepersonnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required, or whether it needs to beintegrated with a more powerful battery.

IMPORTANT Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce theventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp, repeated braking or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructsthe pedal stroke (mats, etc.).Alfa Romeo S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended byAlfa Romeo S.p.A. and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.

INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC DEVICESElectrical and electronic devices installed after buying the car in the context of after-sales service must carry the following label

:Alfa Romeo S.p.A. authorises the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialised centre, in aworkmanlike fashion and in compliance with manufacturer's specifications.

IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices have been installed which modify the features of thevehicle. This may also cause invalidation of warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related toit.Alfa Romeo S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended byAlfa Romeo S.p.A. and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONESRadio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless aseparate aerial is mounted externally.Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use ofEC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phoneManufacturer.

IMPORTANT The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external aerial) may cause the electricalsystems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the car in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers'health.

IMPORTANT If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the car and/or close to the electronic key, a reducedperformance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur.

USEOFTHEOWNERHANDBOOK

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Each time direction instructions (left/right or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, these must be understood asregarding an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be specified as appropriate in the text.The figures in the Owner Handbook are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do notcorrespond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Handbook has been conceived considering vehicles withsteering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position orconstruction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure.To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner Handbook.Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key forgetting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is in any case a textual indication of the current chapterat the side of each even page.PRECAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

While reading this Owner Handbook you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle.There are also PRECAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which couldcause accidents or injuries.Therefore, all WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS must always be followed carefully.WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

personal safety;

vehicle safety;

environmental protection.

NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated besides the title or at the end of the line and are followed by a number. Thatnumber recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant section.

IMPORTANT

This Owner Handbook describes all vehicle versions. Optional contents, equipment meant for specific Markets or particularversions are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the version you own. Anycontent introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, willbe identified with the wording (where provided).

All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. Alfa Romeo S.p.A. aimsat a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason it reserves the right to make changes to the modeldescribed for technical and/or commercial reasons.

For further information, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

SYMBOLSSome car components have coloured labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Seebelow for a brief description of each symbol summarising the contents herein. Always take great care to all warnings herein.

READ THE USER'SMANUAL

DO NOT TOUCH WITHHANDS

IT CAN STARTAUTOMATICALLY ALSOWITH ENGINE OFF

PROTECT YOUR EYESDO NOT OPEN THE CAPWHEN THE ENGINE ISHOT

DO NOT OPEN: HIGHPRESSURE GAS

KEEP CHILDREN AT ADISTANCE

BURSTINGMOVING PARTS KEEP PARTSOF YOUR BODY ANDCLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACHFLAMES

CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE

This page is intentionally left blank

GRAPHICAL INDEX

KNOWINGYOURCAR

KNOWINGTHE INSTRUMENTPANEL

SAFETY

STARTINGANDDRIVING

IN AN EMERGENCY

SERVICINGANDCARE

TECHNICAL DATA

INDEX

FRONTVIEW

HEADLIGHTSTypes of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

WHEELSRims and tyres provided . . . . . . . . . 253Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Tire Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

DOOR MIRRORSAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

DOORSCentral opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . 23

CHECKING LEVELSChecking levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

WINDSCREEN WIPERSOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

1 03016V0001EM

11

REARVIEW

REAR LIGHTSExternal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTOpening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

2 03026V0001EM

12

GR

AP

HIC

AL

IND

EX

INSTRUMENTPANEL

LIGHT SWITCHExternal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

AIR DIFFUSERSClimate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 46

LEFT STALKMain beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

CONTROLS ON THE STEERINGWHEEL

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

INSTRUMENT PANELControl panel and on-board

instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

STEERING WHEELAdjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

RIGHT STALKWindow washing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

CONNECT

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMAutomatic dual-zone climate control

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

GLOVE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . 61

PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG . . . . . 131

3 03036V0001EM

13

DASHBOARD FORRIGHT-HANDDRIVEVERSION

1. Light switch; 2. Air diffusers; 3. Left stalk; 4. Controls on the steering wheel; 5. Instrument panel; 6. Steering wheel; 7. Rightstalk; 8. Connect; 9. Automatic dual-zone climate control system; 10. Glove compartment; 11. Passenger side air bag;12. Bonnet release lever.

4 03036V0004EM

14

GR

AP

HIC

AL

IND

EX

VEHICLE INTERIOR

SEATSAdjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

ELECTRIC WINDOWS / ELECTRICDOOR MIRRORS

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Electric door mirrors control . . . . . . 35Tailgate opening control . . . . . . . . . . 56

GEARBOX/TRANSMISSIONUsing the transmission . . . . . . . . . . 142

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTSOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

“Alfa DNA™” SYSTEMOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

5 03046V0001EM

15

This page is intentionally left blank

In-depth knowledge of your new vehicle starts here.The handbook that you are reading simply and directly explains

how it is made and how it works.That’s why we advise you to read it seated comfortably on board,

so that you can see immediately what is described for you.

KNOWINGYOURCARTHE KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18IGNITION DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20ENGINE IMMOBILIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22DOORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32STEERING WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33REAR VIEW MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34EXTERNAL LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40WINDSCREEN WIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46WINDOW WINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53ELECTRIC SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54BONNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT TAILGATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56INTERIOR FITTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

THEKEYS

ELECTRONIC KEY

1)

The car is equipped with two electronickeys with the Keyless Startfig. 6 function.

OPERATION

Unlocking the doors and the tailgate

Briefly press the button: unlocking ofdoors and tailgate, timed switching-on ofinternal lights and single flashing ofdirection indicators (if activated from theConnect system).When the function is available, press andrelease the unlock button on the remotecontrol once only to unlock the driver sidefront door or twice within 1 second tounlock all doors and the tailgate.It is however possible to change thecurrent setting through the Connectsystem menu, so that the system unlocks:

all doors on the first press of theremote control button;

only the driver door on the first pressof the remote control button (whereprovided);

the tailgate, "independently" or "withdoors".Moreover, from the Connect system youcan activate or deactivate the flashing ofthe direction indicators uponlocking/unlocking the doors and activatethe "ceiling light" function (dipped beamheadlights and direction indicatorsswitch on) upon unlocking the doors. Forfurther information, see paragraph"Settings" in the "Connect" booklet.The doors can always be unlocked byputting the metal insert inside the driverside door lock.

Door and tailgate locking

Briefly press the button: locking ofdoors and tailgate, timed switching-off ofinternal lights and double flashing ofdirection indicators (if activated fromConnect system).If one or more doors are open, the doorsare locked and this is indicated by a rapidflashing of the direction indicators(where provided). The doors prepare forlocking, which is active from the momentthey are closed. The doors will unlockagain only if the key presence is detectedinside the passenger compartment.

The doors can always be locked byputting the metal insert inside the driverside door lock.

Automatic window opening/closingfunction

(where provided)Prolonged pressing of button : allwindows open.Prolonged pressing of button : allwindows closed.

Tailgate opening

Rapidly press the button twice toopen the tailgate remotely. The directionindicators will flash twice to indicate thatthe tailgate has been opened.

6 04016S0010EM

18

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

REPLACINGTHE ELECTRONIC KEYBATTERY

1)

To replace the battery, proceed asfollows:

Pressing in the points indicated infig. 7, extract the cover pullingdownwards.

Remove the key insert fig. 8 from itshousing.

Remove the battery plug fig. 9 rotatingit in counter-clockwise.

Remove the battery from its slotfig. 10 and replace it with a new one ofthe same type.

Proceed in reverse order to reassemblethe key.

IMPORTANT The battery replacementoperation must be carried out with care,in order not to damage the electronic key.

REQUESTFORADDITIONALKEYS

The system can recognise up to 8 keyswith remote control.To guarantee that the engine starts andthe car operates correctly, use onlyelectronic keys specifically coded for thecar’s electronics.If an electronic key is coded for a car, itcannot be used on any other car.

Duplicating keys

If you need a new electronic key, go to anAlfa Romeo Dealership, taking an IDdocument and the car ownershipdocuments.

IMPORTANT

1) The electronic components inside the keymay be damaged if the key is subjected tostrong shocks. In order to ensure completeefficiency of the electronic devices inside thekey, it should never be exposed to directsunlight.

7 04016S0002EM

8 04016S0003EM

9 04016S0004EM

10 04016S0005EM

19

IMPORTANT

1)Used batteries may be harmful to theenvironment if not disposed of correctly.They must be disposed of as specified by lawin the special containers or taken to an AlfaRomeo Dealership, which will take care oftheir disposal.

IGNITIONDEVICE

OPERATION

1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

To activate the starter switch fig. 11, theelectronic key must be inside thepassenger compartment.

The ignition device has the followingpossible states:

STOP: engine off, steering locked.Some electrical devices (e.g. central doorlocking system, alarm, etc.) are stillavailable;

ON (single button press): all electricaldevices are available. This state can beselected by pressing the ignition devicebutton once, without pressing the brakepedal;

AVV: engine starting. This state can beselected by pressing the starter buttononce with the brake pedal pressed.NOTE With the starter switch ON, if

30 minutes pass with P (Park) modeengaged and the engine stopped, thestarter switch will automatically move tothe STOP position.NOTE With the engine running, it ispossible to go away from the car takingthe electronic key with you. The enginewill still be running. The vehicle willindicate the absence of the key on boardwhen the door is closed.For more information on the enginestart-up, see the description in the"Starting the engine" paragraph, in the"Starting and driving" chapter.

IMPORTANT If the battery wasdisconnected, do not start the engineimmediately after reconnecting theterminals, but press the start button,without operating the pedals, to turn onthe instrument panel and then start theengine.The symbol on the instrument panelwill remain on, indicating that thesteering must be initialised. To do this,turn the steering wheel from one end tothe other and bring it back to the centreposition within 30 seconds from startingthe engine. If any red warning lights onthe instrument panel remain lit, stop theengine, wait for at least 5 seconds andrepeat the starting procedure describedabove.

11 04026V0001EM

20

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

STARTINGWITH FLATKEYBATTERY

If the remote control battery is flat,proceed as follows to start the vehicle:

lift the front armrest;lay the key on the indicated spot,

respecting the depicted shape fig. 12.

STEERING LOCK(where provided)

Activation

The steering lock is engaged when thedriver door is opened with the ignitiondevice button at STOP.

Deactivation

The steering lock disengages when theignition device is pressed and theelectronic key is recognised.

WARNING

1)Always take the key with you when youleave your vehicle to prevent someone fromaccidentally operating the controls.Remember to engage the electric parkingbrake. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.2) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out anyafter-market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifications(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) thatcould adversely affect performance,invalidate the warranty, cause SERIOUSSAFETYPROBLEMS and also result in thecar not meeting type-approvalrequirements.3)Before leaving the vehicle, ALWAYSengage the handbrake. On versionsequipped with automatic transmission,activate mode P (Park) and press the ignitiondevice to set it to STOP.When leaving thevehicle, always lock all the doors by pressingthe button on the handle.4) For versions equipped with the KeylessStart system, do not leave the electronic keyinside or near the car or in a place accessibleto children. Do not leave the vehicle with theignition device in ON position. A child couldactivate the electric window winders, othercontrols or even start the vehicle.5) If the ignition device has been tamperedwith (e.g. an attempted theft), have itchecked over by the Alfa Romeo Dealershipbefore driving again.

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER

The Engine Immobilizer system preventsunauthorised use of the vehiclepreventing to start the engine.The system does not need to beenabled/activated: operation isautomatic, regardless of the fact that thevehicle's doors are locked or unlocked.When the ignition device is set to ON, theEngine Immobilizer system identifies thecode transmitted by the key. If the codeis recognised as valid, the EngineImmobilizer system enables enginestarting.When the ignition device is brought backto STOP, the Engine Immobilizer systemdeactivates the control unit controllingthe engine, thus preventing its starting.For the correct engine startingprocedures, see the instructions in the"Starting the engine" paragraph,"Starting and driving" chapter.

IRREGULAR OPERATION

If, during starting, the key code is notcorrectly recognised, the icon isdisplayed on the instrument panel (seethe instructions in the "Warning lights andmessages" paragraph, "Knowing theinstrument panel" chapter). Thiscondition leads to the engine switchingoff after 2 seconds. In this case, bring theignition device to STOP and then to ON; ifit is still blocked, try with the other keysprovided. If it is still not possible to start

12 04026V0002EM

21

the engine, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.If the icon is displayed while driving,this means that the system is running aself-diagnosis (e.g. due to a voltage drop).If the display persists, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT NOTES

Do not tamper with the EngineImmobilizer system. Any modifications/alterations could cause the protectionfunction to be deactivated.The Engine Immobilizer system is notcompatible with certain aftermarketremote starting systems. The use ofthese devices could cause problemswhen starting and the deactivation of theprotection function.All keys provided with the vehicle havebeen programmed in accordance with theelectronics on the vehicle itself.Each key has its own code which must bestored by the system's control unit.Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership tohave new keys (up to 8) stored with acode.

ALARM

(where provided)

ALARMACTIVATION

The alarm activates in the followingcases:

wrongful opening of doors/bonnet/boot (perimeter protection);

operation of starting device with a keywhich is not validated;

cutting of the battery leads;movement inside the passenger

compartment (volumetric protection,where provided);

anomalous lifting/tilting of the car(anti-lift protection, where provided).Activation of the alarm triggers theacoustic warning and the directionindicators.

IMPORTANT The function is ensured bythe Engine Immobilizer system, which isautomatically activated when you get outof the vehicle taking the electronic keywith you and locking the doors.

IMPORTANT The alarm is adapted tomeet requirements in various countries.

SWITCHINGONTHEALARM

With the doors, bonnet and tailgateclosed and the ignition device turned toSTOP, point the electronic key towardsthe vehicle and press and release button

. The alarm can also be turned on bypressing the "door lock" button, located

on the door external handle. For furtherinformation see the "Passive Entry" itemin the "Doors" paragraph.Except on some versions for specificmarkets, the system produces a visualand acoustic warning and enables doorlocking.With the alarm on, the warning lights onthe door handle trims remain oncontinuously fig. 13.

The activation of the alarm is precededby a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault isdetected, the system emits a furtheracoustic signal.If a second acoustic signal is emittedafter the alarm is switched on, wait about4 seconds and switch off the alarm bypressing the button. Check that thedoors, bonnet and tailgate are closedproperly and then reactivate the systemby pressing the button.If the alarm emits an acoustic signal evenwhen the doors, tailgate and luggage

13 04046V0001EM

22

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

compartment are closed properly, asystem fault has occurred: in this case,contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

TURNINGTHEALARMOFF

Press the button. The followingoperations are performed:

two brief flashes of the directionindicators (where provided);

two brief acoustic signals (whereprovided);

doors are unlocked.The alarm can also be disengaged by theholder of the key, by grasping one of thefront handles. For further informationsee the "Passive Entry" item in the"Doors" paragraph.

IMPORTANT The alarm does not switchoff when the central opening is activatedusing the metal insert in the key.

VOLUMETRIC/ANTI-LIFTPROTECTION(where provided)To ensure the correct operation of theprotection, completely close the sidewindows.To disable the function, press buttonfig. 14 before activating the alarm.When the function is disabled, this isindicated by the LED on the buttonflashing for several seconds.

Any disabling of the volumesensing/anti-lift protection must berepeated each time the instrument panelis switched off.

DISABLINGTHEALARM

To completely disable the alarm (e.g.during a long period of car inactivity), lockthe doors by turning the metal insert,found inside the electronic key, in thedoor lock.

DOORS

LOCKING/UNLOCKINGDOORS FROMTHE INSIDE

Central locking/unlocking

If all doors are closed properly, they willautomatically be locked once the vehiclehas exceeded approximately 12 mph(20 km/h) ("Auto relock" function active).Press the button on the driver side,passenger side or rear (where provided)door panel trims fig. 15 to lock the doors.With doors locked, press the buttonon the front door panel trims to unlockthem.

LOCKING/UNLOCKINGDOORS FROMTHEOUTSIDE

Locking from the outside

With the doors closed, press thebutton on the key.

In any case, the doors can be locked withall the doors closed and the tailgate open.

14 04046S0002EM

15 04056V0001EM

23

When the button on the key ispressed, all the locks are closed, includingthat of the open tailgate. The latter willbe locked when it is closed.

2)

Door unlocking from the outside

Press button on the key.

Locking/unlocking doors from theoutside in an emergency

If the battery is flat or the remote controlis faulty, you can lock/unlock the doorsfrom the outside by inserting androtating the metal insert (available insidethe electronic key) in the lock of thedriver side door.

PASSIVE ENTRY(where provided)

3)

The Passive Entry system can identifythe presence of an electronic key nearthe doors and the tailgate.The system enables the doors (or thetailgate) to be locked/unlocked withoutpressing any buttons on the electronickey.The key is detected only after the systemrecognises the presence of a hand in oneof the front handles. If the detected keyis valid, the doors and the tailgate areunlocked (the elements that open dependon the Connect system settings).Where the function is provided, graspingthe handle of the driver's door unlocksthe driver's door only, or all the doors,

depending on the mode set in theConnect system.IMPORTANT If wearing gloves, or if it hasrained and the door handle is wet, theactivation sensitivity of the Passive Entryfunction may be reduced, resulting in alonger reaction time.

Door locking

To lock the doors, proceed as follows:make sure that you have the

electronic key and are close to the driveror passenger side door handle;

press the "door locking" buttonfig. 16 on the handle: this will lock all thedoors and the tailgate. Locking the doorswill also activate the alarm (whereprovided).

IMPORTANT After pressing the "doorlocking" button, you need to wait twoseconds before the doors can beunlocked again using the door handle. It istherefore possible to check whether the

car is locked correctly by pulling the doorhandle within 2 seconds. The doors willnot be unlocked again.The car doors and tailgate can be lockedin any case by pressing the button onthe electronic key or on the car’s innerdoor panel.

Driver side door emergency opening

If the electronic key does not work, e.g.because its battery is flat or the carbattery is flat, the emergency metalinsert inside the key can anyway be usedto operate the lock, unlocking the driverside door.To extract the metal insert, proceed asfollows:

Pressing in the points indicated infig. 17 extract the cover pullingdownwards;

remove the key insert from its housingfig. 18;

insert the metal insert in the driverside door lock and turn it to unlock thedoor.

16 04056S0003EM

24

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

NOTE The metal insert of the key has noforced insertion direction and can beinserted indifferently in the lock.

IMPORTANT NOTES

To avoid leaving the electronic key insidethe car accidentally, the Passive Entryfunction features an automatic doorunlocking function.If one of the car doors is open and the"door locking" button fig. 19 on the frontdoor handles or the button on the door

panel inner trim fig. 20 is pressed, the carchecks inside and outside the car foractive electronic keys once all the opendoors are closed.

Do not simultaneously push thelock/unlock door button fig. 19 and pullthe handle, (see fig. 21 ).

If one of the electronic keys is detectedinside the vehicle and no other activeelectronic key is detected outside thevehicle, the Passive Entry functionautomatically unlocks all the vehicledoors and operates the directionindicators.If, on the contrary, one or more electronickeys are inside the passengercompartment, pressing the button onthe remote control the keys inside thepassenger compartment are temporarilydisabled.The vehicle will not unlock the doors ifone of the following situations is present:

an unauthorised electronic key closeto the car has been detected outside.If the Passive Entry function is disabledusing the Connect system, theprotections to avoid leaving accidentallythe electronic key inside the car aredeactivated.

17 04016S0002EM

18 04016S0003EM

19 04056S0003EM

20 04056V0001EM

21 04056S0004EM

25

Accessing the luggage compartment

Approach the tailgate with a validelectronic key and press the openingbutton fig. 22 to access the luggagecompartment.

IMPORTANT If the electronic key isinadvertently forgotten inside theluggage compartment and an attempt ismade to close it from the outside, thetailgate will not lock unless anotherelectronic key is recognised outside andclose to the vehicle. With the doorslocked, if only the tailgate is unlocked anda key is detected inside when it is lockedagain, the tailgate will be unlocked againand the lights will flash twice.IMPORTANT Before driving make surethe tailgate is closed correctly.

Tailgate locking

The car’s tailgate may still be locked bypressing the button on the electronickey, by pressing the door lock button on

the external handles or by pressing thebutton on the car’s door panel.

System activation/deactivation

The Passive entry system can beactivated/deactivated using the Connectsystem.

POWER LOCK(where provided)

6)

This safety device inhibits the operationof the interior door handles and the doorlocking/unlocking button.It thereby prevents the opening of thedoors from inside the passengercompartment, serving as an obstacle tobreak-in attempts (e.g. broken window).We recommend that you activate thedevice each time you park your vehicle.

Activating the device

The device is enabled on all the doors bypressing the button on the key twicequickly.The direction indicators flash 3 times tolet you know that the device is active.If one or more of the doors are not closedcorrectly, the device will not activate,thus preventing a person from gettingstuck inside the passenger compartmentby entering the vehicle through, and thenclosing, the open door.

Deactivating the device

The device disengages automatically:when the doors are unlocked (pressing

button on the key with remotecontrol);

when the ignition device is set to ON.

CHILD SAFETYDEVICE

7) 8)

This system prevents the rear doors frombeing opened from the inside.This device fig. 23 can be engaged onlywith the doors open:

position : device engaged (doorlocked);

position : device not engaged (doormay be opened from the inside).The device remains engaged even if thedoors are electrically unlocked.

IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot beopened from the inside when the childsafety device is engaged.

22 04056V0005EM

23 04056S0007EM

26

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

UNLOCKINGTHEDOORSWITHA FLATBATTERY

Proceed as follows to unlock the doors ifthe car battery is flat.

Rear doors and passenger door

Proceed as follows:insert the metal insert of the

electronic key in the release devicehousing fig. 24;

turn the key clockwise for the rightdoor locks or anticlockwise for the leftdoor locks;

remove the key from the housing.Proceed in one of the following ways torealign the door lock device (only whenthe battery charge has been restored):

press the button on the electronickey;

press the button on the door panel;

open by inserting the key insert in thedriver's door lock;

operate the internal door handle.

IMPORTANT For the rear doors, if thechild lock device was engaged and thepreviously described locking procedurecarried out, operating the internal handlewill not open the door but will only realignthe lock release device. To open the door,the outside handle must be used. Thedoor central locking/unlocking buttonsare not deactivated when the emergencylock is engaged.

WARNING

6)Once the Power Lock system is engaged,it is impossible to open the doors from insidethe vehicle. Before getting out of the car,please therefore check that there is no-oneleft inside.7)NEVER leave children unattended insidethe car, let alone leave the car with the doorsunlocked in a place that children can accesseasily. Children may seriously, or evenfatally, injure themselves. Also ensure thatchildren do not inadvertently operate theelectric parking brake, the brake pedal or thetransmission lever.8)Always use this device when carryingchildren. After engaging the child lock onboth rear doors, check for effectiveengagement by trying to open a door withthe internal handle.

IMPORTANT

2)Make sure to take the key with you once adoor or the tailgate is locked, to preventlocking the same key inside the vehicle. If thekey has been locked in, it can only berecovered using the second provided key.3) The operation of the recognition systemdepends on various factors, such as, forexample, any electromagnetic waveinterference from external sources (e.g.mobile phones), the charge of the battery inthe electronic key and the presence of metalobjects near the key or the car. In thesecases it is still possible to unlock the doorsby using the metal insert in the electronic key(see description on the following pages).

24 04056S0008EM

27

SEATS

The front seats can be adjusted so as toensure maximum comfort for theoccupants.Driver seat adjustment must also becarried out remembering that, keepingthe shoulders resting firmly against thebackrest, the wrists must be able toreach the top of the steering wheel rim.It must also be possible to fully press thebrake pedal with the left foot.

FRONTSEATSWITHMANUALADJUSTMENT

9)

4)

Longitudinal adjustment

Lift lever 1 fig. 25 and push the seatforwards or backwards.

10)

IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustmentwhile sitting on the seat involved (driverside or passenger side).

Height adjustment

Adjust lever 2 fig. 25 upwards ordownwards to obtain the required height.

IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustmentwhile sitting on the seat involved (driverside or passenger side).

Backrest angle adjustment

Move lever 3 fig. 25 to adjust thebackrest angle, accompanying it with themovement of the torso (operate the leveruntil the desired position is reached, thenrelease it).Folding the backrest forward

(where provided)The front passenger seat can be foldedforward by operating lever 3 fig. 25.During this operation, accompany thebackrest down with your free hand.Folding the backrest down furtherincreases the size of the loadcompartment.

ELECTRICALLYADJUSTABLE FRONTSEATS

5)

The buttons for electrical seatadjustment are on the outer side of theseat, near the floor.These buttons can be used to adjust theheight, the lengthwise position in relationto the vehicle and the angle of thebackrest.

Height adjustment

Use the rear part of switch 1 fig. 26 tomodify the height and/or the angle of theseat cushion.

25 04066V0001EM

26 04066V0003EM

28

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

Longitudinal adjustment

Push switch 1 fig. 26 forwards orbackwards to move the seat in thecorresponding direction.

Backrest angle adjustment

Push switch 2 fig. 26 forwards orbackwards to adjust the backrest in thecorresponding direction.

Electric lumbar adjustment

Use the joystick 3 fig. 26 to operate thelumbar area device to obtain maximumdriving comfort.Operating the following parts of thejoystick:

top: inflates the cushion;bottom: deflates the cushion;front: inflates the upper part of the

cushion;rear: inflates the lower part of the

cushion.

IMPORTANT The electrical adjustment isonly allowed when the ignition device isturned to ON and for about 2 minutesafter it is turned to STOP. The seat canalso be moved after opening/closing thedoor for about 2 minutes; carlocking/unlocking or switching on of thecentre front ceiling light.

Seat angle adjustment (tilting)

(where provided)The seat angle can be set to fourpositions. Lift or lower the front ofcontrol 1 fig. 26 to move the front of the

seat in the corresponding direction.Release control 1 when the seat hasreached the desired position.

Backrest width adjustment(where provided)Push the switches 4 fig. 26 to adjust thewidth of the backrest through the lateralpadding.

Seat cushion extension(where provided)Lift the lever 6 fig. 27 and push the frontof the cushion forward or back. It canmove a few centimetres.

Memorising driver’s seat positions

The buttons 5 fig. 28 allow you to storeand recall three different driver’s seatpositions.You can store and recall for 20 minuteswith the starter switch in the STOPposition or with the starter switch in theON position, the engine running and thevehicle moving. The performed position

memorisation is confirmed by an acousticwarning.To memorise a seat position, adjust itwith the various controls, then press thebutton where you want to memorise theposition for 1.5 seconds. When a newseat position is memorised, thepreviously memorised position on thesame button is automaticallyoverwritten.Recalling a memorised position is alsopossible for about 3 minutes after thedoors are opened and about 1 minuteafter the engine is stopped. To recall amemorised position, press the relevantbutton briefly.

27 04066S0017EM

28 04066V0015EM

29

EASYENTRYFUNCTION

The Easy Entry function is designed toretract the driver side seat automaticallyby 2.36 in (60 mm) to make it easier forthe driver to get in and out of the car.The movement is activated only if theseat is set to a driving position which is infront of the B pillar of the car.The function is always active andassociated with electrically adjustablefront seats for each of the three storedpositions.

Activating entrance mode

With the door open and the starter deviceat STOP, the driver side seat will be in aposition retracted by 2.36 in (60 mm)with respect to the driving position set bythe user.When the door is closed and the starterdevice is in the ON position, the seat willautomatically return to the set drivingposition.NOTE If the seat is moved manually whileit is still in retracted position, it willremain in the new set position when thecar is entered again.

Activating exit mode

In order to help the driver get out of thecar, the driver side seat will move back by2.36 in (60 mm) when the starter deviceis in STOP mode and the driver side dooris opened.NOTE Pressing any button on the seatmemory or control panel will immediately

interrupt the automatic positioningfunction (antipanic function). Theoperation must be repeated to completethe function.

FRONTSEATELECTRIC HEATING(where provided)With ignition device at ON, press thebuttons fig. 29 on the dashboard.

You can select three heating levels:“minimum heating”: one white LED lit

on the buttons;“average heating": two white LEDs lit

on the buttons.“maximum heating”: three white LEDs

lit on the buttons.Press the buttons for a few seconds toactivate the "fast maximum heating"function or to turn it off.After selecting one heating level, youneed to wait for a few minutes until warmair flows into the compartment.When the "maximum heating" setting is

selected, the heater produces a boostedheat level for the first minutes ofoperation. After this, the heat lowers toreach the normal temperature level forthe selected function.The same "minimum heating" setting isautomatically deactivated once a certainperiod of time has elapsed. This varies ona case-by-case basis, in accordance withthe specific operating conditions.

IMPORTANT To preserve the batterycharge, this function cannot be activatedwhen the engine is off.

IMPORTANT The set heating level isstored when the engine is stopped and isrestored if the engine is restarted withina few minutes, otherwise the system willremain off.

REARSEATS

The rear seats allow for:three passengers

The seats and the seatbelts areconsidered as components of theprotection system for the vehicle'soccupants.

11)

IMPORTANT Refer to the "Passengerprotection systems" chapter in the"Safety" section for the positioning of theseatbelts.

The rear seat allows the luggagecompartment to be partially (1/3 or 2/3)or totally extended.

29 04066V0004EM

30

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

Partial extension of the luggagecompartment (1/3 or 2/3)

Extending the right side of the luggagecompartment (1/3 of the rear seat)allows you to carry two passengers onthe left part of the rear seat, whileextending the left side (2/3 of the rearseat) allows you to carry one passenger.Proceed as follows:

completely lower the rear seat headrestraints;

place the seat belt so that it doesn'timpede the movement of the backrestwhile tilting it;

operate the left-hand lever 1fig. 31 (inside the luggage compartment)to fold down the left side, or the mirrorimage right-hand lever to fold down theright side of the backrest. It will foldforwards automatically. If necessary,accompany the backrest during the initialstage of tilting.

Full expansion of the luggagecompartment

Tilting the rear seat completely forwardsallows maximum loading volume.Proceed as follows:

completely lower the rear seat headrestraints;

place the seatbelts so that they don'timpede the movement of the backrestwhile tilting it;

operate the levers 1 fig. 31 to folddown the backrests. They will foldforwards automatically. If necessary,accompany the backrests during theinitial stage of tilting.It is also possible to disengage thesections of the rear seat from inside theluggage compartment using one of thetwo levers located under the rear seatfig. 32. Each lever folds down the sectionof the backrest on the same side.

Repositioning the backrests

Move the seatbelts to the side, makingsure that they are correctly extended andnot twisted and that they are not trappedbehind the backrests of the seats, thenlift the backrests pushing them back untilyou hear the locking click on bothattachment mechanisms.

12)

Central backrest section tilting

Before tilting the backrest, make surethat the rear central seat belt is notfastened and that there are no objects inthe central part of the cushion (if thereare any, remove them).Using the fig. 33 strap, release thecentral part of the backrest from itshousing and tilt it using the headrestraint.

30 04066V0005EM 31 04066V0009EM 32 04066V0007EM

31

Central backrest section repositioning

Using the head restraint, lift the centralportion upwards, accompanying it duringits movement, lightly press to make surethat it is properly attached. Make surethat the armrest is properly attached bytrying to move it. If it is not attachedcorrectly, repeat the operation.

WARNING

9)All adjustments must be made with thecar stationary.10)Once you have released the adjustmentlever, always check that the seat is locked onthe guides by trying to move it back andforth. If the seat is not locked into place, itmay unexpectedly slide and cause the driverto lose control of the car.11)Always make sure that all those onboard the car are seated and are wearingtheir seat belts correctly.

12)Make sure the backrests are properlysecured at both sides to prevent them frommoving forward, in the event of sharpbraking, with possible impact with of thepassengers.

IMPORTANT

4) The fabric upholstery of the seats hasbeen designed to withstand long-term wearderiving from normal use of the car. Someprecautions are however required. Avoidprolonged and/or excessive rubbing againstclothing accessories such as metal bucklesandVelcro strips which, by applying a highpressure on the fabric in a small area, couldcause it to break, thereby damaging theupholstery.5)Do not place any kind of items under theelectrically adjusted seats as they couldimpede their movement or otherwisedamage the controls.6)Before tilting the backrest, remove anyobjects on the seat cushion.

HEADRESTRAINTS

ADJUSTMENTS

13)

They are height-adjustable: to adjustthem operate as follows.Upward adjustment: raise the headrestraint until it clicks into place.Downward adjustment: press button 1fig. 34 and lower the head restraint.

REARHEADRESTRAINTS(adjustments)

The height of the side seats headrestraints can be adjusted. The headrestraint on the central seat is onlyremovable.Upward adjustment: raise the headrestraint until it clicks into place.Downward adjustment: press button 1fig. 35 and lower the head restraint.

33 04066V0008EM

34 04076V0001EM

32

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

IMPORTANT To permit maximumvisibility for the driver, if the headrestraints are not used, they are movedto the rest position: fully down.

HEADRESTRAINTS (removal)

Proceed as follows to remove the headrestraints:

raise the head restraints to theirmaximum height;

press button 1 to lift the headrestraint, then press device 2fig. 34 (front head restraint) or 1 and 2fig. 35 (rear head restraint) to remove it.

IMPORTANT Always re-position the rearhead restraints if they had been removedbefore starting to drive normally. Re-fitthe rods of the head restraints in theirhousings, holding buttons 1 and2 pressed . Then, re-position the headrestraints according to your needs.

WARNING

13)Head restraints must be adjusted sothat the head, rather than the neck, rests onthem. Only in this case they can protect yourhead correctly. Any removed head restraintsmust be repositioned correctly, in order toprotect the occupants in the event of impact:follow the instructions above.

STEERINGWHEEL14) 15)

ADJUSTMENTS

The steering wheel can be adjusted bothin height and in depth.

35 04076V0002EM

36 04086V0001EM

33

To adjust the position bring the lever 1fig. 36 down to position A, after which thesteering wheel can be adjusted to themost suitable position and subsequentlylocked in this position by bringing lever1 to position B again.

ELECTRIC STEERINGWHEELHEATING(where provided)With ignition device at ON, press the

fig. 37 button on the air conditionercontrol panel.

When the function is enabled, the LED onthe button switches on.

IMPORTANT If this function is activatedwith the engine stopped the battery mayrun down.

WARNING

14)All adjustments must be carried out onlywith the car stationary and engine stopped.15) It is absolutely forbidden to carry outany after-market operation involvingsteering system or steering columnmodifications (e.g. installation of anti-theftdevice) that could adversely affectperformance, invalidate the warranty, causeSERIOUS SAFETYPROBLEMS and alsoresult in the car not meeting type-approvalrequirements.

REARVIEWMIRRORS

INTERIORMIRROR

Operate lever fig. 38 to adjust the mirrorinto two different positions: normal oranti-glare.

The mirror is fitted with a safety devicethat causes its release in the event of aviolent impact with the passenger.

ELECTROCHROMIC INTERIORMIRROR(where provided)On some versions, an electrochromicmirror is available, that can automaticallymodify its reflecting action to preventdazzling the driver fig. 39.The electrochromic mirror has anON/OFF button to activate/deactivatethe electrochromic anti-glaring function.

37 04086V0002EM

38 04106S0001EM

34

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

When reverse gear is engaged, the mirroris automatically set for daytime use.

DOORMIRRORS

Electric adjustment

The mirrors can only be adjusted with theignition device at ON.Select the desired mirror using device 1fig. 40:

device in position A: left mirrorselected;

device in position B: right mirrorselected.

16)

To adjust the selected mirror, use device1 in the four directions.

IMPORTANT Once adjustment iscomplete, rotate device 1 to position D toprevent accidental movements.

Manual folding

To fold the mirrors, move them from theopen position to the closed positionfig. 41.

Electric folding(where provided)With device 1 in position D, move it toposition C fig. 40. Turn the device 1 againto position C to return the mirrors to thedriving position.If device 1 is turned again during doormirror folding (from closed to openposition and vice versa), their movementdirection is reversed.Automatic activation

Activating the central door lockingsystem from outside the carautomatically folds the mirrors, theyreturn to the driving position when theignition switch is turned to the ONposition.If the external mirrors were foldedoperating on the device 1, they could bereturned to the driving position onlyoperating a new control on the device.Activation/deactivation of the function

The electric mirror folding function canbe activated/deactivated using theConnect system menu (the defaultsetting of the function is “Active”).Alternatively, you can choose toopen/close the mirrors automaticallywhen opening/closing the doors (usingthe electronic key or the Passive Entrysystem, where provided).

IMPORTANT The hand-controlled electricfolding operation can be enabled onlywhen the car speed is lower than 30 mph

39 04106S0002EM 40 04106V0004EM

41 04106V0005EM

35

(50 Km/h), so they can only be manuallycontrolled up to that speed.IMPORTANT The mirrors must always beopen while driving and should never befolded.

ELECTROCHROMIC EXTERIORMIRRORS(where provided)As well as an inside mirror, anelectrochromic mirror is also available onsome versions, which automaticallymodifies its reflecting properties toprevent dazzling the driver. Theanti-glare electrochromic enable/disablebutton fig. 39 is the same for all rear viewmirrors.

ELECTRIC DOORMIRRORHEATING

Pressing the button on the airconditioner activates thedemisting/defrosting of the external rearview mirrors.

WARNING

16)As door mirrors are curved, andtherefore they may slightly alter theperception of distance.

EXTERNAL LIGHTS

LIGHTSWITCH

The following controls are available in thepanel on the left of the steering wheel:fig. 421 - parking sensors deactivation button;2 - side/tail light, daylight running lights,dipped beam headlight switch;3 - fog lights button;4 - ring for adjusting the brightness of theinstrument panel and the graphics on thecontrol buttons;5 - ring for adjusting the headlightalignment (where provided);6 - rear fog lights button;7 - Start&Stop Evo function deactivationbutton.

The external lights can be activated onlywhen the ignition device is in position ON,except for the parking lights. See the

"Parking lights" paragraph, in this chapterfor more information.The instrument panel and the variouscontrols on the dashboard will be lit upwhen the exterior lights are switched on.

AUTO FUNCTION (Dusk sensor)

This is implemented by an infrared LEDsensor on the windscreen that works inconjunction with the rain sensor. It is ableto detect variations in the outside lightlevel based on the light sensitivity setthrough the Connect system.The higher the sensitivity, the lower theamount of external light needed toswitch the lights on.

Function activation

Turn the light switch to the position.

IMPORTANT The function can only beactivated with the ignition device at ON.

Function deactivation

To deactivate the function, turn the lightswitch to a position other than .

DIPPEDHEADLIGHTS

Turn the light switch to to switch onthe side lights, the lights on theinstrument panel and the dipped beamheadlights.The warning light switches on in theinstrument panel.

42 04126V0001EM

36

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

DAYTIMERUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) ANDSIDE LIGHTS (Daytime Running Lights)(where provided)

17) 18)

With the ignition device turned to ON andthe light switch turned to position thedaytime running lights are automaticallyactivated; the other lights and interiorlighting remain off.Where provided, when the directionindicators are activated, thecorresponding DRL will be dimmed (on35W Bi-Xenon Headlamps, the DRL willbe turned off), until the directionindicators are deactivated.Where provided, the DRL can beactivated/deactivated from Connectsystem, by selecting the followingfunctions in sequence on the main MENU:"Settings", "Lights" and "Daytime RunningLights".

IMPORTANT For markets where DRL useis not required, these lights work as sidelights and they are switched on and offjointly with the main beam headlights.

FRONTFOG LIGHTS(where provided)The fog light switch is integrated with thelight switch.Press the button to turn on the foglights with side lights and dipped beamheadlights on.To turn off the fog lights, press the

button again or turn the switch to theposition.

The fog lights are switched on with thedipped beam headlights or DRL on (thelatter work as side lights) and areswitched on when switching on the mainbeam headlights but not when the mainbeam headlights are flashed only.If the fog lights are not switched offbefore stopping the engine, the next timethe engine is started they will switch onagain.

Cornering lights

(where provided)The fog lights perform corneringfunction. This function allows toilluminate the road or a corner better bylighting the corresponding fog light.The cornering function can bedeactivated on the Connect system byselecting the following functions insequence on the main menu: "Settings","Lights" and "Cornering Lights".

REAR FOG LIGHT

The rear fog light switch is integratedwith the light switch.Press the button to switch the lighton/off.The rear fog light switches on only whenthe dipped beam headlights or fog lightsare switched on. The light can beswitched off by pressing the buttonagain or by switching off the dippedbeam headlights.When the engine is stopped with the rearfog lights on, the next time the engine isstarted the lights will, however, be off.

PARKING LIGHTS

They are switched on if, within a fewseconds from stopping the engine, thelight switch is put first in the positionand then the position. All side lightsswitch on, if you want to leave only thoseon one side (right/left) switched on, youneed to move the direction indicatorscontrol on the position on the side youwish to leave on.The warning light switches on in theinstrument panel.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition switchto ON turns off the parking lights, whichwere on only on one side.

37

HEADLIGHTSOFFTIMER

The "Follow Me" function delays theswitching off of the headlights after thecar has been stopped.The function can be enabled from theConnect system by selecting thefollowing functions from the main menuin sequence: "Settings", "Lights" and"Follow me"; the side lights and thedipped beam headlights stay on for atime that can be set between 30, 60 and90 seconds.

Function activation

With the headlights on, take the ignitiondevice to the STOP position: the timerstarts when the light switch is turned tothe position.

IMPORTANT To activate this function theheadlights must be deactivated within2 minutes after the ignition device hasbeen taken to STOP.

Function deactivation

This function is deactivated by switchingon the headlights, the side lights orbringing the ignition device to ON.

AFS FUNCTION (Adaptive FrontlightSystem)(where provided)This is a system combined with Xenonheadlights (Bi-Xenon Headlamps 35Wversion) which directs the main lightbeam, horizontally and vertically, andcontinuously and automatically adapts itto the driving conditions roundbends/when cornering.The system directs the light beam to lightup the road in the best way, taking intoaccount the speed of the car, thebend/corner angle and the speed ofsteering.The adaptive lights are automaticallyactivated when the car is started.

MAIN BEAMHEADLIGHTS

To activate the fixed main beamheadlights push the left lever towardsthe instrument panel fig. 43. The lightswitch must be turned to or .With main beam headlights on, the

warning light/icon on the instrumentpanel will come on at the same time.

The main beam headlights are switchedoff by pushing the left stalk forwardagain. Warning light/icon switches offin the instrument panel.

Blinking

The flashing of the main beam headlightsis activated by pulling the left stalktowards the steering wheel, the lightsremain on while you are operating thelever.

Automatic high beam headlights

(where provided)In order not to dazzle other road users,the lights are automatically deactivatedwhen approaching cars travelling in theopposite direction or when following acar travelling in the same direction.This function is enabled using theConnect system and with the light switchturned to the position.The first time the main beam headlightsare activated (pushing the left lever), the

43 04126S0020EM

38

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

function is activated (the warning lightor the symbol comes on in the

instrument panel).If the main beam headlights are actuallyon, the blue icon/warning light will alsocome on in the instrument panel.When the speed is higher than 37 mph(60 km/h) and the function is active, thelights switch off if the left stalk is pushedagain.When the speed is lower than 15 mph(25 km/h) and the function is active, thefunction switches the main beamheadlights off.If the fixed main beam headlights areoperated quickly again (pushing the leftstalk towards the instrument panel), thewarning light/icon will switch on in theinstrument panel and the main beamheadlights will be switched on constantlyuntil the speed exceeds 37 mph(60 km/h).When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) isexceeded again, the automaticfunctioning is reactivated.If the left stalk is pushed again in thiscondition, to request main beamheadlight deactivation, the functiondeactivates and the main beamheadlights switch off.To deactivate the automatic functionrotate the light switch ring nut to position

.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

The direction indicators could assumetwo different flashing strategies:continuous or temporary (Lane Change).To activate continuous flashing, move theleft lever fig. 43 to the end of its travel(unstable):

up: right direction signal activated, thewarning light flashes on theinstrument panel;

down: left direction signal activated,the warning light flashes on theinstrument panel.The or warning light will blink onthe instrument panel.The direction indicators turn ofautomatically when the car is broughtback onto a straight course or by movingthe lever in the opposite direction untilthe first click (about half way).

"Lane Change" function

When you want to signal a lane change,move the lever until the first impulse(about half stroke).The direction indicator on the selectedside flashes three times and thenswitches off automatically. To turn of theflashing before the end of the cycle,move the lever in the opposite directionuntil the first click (about half way).

HEADLIGHTREGULATION

Light beam direction

The correct aiming of the headlights isimportant for the comfort and safety of

not only the driver but all other roadusers. This is also covered by a specificrule of the highway code.The headlights must be correctly alignedto guarantee the best visibility conditionsfor all drivers while travelling withheadlights on.Contact a Alfa Romeo Dealership to havethe headlights checked and adjusted, ifnecessary.On vehicles equipped with manualheadlight alignment adjuster, check lightbeam alignment every time the load or itsdistribution changes.

Headlight alignment corrector

(where provided)This device is not available on vehiclesequipped with Xenon headlights(Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp version), asthese have an automatic alignmentcorrection system.It only operates with the ignition deviceat ON.

44 04126V0006EM

39

To adjust, rotate the ring 5 fig. 44.Position 0: one or two people on the

front seats;Position 1: 4 or 5 passengersPosition 2: 4 or 5 passengers + load in

the luggage compartmentPosition 3: driver + maximum

admissible load stowed only in theluggage compartment

IMPORTANT Check the headlightalignment each time the weight of theload transported changes.

ADJUSTINGTHEHEADLIGHTSWHENABROAD

Dipped beam headlights are adjusted fordriving in the country where the vehiclewas originally purchased.When travelling in countries withopposite driving direction, to avoiddazzling the drivers on the other side ofthe road, you need to cover areas of theheadlight according to the Highway Codeof the country you are travelling in.

WARNING

17) The daytime running lights are analternative to the dipped headlights fordriving during the daytime in countrieswhere it is compulsory to have lights onduring the day; where it is not compulsory,the use of daytime running lights ispermitted.18)Daytime running lights cannot replacedipped beam headlights when driving atnight or through tunnels. The use of daytimerunning lights is governed by the highwaycode of the country in which you are driving.Comply with legal requirements.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

FRONTCEILING LIGHT

Switch 1 fig. 45 switches on/off light8.

Switch 2 is used to switch the rearceiling lights on/off.

Switch 3 switches on/off all lightinside the ceiling lights (front and rear) inthe passenger's compartment.

Switch 4 activates or deactivates theceiling light 6, 7, 8 switching on/off uponopening/closing the doors. Lights switchon/off progressively.

Switch 5 switches on/off light 6.

IMPORTANT Before getting out of thevehicle, make sure that the ceiling lightbulbs are off; this will prevent the batterylevel from being uselessly drained oncethe doors are closed. In any case, if a lightis left on by mistake, the ceiling light

45 04136S0001EM

40

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

switches off automatically about15 minutes after the engine has beenswitched off.

Ceiling light timing

On certain versions, to facilitate gettingin/out of the vehicle at night or inpoorly-lit areas, two timed modes havebeen provided.

Timing while getting into the car

The roof lights switch on according to thefollowing modes:

for a few seconds when the doors areunlocked;

for about 3 minutes when one of thedoors is opened;

for a few seconds when the doors arelocked.Timing is interrupted when the ignitiondevice is turned to ON.Three modes are provided for switchingoff:

when all doors are closed, thethree-minute timer will stop and afew-seconds one will start. This timingwill stop when the ignition device isturned to ON;

when doors are locked (either withremote control or with key inserted ondriver side door), the ceiling lightswitches off;

the interior lights are switched off inany case after 15 minutes to preservebattery charge.

Timing while getting out of the car

After positioning the starter switch toSTOP, the ceiling lights switch on asfollows:

for a few seconds after the enginestops;

for about 3 minutes when one of thedoors is opened;

for a few seconds when one of thedoors is closed.The timing stops automatically when thedoors are locked.

Courtesy ceiling lights

There is a ceiling light behind the driverand passenger sun visors (whereprovided) which illuminates the mirrorbehind the sun visor fig. 46.

The courtesy light switches onautomatically by lifting cover 1.

GLOVE COMPARTMENTLIGHT

This light comes on automatically whenthe glove compartment is opened andswitches off when it is closed.The light switches on/off regardless ofthe ignition device status.

46 04136V0002EM

47 04136V0003EM

41

INTERIORAMBIENTLIGHTING

The brightness of the interior passengercompartment lights can be adjustedthrough the Connect system.To access the adjustment function, on themain menu select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Lights" and"Interior Ambient Lighting". Thebrightness can be adjusted at sevenlevels.

DOOR LIGHT

The door light is under the doors fig. 48.This light comes on automatically whenthe door is opened and switches off whenit is closed.The light switches on/off regardless ofthe ignition device status.

On vehicles equipped with a "Passiveentry" system, another light can be foundunder each external door handle fig. 49.

REAR CEILING LIGHT

The rear ceiling lights buttons areactivated or deactivated with button 2fig. 45 of the front ceiling lights.

Switch 3 fig. 50 switches on/off light2.

Switch 4 switches on/off light 1.The lights switch on when a door opened.IMPORTANT The light will go outautomatically after a few minutes if a

door is forgotten open. To switch it onagain, open another door or close andreopen the same door.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTCOURTESYLIGHTS

The luggage compartment has twocourtesy lights fig. 51.These switch on automatically when theboot is opened and switch off when it isclosed.

The roof lights switch on/off regardlessof the position of the ignition switch.If the boot is left open, the lights willautomatically switch off after15 minutes to preserve the battery life.

48 04136V0007EM

49 04136S0005EM

50 04136S0004EM

51 04136V0006EM

42

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

INSTRUMENTPANELANDCONTROLBUTTONGRAPHIC BRIGHTNESSADJUSTMENT

With side lights or headlights on, turn thering fig. 52 upwards to increase thebrightness of the instrument panel andcontrol button graphics lighting, or turnthe ring downwards to decrease it. Thecontrol operates with pulses, so evertime it is activated, the brightnessincreases/decreases by one level, up to amaximum of seven.

WINDSCREENWIPER

The right stalk controls screenwiper/washer operation.This operates only with the ignitiondevice at ON.

SCREENWIPER/WASHER

Operation

7) 8)

The ring fig. 53 can be set to thefollowing positions:

windscreen wiper off.

rotating the ring nut to the firstposition activates the firstsensitivity level of the rain sensor.

rotating the ring nut to the secondposition activates the secondsensitivity level of the rain sensor.

rotating the ring nut to the thirdposition activates the firstcontinuous speed level of thewindscreen wipers in manual mode.

rotating the ring nut to the fourthposition activates the secondcontinuous speed level of thewindscreen wipers in manual mode.

Move the stalk upwards (it only hasunstable positions) to activate the MISTfunction. It only operates while the stalkis held in this position. When released, thestalk will return to its default positionand the windscreen wiper will beautomatically stopped. This function isuseful to remove small deposits of dustfrom the windscreen, or morning dew.IMPORTANT This function does notactivate the windscreen washer;windscreen washer fluid will nottherefore be sprayed onto thewindscreen. To spray windscreen washerfluid onto the windscreen, the washingfunction must be used.With ring nut in position or , thewindscreen wiper will automaticallyadapt its operating speed to the speed ofthe vehicle.

52 04126V0016EM

53 04146V0001EM

43

Rain sensor sensitivity level

Positions and correspond also tosensitivity level 1 and 2 of the rainsensor.

“Smart washing” function

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(unstable position) to activate a washingcycle.Hold the stalk pulled to activate both thewindscreen washer jet and thewindscreen wiper with a singlemovement, until the stalk is released.

RAIN SENSOR

This is located behind the interior rearview mirror, in contact with thewindscreen fig. 54 and can detect thepresence of rain and, consequently,manage the cleaning of the windscreen inaccordance with the amount of water onthe screen.

The sensor has an adjustment range thatvaries progressively from wiper still (nostroke) when the windscreen is dry, towiper at 2 nd continuous speed (fastcontinuous operation) with intense rain.

Activation

9) 10)

Rotating the ring nut fig. 53 to positionor activates the rain sensor.

The activation of the sensor is signalledby a flick of the wiper (indicating that thecommand has been acquired).The variation in sensitivity during rainsensor operation is also signalled by aflick of the wiper (command acquired andimplemented). This stroke is alsoexecuted with the windscreen dry.If the windscreen washer is used with therain sensor activated, the normal washingcycle is performed, after which the rainsensor resumes its normal automaticoperation.

IMPORTANT Keep the glass in the sensorarea clean.

Deactivation

Use ring fig. 53 or turn the ignition deviceto STOP.In the event of malfunction of the rainsensor whilst it is active, the windscreenwiper operates intermittently at a speedconsistent with the sensitivity setting ofthe rain sensor, regardless of whetherthere is rain on the glass, while sensorfailure is indicated on the display.The sensor continues to operate and it ispossible to set the windscreen wiper tocontinuous mode or . The failureindication remains for as long as thesensor is active.

54 04146V0002EM

44

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

The rain sensor is able to recognise, andautomatically adjust itself in thepresence of the following conditions:

presence of dirt on the controlledsurface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.);

presence of streaks of water causedby the worn window wiper blades;

difference between day and night.19)

REARWINDOWWIPER/WASHER

Engaging reverse gear with thewindscreen wiper operating activates asingle cycle of the rear window wiper.Moving the stalk fig. 53 (it only hasunstable positions):

towards the instrument panel controlsrearscreen washing (a short pushactivates a washing cycle, holding thestalk pushed controls continuouswashing until it is released);

downwards activates/deactivatescontinuous rearscreen wiper operation.With the windscreen wiper already inoperation, the rearscreen wiper blademovement will be synchronised with thewindscreen wipers.

WARNING

19)Make sure the device is switched offwhenever the windscreen must be cleaned.

IMPORTANT

7)Never use the windscreen wipers toremove layers of snow or ice from thewindscreen. In such conditions, thewindscreen wiper may be subjected toexcessive stress and the motor cut-outswitch, which prevents operation for a fewseconds, may intervene. If operation is notsubsequently restored, even after restartingthe engine, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.8)Do not operate the windscreen wiper withthe blades lifted from the windscreen.9)Do not activate the rain sensor whenwashing the car in an automatic car wash.10)Make sure the device is switched off ifthere is ice on the windscreen.

45

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTAIRDIFFUSERS

Side air diffusers

1 fig. 55 - Fixed side air vents.2 fig. 55 - Adjustable side air diffusers:

use ring nut 2 to adjust the diffuser tothe desired position;

turn ring nut 2 to adjust the air flow.

Central air diffusers

1 fig. 56 - Adjustable central air diffusers:use device 2 to adjust the diffuser to

the desired position;turn ring nut 3 to adjust the air flow.

4 - Windscreen air vent

Rear air diffusers

1 fig. 57 - Adjustable rear air diffusers:use ring nut 2 to adjust the diffuser to

the desired position;turn ring nut 2 to adjust the air flow.

55 04156V0002EM

56 04156V0003EM 57 04156V0004EM

46

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

AUTOMATIC DUAL-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

2)

Controls

1. Driver side temperature adjustment knob; 2. Driver side AUTO function activation button (automatic operation); 3. Driver'sside air distribution selection button; 4. MAX-DEF function activation button (rapid defrosting/demisting); 5. Fan speedadjustment knob; 6. Heated rear window on/off button; 7. Passenger side air distribution selection button; 8. Passenger sideAUTO function activation button (automatic operation); 9. Passenger side temperature adjustment knob; 10. Driver/passengerSYNC function activation button (alignment of set temperatures); 11. Passenger side seat heater activation button; (whereprovided, see chapter on seats); 12. Climate control compressor on/off button; 13. Steering wheel heater activation button;(where provided, see chapter on steering wheel); 14. Driver side seat heater activation button; (where provided, see chapter on"Seats"); 15. Internal air recirculation and automatic operation on/off button.

58 04156V0005EM

47

Description

The automatic dual zone climate controlsystem regulates the air temperatureand distribution in the passengercompartment independently for thedriver and the passenger.The system maintains comfort inside thepassenger compartment andcompensates for possible variations inoutside weather conditions.

NOTE The reference temperature is71.6 °F (22 °C) for optimal comfortmanagement.The automatically controlled parametersand functions are:

driver/front passenger side airtemperature to the side vents;

driver/front passenger side airdistribution to the side vents;

fan speed (continuous variation of theair flow);

compressor engagement (forcooling/dehumidifying the air);

air recirculation.All these functions can be adjustedmanually by operating the system andselecting one or more functions andmodifying their parameters.Manual selections always have higherpriority than automatic settings and arestored until the AUTO button is pressed,except for cases in which the systemintervenes for safety reasons.The following operations do not

deactivate the AUTO function:recirculation on/off;compressor activation/deactivation;SYNC function activation;heated rear window on/off.

The temperature of the air sent is alwaysautomatically controlled according to thetemperature set on the display (exceptfor when the system is off or in certainconditions when the compressor is notrunning).The system allows the following to be setor adjusted manually:

driver/passenger side airtemperature;

fan speed (continuous variation);driver and passenger air distribution

to 7 positions;compressor enabling;rapid defrosting/demisting functionair recirculation;heated rear window;system deactivation.

Operatingmode of the climate controlsystem

The climate control system can beactivated in different ways: it is advisableto press the AUTO button and turn theknobs to set the desired temperatures.In this way the system operatescompletely automatically to adjust thetemperature, quantity and distribution ofthe air introduced into the passengercompartment. It also manages the air

recirculation system and the enablementof the air conditioning compressor.During automatic operation, you canchange the set temperatures,activate/deactivate the rear windowheater, activate the SYNC function,activate/deactivate the compressor andthe recirculation at any time by using therelevant buttons or knobs: the systemwill automatically change the settings toadjust to the new requirements.

AIR CONDITIONERPARAMETERSDISPLAY

The air conditioner parameters can beviewed on the Connect system display.There is a dedicated hidden pop up 1fig. 59 on the Connect system display,which is activated by pressing or rotatingthe air conditioner buttons or knobs. If nooperations are performed for a presetperiod of time, the pop up on the displaywill disappear.

59 04156S0006EM

48

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

Air temperature adjustment

Turn knob 1 or 9 clockwise oranticlockwise to adjust the airtemperature in the front left area (knob1) or the front right area (knob 9) of thepassenger compartment. The settemperatures are shown on the Connectsystem.Press the SYNC button to align the airtemperature between the two zones.Turn knob 9 to return to the separatemanagement of air temperatures in thetwo zones.Turn the knobs fully clockwise oranticlockwise to activate HI (maximumheating) or LO (maximum cooling)respectively. To deactivate thesefunctions, turn the temperature knob tothe desired temperature. All of the ventshave the same outlet air temperature.

Air distribution selection

Pressing buttons 3 and 7 for the left sideand right sides respectively, you can setone of the 7 possible distribution modes:

Air flow to the windscreen and frontside window vents todemist/defrost them.

Air flow at central and sidedashboard vents to ventilate thechest and the face during the hotseason.

Air flow to the front and rearfootwell vents. This air distributionsetting heats the passengercompartment most quickly, giving aprompt sensation of warmth.

Air flow distributed betweenfootwell vents (hotter air) andcentral and side dashboard vents(cooler air). This air distributionsetting is useful in spring andautumn on sunny days.

Air flow distributed betweenfootwell vents and windscreen andfront side window defrosting/demisting vents. This distributionsetting allows the passengercompartment to be warmedeffectively and prevents thewindows from misting.

Air flow distribution betweenwindscreen demisting/defrostingvents and side and centraldashboard vents. This allows air tobe sent to the windscreen inconditions of strong sunlight.

Air flow distribution to all diffuserson the vehicle.

In AUTO mode, the air conditionerautomatically manages the airdistribution. When set manually, the airdistribution is indicated by the respective

symbols on the Connect system displayswitching on.

Fan speed adjustment

Turn knob 5 to increase/decrease the fanspeed. The speed is displayed by thelighting up of the symbols on the Connectsystem display.

maximum fan speed = all symbols lit;minimum fan speed = one symbol lit.

The fan can be turned off by turning theknob 5 to the O position (all segments onthe Connect system display will turn off).

IMPORTANT To restore automaticcontrol of the fan speed after a manualadjustment, press the AUTO button.

AUTO button

When the AUTO button is pressed (LEDon button lit) the climate control systemautomatically adjusts the followingsettings in the corresponding zones:

quantity and distribution of the airintroduced into the passengercompartment;

climate control compressor;air recirculation;cancels any previous manual settings.

This is indicated by the LED on the AUTObutton switching on.Selecting the AUTO function turns on theLED on the compressor on/off switch.If a manual intervention is made on the airdistribution or on the fan speed, the LEDon the AUTO button switches off to

49

indicate that the climate control systemis no longer controlling all functionsautomatically.To restore automatic system controlafter one or more manual adjustments,press the AUTO button.

SYNC button

Press the SYNC button (LED on buttonlit) to align the passenger side airtemperature and air distributionmanagement with that of the driver side.This function makes temperatureregulation easier when the driver istravelling alone.Turn the knob 9 or the button 7 to set thepassenger side temperature and returnto separate air temperaturemanagement.

Air recirculation and AQS (Air QualitySystem) function

The air recirculation is managedaccording to the following operatingmode:

automatic engagement: LED on abovethe label A, on button 15;

forced activation (air circulationalways activated): LED on above the icon

, on button 15;forced deactivation (air recirculation

always off with intake of outside air):both LEDs on button 15 are off.The three operating conditions areobtained by pressing the air recirculationbutton , 15, in sequence.

Enabling the AQS (Air Quality System)function

(where provided)The AQS function automaticallyactivates internal air recirculation whenthe outside air is polluted (e.g. in trafficqueues and tunnels), when the automaticrecirculation function is selected.At low external temperatures or withhigh humidity, the automatic functionturns off to avoid misting up thewindows. The user can select the functionagain by pressing the recirculation button15.

IMPORTANT With the AQS functionactive, after the internal air recirculationsystem has been functioning for a longtime, the climate control system enablesa few cycles of outside air intake tochange the air in the passengercompartment for a preset time. The AQSfunction is disabled during the airchanges.

IMPORTANT The engagement of therecirculation system makes it possible toreach the required heating/coolingconditions faster. It is, however,inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days asit would considerably increase thepossibility of the windows misting upinside (especially if the climate controlsystem is off). When the outsidetemperature is low, recirculation isforced off (air drawn from the outside) toprevent the windows misting up.

In automatic operation inside airrecirculation will be controlledautomatically by the system according tooutside environmental conditions.

IMPORTANT It is advisable not to use theair recirculation function when theoutside temperature is low to preventthe windows from rapidly misting up.

Climate control compressor

Press the A/C button to activate/deactivate the compressor (activation isindicated by the lit LED on the button).The system remembers that thecompressor has been turned off, evenafter the engine has stopped.When the compressor is switched off, thesystem deactivates air recirculation toprevent the windows from misting up incertain weather conditions.To restore automatic control ofcompressor engagement, press again theA/C button or the AUTO button. With thecompressor off, the fan speed can bereset manually.With the compressor on and the enginerunning, manual ventilation cannot belower than the minimum speed (only onesymbol lit on the Connect display).

IMPORTANT With the compressor off, aircannot be introduced to the passengercompartment with a temperature lowerthan the outside temperature. Moreover,under certain environmental conditions,

50

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

windows could mist up rapidly since theair is not dehumidified.

Rapid window demisting/defrosting(MAX-DEF function)

Press the button to activate (LED onbutton on) the windscreen and sidewindow demisting/defrosting function.The climate control system carries outthe following operations:

switches on the air conditioningcompressor when environmentalconditions are suitable;

sets air recirculation off;sets maximum air temperature (HI) in

both areas;sets fan speed according to the engine

coolant temperature;directs air flow to windscreen and

front side windows vents;sets heated rear window on.displays the fan speed (LED on the

Connect system display lit) and the useddistribution.

IMPORTANT The MAX-DEF functionremains on for about 3 minutes fromwhen the engine coolant reaches theappropriate temperature.When the function is activated, the LEDon the AUTO button switches off. Withthe function activated the only possiblemanual adjustments are adjusting the fanspeed and turning the heated rearwindow off.When the A/C or AUTO buttons arepressed, the climate control system willdeactivate the MAX-DEF function.

Heated rear window demisting/defrosting

Press the button to activate (LED onbutton on) the heated rear windowdemisting/defrosting of the external rearview mirrors.This function switches off automaticallyafter about 20 minutes or when theengine is turned off. It is not switched onautomatically the next time the engine isstarted.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers to theinside of the heated rear window over theheating filaments, to avoid damage thatmight cause them to stop workingproperly.

Humidity sensor

The humidity sensor helps to prevent thewindows from misting up. The AUTOfunction (LED on the button on) must beactivated to enable it.

When the outside temperature is low, thesystem could automatically turn off airrecirculation for safer driving.

Switching off/on the climate controlsystem

Switching off the climate controlsystem

Rotate knob 5 counter-clockwise to turnoff the air conditioner.With climate control system off:

air recirculation is on, thus isolatingthe passenger compartment from theoutside;

the compressor is off;the fan is off;the heated rear window can be

activated/deactivated.

IMPORTANT The climate control systemcontrol unit stores the temperatures setbefore the system was switched off andrestores them when any button of thesystem is pressed.

Switching on the climate controlsystem

To switch on the climate control systemin fully automatic mode, press the AUTObutton (driver or passenger side).

51

START&STOP EVO

The automatic dual zone climate controlsystem manages the Start&Stop Evo(engine off when the vehicle speed is0 mph (0 km/h) to ensure adequatecomfort inside the vehicle.In particular, the climate control systemturns off the Stop & Start Evo if:

the climate control system is in AUTOmode (LED on the button switched on)and the temperature conditions insidethe car are far from a comforttemperature;

the climate control system is in LOmaximum cooling;

the climate control system is in HImaximum heating;

the climate control system is in theMAX-DEF status.When the Stop-Start Evo is on (engine offand vehicle speed equal to 0 mph(0 km/h)), the climate control systemrequests the engine to be restarted if theinside temperature conditions rapidlydeteriorate (or if the user requestsmaximum cooling – LO – or quickdemisting – MAX-DEF).With Stop & Start Evo on (engine off andvehicle speed equal to 0 mph (0 km/h)),the flow is reduced as much as possible,to maintain the passenger compartmentcomfort conditions for longer.The electronic climate control systemcontrol unit attempts to manage thedecreased comfort caused by stopping

the engine as far as possible (switchingoff the compressor and engine coolantpump). However, it is possible to givepriority to the climate control system byswitching off the Start & Stop Evo bypressing the button located on thedashboard controls to the left of thesteering wheel.

In particularly severe climate conditionsit is recommended to limit the use of theStop/Start Evo to prevent thecompressor from continuously switchingon and off, with consequent rapid mistingof the windows and accumulation ofhumidity with unpleasant smells in thepassenger compartment.

When the Start&Stop Evo is on (engineoff and vehicle at a standstill), theautomatic recirculation managementmay be turned off to prevent thewindows misting up, always taking air infrom outside, to reduce the probability ofthe windows misting up (as thecompressor is off).

ADDITIONALHEATER

(where provided)

The additional heater activatesautomatically depending on theenvironmental conditions and with enginerunning.

IMPORTANT The heater only operates ifthe outside temperature and engine

coolant temperature are low. The heaterwill not activate if the battery voltage istoo low.

Systemmaintenance

In winter, the climate control systemmust be turned on at least once a monthfor about 10 minutes.Have the system inspected at an AlfaRomeo Dealership before the summer.

IMPORTANT

2) The system uses R1234yf coolant gas,which does not pollute the environment in theevent of accidental leakage. Under nocircumstances use R134a and R12 fluids,which are incompatible with the componentsof the system.

52

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

WINDOWWINDERS

ELECTRICWINDOWS

20)

They work with the ignition device in theON position and for about 3 minutesafter the ignition device has been turnedto the STOP position. When one of thefront doors is opened this operation isdisabled.

Driver side front door controls

The buttons are located on the doorpanel trim. All windows can be controlledfrom the driver side door panel fig. 60.

1: front left window opening/closing."Continuous automatic" operation duringwindow opening/closing stage andanti-pinch system activated.

2: front right window opening/closing."Continuous automatic" operation duringwindow opening/closing stage andanti-pinch system activated.

3: rear right window opening/closing."Continuous automatic" operation duringwindow opening/closing stage andanti-pinch system activated.

4: enabling/disabling of rear doorelectric window controls;

5: rear left window opening/closing."Automatic continuous" operation duringwindow opening/closing and anti-pinchsystem activated.

Window opening

Push the buttons to open the desiredwindow.Each button has two position steps.Press gently (first position step) formanual "burst" window travel, whilepressing the same button harder (secondposition step) activates "continuousautomatic" operation.If the button is pressed again, the windowwill stop in the desired position.

Window closing

Lift the buttons to close the desiredwindow.The window closing stage occursfollowing the same logic described forthe opening stage both of the front doorwindows and the rear door windows.

Passenger side front door/rear doorcontrols

On the door control panel, buttons areprovided to control the associatedwindows.

Window anti-pinch safety device

The vehicle is equipped with an anti-pinchsafety device for the raising of thewindows.This safety system can recognise thepresence of any obstacle during thewindow closing movement. If this occurs,the system stops the window'smovement and reverts it, depending onits position.This device is also useful if the windowsare activated accidentally by children onboard the vehicle.The anti-pinch safety function isactivated both during the manual and theautomatic operation of the window.When the anti-pinch system is activatedthe window travel is immediatelyinterrupted. Then the window travel isautomatically reversed and the windowlowers by about 8 in (20 cm) in relation tothe first stop position. The windowcannot be operated in any way during thistime.

IMPORTANT If the anti-pinch protectionintervenes 3 consecutive times within1 minute or is faulty, the automaticclosing operation of the window isinhibited, only allowing it in "steps"; thebutton is released for the subsequentmanoeuvre. In order to restore thecorrect operation of the system, therelevant window must be lowered.

60 04166V0001EM

53

Electric window system initialisation

If power supply is interrupted, theelectric window automatic operationmust be reinitialised.To perform the initialization procedure,which must be done on each door with thedoors closed, manually fully close thewindow to be initialized.

WARNING

20) Incorrect use of the electric windowsmay be dangerous. Before and duringoperation, always check that nobody isexposed to the risk of being injured eitherdirectly by the moving window or throughobjects getting caught or hit by it.

ELECTRIC SUNROOF

(where provided)

21)

The electric sunroof comprises two glasspanels (the front one is mobile and therear one fixed) and is fitted with anelectrically operated sun blind.Operation of the sunroof is only possiblewith the ignition device at AVV.The sun roof has three preset positions:fully closed; comfort (intermediateopening)l fully open.

IMPORTANT You cannot have the blindclosed when the roof is open.

OPENING

Press the symbol on button 1 fig. 61:the roof will open to the comfort position.A second press will open it fully.A long press of the same button will openthe roof until it is released, or if helddown, until it reaches the comfortposition. Use the button in the same wayto open the roof fully from that position.

11)

The automatic motion can be interruptedin any position by pressing button1 again.If the electric blind is closed, the roofopening control opens it too.

CLOSING

From the position of complete openingpress button 1 next to the symbol: theroof will close completely.A long press of the same button movesthe roof until it is released.The automatic motion can be interruptedin any position by pressing button1 again.

SWIVELOPENING

To bring the roof to the swivel position,press and release button 2 fig. 61.This type of swivel opening can beactivated irrespective of the position ofthe sunroof. When starting with the roofin closed position, pressing the buttonautomatically causes its swivel-opening.If the roof is already open, pressing thebutton will open it to the swivel position.Pressing button 2 again during automaticmovement of the roof will stop it.

61 04186S0001EM

54

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

BLINDMOVEMENT

The sun blind is electrically operated.Press the symbol on button 3fig. 61:to open the sun blind.Press button 3 symbol: to close thesun blind.The automatic motion can be interruptedin any position by pressing button3 again.If the roof is open, the sun blind closingcontrol will also close the roof.

ANTI-PINCHDEVICE

The sun roof has an anti-pinch safetysystem capable of detecting thepresence of an obstacle during theclosing movement: if this happens, thesystem intervenes and the movement ofthe roof is immediately reversed intoopening.

INITIALISATIONPROCEDURE

Automatic operation of the sunroof mustbe initialised again in case of faultysunroof operation.Proceed as follows:

press button 1 next to the symbolto bring the roof into completely closedposition;

bring the ignition device to STOP andwait at least 10 seconds;

set the ignition device to AVV;press the symbol on button 1 and

hold it down; after 10 seconds you will

hear the electric motors of the roof andblind stop in sequence;

release the button and within5 seconds, press the symbol onbutton 1 and hold it down (until the cycleend): the roof will automatically performa complete open and close cycle (toindicate that the initialisation has beensuccessful). If this does not occur, theprocedure must be restarted from thebeginning.

WARNING

21)When leaving the vehicle, always makesure you have the key with you to avoid therisk of injury to those still inside the car dueto accidental operation of the sun roof.Improper use of the roof can be dangerous.Before and during operation, always checkthat no-one is exposed to the risk of beinginjured by the moving sunroof or by objectsgetting caught or hit by it.

IMPORTANT

11)Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack orcrossbars are fitted. Do not open the sunroof if there is snow or ice on it: you maydamage it.

BONNET

OPENING

22) 23)

Proceed as follows:inside the passenger compartment

pull the release lever, fig. 62 fig. 63;

go to the outside of the car andposition yourself in front of the grille;

lift the bonnet slightly from right to

62 04196V0001EM

63 04196V0003EM

55

left as indicated by the arrow on releasedevice fig. 64;

raise the bonnet completely: theoperation is facilitated by the presenceof two gas shock absorbers which hold itthe all open position.

Do not tamper with the shock absorberand accompany the bonnet while lifting it.

CLOSING

22) 24)

To close, lower the bonnet toapproximately 16 in (40 centimetres)from the engine compartment then let itdrop. Make sure that the bonnet iscompletely closed and not only fastenedby the locking device by trying to open it.If it is not perfectly closed, do not try topress the bonnet down but open it andrepeat the procedure.

IMPORTANT Always check that thebonnet is closed correctly to prevent itfrom opening while the vehicle istravelling. Since the bonnet is equippedwith a double locking system, one foreach side, you must check that it is closedon both its side ends.

WARNING

22)Perform these operations only when thecar is stationary.23)Use both hands to lift the bonnet. Beforelifting, check that the windscreen wiper armsare not raised from the windscreen or inoperation, that the vehicle is stationary andthat the electric parking brake is engaged.24) For safety reasons, the bonnet mustalways be properly closed while the car istravelling. Therefore, make sure that thebonnet is properly closed and that the lock isengaged. If you discover that the bonnet isnot perfectly closed during travel, stopimmediately and close the bonnet in thecorrect manner.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTTAILGATEThe tailgate is operated electrically, sopay the utmost attention beforeactivating its movement.Safe opening and closing of the tailgate isguaranteed by a protection system thatcan automatically stop its movementwhen it encounters an obstacle whileopening or closing.When the car is moving, tailgateunlocking and movement are disabled.To avoid difficulties in tight spaces, youcan set the height at which to block thetailgate open.Customising the tailgate opening height

To customise the tailgate openingposition, proceed as described below:

open the tailgate;manually move it to the position that

you want to store;press one of the closing buttons 2 or 3

fig. 71 for at least 5 seconds (successfulacquisition is indicated by the directionindicators flashing three times).The tailgate is now programmed to opento the set position.This function can be selected on theConnect system fig. 65 (where provided).

64 04196V0002EM

56

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

Setting the tailgate opening height to apreset position (where provided)To set the tailgate opening height to oneof the four preset positions, proceed asdescribed below:

on the Connect system, press theMENU button to activate the main menuand select the following functions insuccession: “Settings”, “Doors & Locks”and “Electric tailgate”. Select andactivate them by turning the Rotary Padfig. 66 and pressing it;

turn the Rotary Pad to select one ofthe four preset positions and press it toactivate the selected position fig. 67.

OPENING

IMPORTANT A beeper always soundswhile the tailgate is in motion.

Opening from the outside

When unlocked, the tailgate can beopened from outside the vehicle bypressing the electric opening button

fig. 68 located between the number platelights, for about one second until you hearthe unlocking click, or by quickly pressingthe button on the remote controltwice.

The direction indicators will blink twiceand the internal lights will switch on whenthe tailgate is opened. They switch offautomatically when the tailgate is closed.The lights switch off automatically aftera few minutes if the tailgate is left open.

Opening from the inside

When it is locked, the tailgate can beopened from inside the car by lifting thebutton 1 fig. 69 on the driver’s door paneltrim.

IMPORTANT You can stop the tailgatemoving by pressing the same buttonagain.

65 04206V0008EM 66 04206V0019EM

67 04206V0007EM

68 04056V0005EM

57

BOOT EMERGENCY OPENING

There is a flap fig. 70 on the luggagecompartment internal trim, next to thetailgate lock, accessible by folding downthe rear seat backrest, which allowsaccess to the manual lock opening cord.Pull the cord to release the lock.The tailgate can now be opened manually.

CLOSING

Closing from outside

It is possible to close the tailgate bypressing:

the button 2 fig. 71 on the tailgateinterior trim;

the button 3 on the tailgate interiortrim, (all the doors, including the tailgate,will be locked);

the button on the remote controltwice quickly;

the button fig. 68 on the tailgate,between the number plate lights.

IMPORTANT It is possible to stop thetailgate moving with any of the closebuttons.

Closing from inside

Press the button 1 fig. 69 on the driver’sdoor panel trim and hold it down until theoperation is complete.

IMPORTANT It is possible to stop thetailgate moving by releasing the button.

AUTOMATICALLY OPENING ANDCLOSING THE ELECTRICALLYOPERATED TAILGATE IN “HANDS FREE”MODE

(where provided)25)

To operate the system in “Hands free”mode:

if the doors are locked, the systemmust detect the electronic key near thetailgate;

if the doors are unlocked, the systemdoes not have to detect the electronickey near the tailgate;

go to the rear of the car, in the centreand about 20 in (50 cm) from the tailgate;

move your foot under the bumper,simulating a kick. When you have donethis movement, withdraw your leg. Toactivate the movement, both sensorsmust detect your leg fig. 72.

69 04206V0002EM

70 04206V0014EM

71 04056V0055EM

58

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

If it is closed, the electricallyoperated/Hands free tailgate:

unlocks and opens completely;with another movement of the foot, it

stops;a further movement of the foot

reverses the direction and closes thetailgate completely, if you do not stop itagain.If it is open, with a movement of the foot,the electrically operated/Hands freetailgate:

closes completely;another movement of the foot before

it closes completely will stop it;if the tailgate was stopped, another

movement of the foot reverses thedirection and opens it completely.

IMPORTANT To conserve the batterycharge, avoid performing this operationrepeatedly with the engine off.You can activate/deactivate the

automatic tailgate opening and closingfunction in “Hand Free” mode on theConnect system by pressing the MENUbutton to select the Main menu, andselecting the following items insuccession: “Settings”, “Doors & Locks”and “Automatic tailgate opening”. Selectthem by turning the Rotary Pad andpressing it.

TAILGATE INITIALISATION

IMPORTANT If the battery isdisconnected or the protection fuseblows, the tailgate opening/closingmechanism must be reinitialised asfollows:

close all the doors and the tailgate;press the button on the remote

control;press the button on the remote

control.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTSPECIFICATIONS

Luggage-covering curtain

26)

12)

The luggage cover blind can be rolled upand removed.Rolling up the blind: hold the handle 1fig. 73 and then release the pins 2 fromtheir seats. Then accompany the blind tothe rear of the luggage compartment.

Removing the blind: roll up the blind thenpull the two hooks 3 fig. 74 (one on eachside) towards the inside of the luggagecompartment. Then lift the blind up andremove it.

Access to the Tire Pressure Kit

To access the "Tire Pressure Kit" (for itsuse, see chapter "In an emergency"),proceed as follows:

lift up the load platform, fig. 75.

72 04206V0015EM 73 04206V0016EM

74 04206V0017EM

59

Anchoring your load

The luggage compartment floor may beequipped with fixed or mobile anchoringpoints that allow you to anchor andsecure luggage in a practical and safemanner.The fixed anchor rings are located in thefour corners of the luggage compartmentfloor fig. 76.

The mobile hooks, where provided, slide

on two guides secured to the luggagecompartment floor.To position the hook, slide it along theguide to the desired position whileholding down the central button fig. 77.Release the button and move the hookslightly to fix it in position in the notcheson the guide.

Lift the ring fig. 78 to fasten the load.

Two hooks (one on the left side and one

on the right side) fig. 79 are also availableon the side panels to fix loads that arenot excessively heavy (e.g. bags).

IMPORTANT Do not apply, on a singlehook, a load greater than 10 kg.

Luggage retaining net

This is useful for correctly arranging theload and/or for transporting lightmaterials.The cargo net is available from the AlfaRomeo Dealership.

Power Socket

This is located on the left side of theluggage compartment fig. 80 and onlyworks with the ignition device in the ONposition.

IMPORTANT Do not connect devices withpowers higher than 150 W to the socket.Do not damage the socket by usingunsuitable adaptors.

75 04206V0004EM

76 04206V0005EM

77 04206V0011EM

78 04206V0012EM

79 04206V0009EM

60

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

Emergency kit

(where provided)Inside the kit are a fire extinguisher and afirst-aid bag.

230 Volt power socket

(where provided)This is located on the right side of theluggage compartment fig. 81. It can beused for small battery-powered electricalappliances with powers up to 150 W (e.g.cameras, video camera, tablets, razors,etc.)

IMPORTANT Do not connect devices withpowers higher than 150 W to the socket.Do not damage the socket by usingunsuitable adaptors.

WARNING

25)Before lifting the foot off the ground,make sure that you are in stable position. Donot touch any part of the vehicle. There is arisk of injury from touching, for example, thevery hot exhaust system.26) In the event of an accident or sharpbraking, any object placed on the curtainmay be projected into the passengercompartment, and risk hurting theoccupants.

IMPORTANT

12) To avoid damaging the blind, do notplace heavy objects on it.

INTERIOR FITTINGS

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

27)

To open the compartment proceed asfollows:

(where provided) unlock by placing themetal insert that is in the key in the lock;

use the handle fig. 82 to open thecompartment.

When the compartment is opened a lightswitches on to illuminate it.

IMPORTANT Do not insert objects ofsuch a size that the compartment cannotbe completely closed. Moreover makesure that the compartment is completelyclosed when driving.

SUNVISORS

They are located at the sides of theinterior rear view mirror. They can beadjusted forwards and sideways.To direct the visor laterally, detach the

80 04206V0010EM 81 04206V0013EM

82 04246V0001EM

61

visor from the interior rear view mirrorside hook and turn it towards the sidewindow.Courtesy mirrors with light are fitted onthe back of the sun visors and can beused even in poor light conditions.

IMPORTANT On both sides of thepassenger side sun visor there is a labeladvising that it is compulsory todeactivate the airbag if a rear facing childrestraint system is fitted. Always complywith the instructions on the sun visor (seethe "Supplementary Restraint System(SRS) - Airbag" paragraph in "Safety"chapter).

FRONTARMREST

This is located between the front seats.There is a storage compartment insidethe armrest. Operate the device fig. 84 toaccess and raise the armrest.

Air conditioned storage compartment(where provided)The storage compartment may be cooledin some versions by means of an air ventconnected to the air conditioning system.To regulate the air flow in thecompartment, adjust wheel 1 fig. 85.Wheel turned clockwise: cooling open;wheel turned anticlockwise: coolingclosed.

IMPORTANT The air temperature insidethe drink cooler compartment is thesame as that coming out of the airconditioning vents and depends on thetemperature set on the control panel.

CUP/CANHOLDER

Two cup/can holders fig. 86 are availablein the central tunnel.

Too access the cup holders, slidepartition 1 fig. 86 forwards. To close thecompartment, push partition 1 forwards,it will close automatically.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY

(where provided)28) 29)

Press button 1 fig. 87 to activate thecigar lighter.After a few seconds the cigarette lightergoes back to its initial position and it isready for use.

83 04246V0002EM

84 04246V0004EM

85 04156V0071EM

86 04246V0005EM

62

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

IMPORTANT Always check that thecigarette lighter is switched off.

The ashtray is a removable plasticcontainer located inside the right cup/canholder.

MOBILE PHONE COMPARTMENT

It is located on the passenger’s doorpanle, in front of the door handle.

REAR CENTRALARMREST

The rear armrest is mobile and can bestored in the backrest.

To lower it, pull on the tab located atthe top.

To re-close it, lift it until it is inserted inits housing.There are two cup/can holders and amobile phone compartment fig. 89 insidethe armrest.

IMPORTANT The armrest was notdesigned to support the weight of anadult passenger or a child. Only use it tohold drinks or small objects.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER(where provided)On some versions, there is a fireextinguisher in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

27)Do not travel with the storagecompartment open: it may injure the frontseat occupants in the event of an accident.28) The cigar lighter gets extremely hot.Handle it carefully and make sure thatchildren don’t use it: risk of fire and/or burns.29)Do not use the ashtray as a waste paperbasket: it may catch fire in contact withcigarette stubs.

87 04246V0015EM

88 04246V0017EM

89 04246V0018EM

63

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTIONSYSTEMS

Petrol versions

The following systems are used forreducing petrol fuel engine emissions:catalytic converter, oxygen sensors andevaporation control system.

Diesel versions

The following systems are used forreducing Diesel fuel engine emissions:oxidising catalytic converter, exhaust gasrecirculation system (EGR) andparticulate filter (DPF).

0)

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)

(Diesel Particulate Filter)

The Diesel Particulate Filter is amechanical filter, integral to the exhaustsystem, that physically traps carbonparticles present in the exhaust gases ofDiesel engines.The Diesel particulate filter is needed toeliminate almost all carbon particleemissions in compliance withcurrent/future regulations andstandards.During standard use of the vehicle, thePowertrain Control Module records a setof data (e.g.: travel time, type of route,temperatures, etc.) and it will thencalculate how much particulate has beentrapped by the filter.Since this filter physically trapsparticulate, it should be periodicallyregenerated (cleaned) at regular intervalsby burning carbon particles.The regeneration procedure is controlledautomatically by the engine managementcontrol unit according to the filterconditions and vehicle use conditions.

During the regeneration there may be alimited increase in the engine idle speed,fan activation, a limited increase in fumesand high temperatures at the exhaust.These are not faults; they do not impairnormal vehicle performance or damagethe environment. If the dedicatedmessage is displayed, see contents of"Warning lights and messages"paragraph, in chapter "Knowing theinstrument panel".

WARNING

30) The catalytic converter and particulatefilter (DPF) reach very high temperaturesduring operation. Therefore do not park thevehicle on flammable materials (e.g. grass,dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.

64

KN

OW

ING

YO

UR

CA

R

This section of the handbook gives you all the information youneed to understand, interpret and use

the instrument panel correctly.

KNOWINGTHE INSTRUMENTPANELCONTROL PANEL AND ON-BOARD INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . .66DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75EOBD SYSTEM (European On Board Diagnosis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

CONTROL PANELANDON-BOARD INSTRUMENTS

3.5”TFTDISPLAY

1. Rev counter 2. Digital engine oil temperature gauge with overheating warning light 3. TFT Display 4. Digital fuel level gauge(the triangle on the left side of the symbol indicates the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler) 5. Speedometer (speed indicator)

90 05026S0010EM

66

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

VERSIONSWITH 7”TFTDISPLAY

1. Rev counter 2. Digital engine oil temperature gauge with overheating warning light 3. TFT Display 4. Digital fuel level gauge(the triangle on the left side of the symbol indicates the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler) 5. Speedometer (speed indicator)

91 05026S0011EM

67

REVCOUNTER

This indicates the engine rpm

Adjusting instrument panel lighting(brightness sensor)

Inside the rev counter there is a lightsensor capable of detectingenvironmental light conditions andadjusting the operating mode (night/day)and the brightness of the instrumentpanel and the Connect system display.

ENGINEOILTEMPERATUREGAUGE

The digital bar indicator monitors thetemperature of the engine oil and startssupplying indications when the fluidtemperature reaches approximately 122°F (50 °C).Under normal usage, the digital scaleshould hover around the middle of thescale according to the workingconditions.The warning lights switches on tosignal the excessive increase of theengine oil temperature.In this case, immediately stop the engineand contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

FUEL LEVELGAUGE

The bar digital gauge monitors theamount of fuel in the tank.The warning light turns on, a messageis displayed and an acoustic signal isemitted, when about 1.8 UK gal (8 litres)of fuel are left in the tank for dieselversions, and about 2 UK gal (9 litres) offuel for petrol versions.

IMPORTANT If the warning light switcheson, refuel at the earliest opportunity.

IMPORTANT Do not travel with the fueltank almost empty: any gaps in fueldelivery could damage the catalyticconverter.

SPEEDOMETER (SPEED INDICATOR)

This shows the speed of the vehicle.

68

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

The vehicle can be equipped with a 3.5" or 7" TFT Display.When one of the doors is opened/closed, with the engine stopped, the display is activated, showing the total mileage for a fewseconds.

RECONFIGURABLETFTDISPLAY

During operation, the display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failure indications. fig. 92 showsthe display layout, identifying the various sections.

1. Gearbox information. 2. Front, side anti-collision systems, Cruise Control. 3. Speed limit warning light. 4. Reconfigurable mainarea. 5. Compass. 6. Odometer. 7. Failure warning lights. 8. Range (7" TFT Display only). 9. Warning lights (7" TFT Display only).

92 05036S0001EM

69

1 Gearbox Information

Displays the following informationregarding the gearbox operation:

gearbox operation mode (M, P, R, N, D).In D mode, when changing gear using thesteering wheel lever (where present), ormanually M, it also show the gearengaged with a number. In M mode, it alsoshows when to shift gear up or down.

2 Front, side anti-collision systems,Cruise Control

Displays the operation the followingmodes:

Forward Collision Warning (FCW);Lane Departure Warning (LDW);Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise

Control (ACC) (where provided).For further information, see relevantparagraphs.

3 Speed limit warning light

Shows information regarding the SpeedLimiter function.For further information, see relevantparagraph.

4 Reconfigurable main area

Can display the following screens:Home.Trip A.Trip B (can be activated/deactivated

by the Connect system)Performance.

The screens can be selected, on rotation,by pressing the button shown in fig. 93.

Depending on the chosen driving mode(Dynamic, Normal, Advanced Efficiency),which can be selected through the “AlfaDNA™” system, the screens may begraphically different. The navigationinstructions and call information can berepeated on the Connect system displayand also in this area of the display. Thesefunctions can be set on the Connectsystem.

Home

The parameters shown on the display, forthe modes: Dynamic, Normal andAdvanced Efficiency are:

Time fig. 94 or fig. 95 (on the 3.5" FTdisplay, it is shown only if the Phonefunction fig. 96 repeat mode has notpreviously been activated).

Outside temperature (on the 3.5" FTdisplay shown if the Phone functionrepeat mode has not previously beenactivated).

Current speed (shown only if the

repeat mode of the Phone and Navigationfunctions have not been previouslyactivated).

Range (on the 3.5" FT display shown ifthe Radio, Media and Navigator functionsrepeat mode has not been previouslyactivated).

3.5”TFTDisplay

7”TFTDisplay

93 05036V0002EM

94 05036S0003EM

95 05036S0104EM

70

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Trip A and B

For all driving modes (Dynamic, Normal,Advanced Efficiency), with the ignitiondevice ON, the "Trip computer" can beused to display the values related to thecar’s operating state. This function ischaracterised by two separate records,called “Trip A” and “Trip B” (the latter canbe deactivated by the Connect system),where the car’s “complete missions”(journeys) are recorded in a reciprocallyindependent manner.“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to displaythe values relating to:

Distance travelledAverage fuel consumptionAverage speedActive tripFuel consumption indicator (7" TFT

Display only)

3.5”TFTDisplay

7”TFTDisplay

To reset the values, press and hold downthe button on the right stalk fig. 99.

Performance

The displayed parameters are differentin function from the active mode, and themodes can be selected through the “AlfaDNA™” system and are as follows:

Normal,

3.5”TFTDisplay

96 05036S0030EM

97 05036S0006EM

98 05036S0107EM

99 05036V0002EM

100 05036S0008EM

71

7”TFTDisplay

The screen graphically reproduces someparameters closely linked to theefficiency of the driving style, with a viewto limiting consumption.

Advanced Efficiency,

3.5”TFTDisplay

7”TFTDisplay

The three central icons on the screenindicate the effectiveness of the drivingstyle, linked to the following parameters:acceleration, deceleration and gearshifts, with a view to limitingconsumption. The bar below the iconsshows current consumption and thegreen line represents the optimal area.The globe (7" TFT Display) lights upgradually according to lowerconsumption.

Dynamic,

3.5”TFTDisplay

7”TFTDisplay

The displayed parameters are related tovehicle stability, the graphs illustrate thetrend of the longitudinal/lateralaccelerations (G-meter information),considering gravity acceleration as areference unit.Lateral acceleration peaks are alsoindicated.

101 05036S0009EM

102 05036S0010EM

103 05036S0111EM104 05036S0012EM

105 05036S0113EM

72

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

5 Compass

Views the position indicating the cardinalpoint.

6 Milometer

Indicates the total kilometres (or miles)travelled.

7 Failure warning lights

Area dedicated to displaying failures, thefollowing symbols could be displayed onrotation:

Low criticality symbols (yellow amber).High criticality symbols (red).

8 Car range (7" TFT Display only)

Indicates the kilometres (or miles) leftbefore the fuel tank is empty.

9 Warning lights (7" TFT Display only)

Displays the warning light related to theactive mode among the following:

low beam headlights;main beam headlights;Auto low beam headlights;Auto main beam headlights.

PARAMETERS SET BY USER

A series of functions programmable bythe user can be set using the Connectsystem, this paragraph describes only thebasic settings, such as:

Units & Language;Clock and Date.Control panel

To access the list with theaforementioned items, proceed asfollows: from the main menu, activatedby pressing the MENU button fig. 107,select the function "Settings", by turningand pressing the Rotary Pad.Turn the Rotary Pad to choose thedesired option and press to activate it.

Units & Language

The following settings can be modifiedwhen this mode is selected fig. 108:

Measure units (by selecting this itemyou can choose between the metric,imperial or custom systems; this lastoption lets you set the measure unit foreach individual size).

Language (by selecting this item youcan choose the system viewing language).

106 05036V0015EM

107 05036V0040EM

108 05036S0016EM

73

Restore Settings (allows you to deletethe current menu settings and restorethe factory settings).To access and adjust the various settings,turn and press the Rotary Pad to selectand confirm the selection.

Time and Date

The following settings can be modifiedwhen this mode is selected fig. 109:

Sync with GPS Time (activates/deactivates the clock synchronizationthrough the GPS; if the function isdeactivated, the options Set Time andSet Date are enabled).

Set time (allows to manually set thetime).

Time format (allows to choose thetime format between a 12-hour and a24-hour clock).

Set date (to set the date manually).Restore Settings (allows you to delete

the current menu settings and restorethe factory settings).To access and adjust the various settings,turn and press the Rotary Pad to selectand confirm the selection.

Control panel

The following settings can be modifiedwhen this mode is selected fig. 110:

Warning buzzer volume (allows you toset the volume of the warning buzzer onseven levels).

Trip B (to activate/deactivate thefunction).

Show phone info (allows you toactivate/deactivate repetition of thephone function screens also on theinstrument panel display).

Show audio info (allows you toactivate/deactivate repetition of theaudio function screens (Radio and Media)also on the instrument panel display).

Show navi (allows you toactivate/deactivate repetition of thenavigator function screens also on theinstrument panel display).

Restore Settings (allows you to deletethe current menu settings and restorethe factory settings).To access and adjust the various settings,turn and press the Rotary Pad to selectand confirm the selection.

109 05036S0017EM

110 05036S0018EM

74

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

WARNING LIGHTSANDMESSAGES

IMPORTANT The warning light switches on together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. Theseindications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the informationcontained in the Owner Handbook, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. In the event of a failure indication, always referto the contents of this chapter.

IMPORTANT The failure indicators appearing on the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious faults.Serious faults are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle" with ashorter duration. You can stop the warning cycle in both cases by pressing the button located on the windscreen wiper lever. Theinstrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated.

75

WARNING LIGHTSON INSTRUMENTPANEL

Possible detailed messages and/or acoustic signalling can be matched to a few warning lights and symbols.

Redwarning lights

Warning light What it means What to do

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID / ELECTRIC PARKINGBRAKE ONThe warning light switches on when the ignition device isbrought to ON, but it should switch off after a fewseconds.

Low brake fluid level

The warning light turns on when the level of the brake fluidin the reservoir falls below the minimum level, possiblydue to a leak in the circuit.

Go to an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the systemchecked as soon as possible.

Electric parking brake on

The warning light switches on when the electric parkingbrake is engaged.If the car is parked on a gradient of more than 30% and/orthe brake temperature is greater than 662°F (350°C),when the parking brake is engaged, the warning light willflash to indicate a potentially unsafe condition.

Release the electric parking brake, then check that thewarning light has switched off.If the warning light stays on, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.

EBD FAILURE

The simultaneous switching on of the (red) and

(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicateseither a failure of the EBD system or that the system isnot available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenlylock and the vehicle may swerve when braking sharply.

Drive very carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo Dealershipto have the system inspected immediately.

76

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Warning light What it means What to do

AIRBAG FAILUREThe warning light switches on when the ignition device isbrought to ON, but it should switch off after a fewseconds. If the warning light switches on constantly, thisindicates a failure in the airbag system.

31)

FRONT SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENEDThe warning light switches on constantly if the car isstationary and the driver side or passenger side seat belt,with the passenger seated, is not fastened. The warninglight flashes and an acoustic warning will sound if the car isin motion and the driver side or passenger side seat belt,with the passenger seated, is not correctly fastened.Using the Connect system, you can activate/deactivatethe SBA (Seat Belt Alert) system buzzer. To access thefunction, on the main menu select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Safety" and "Seat belt reminder".

Fasten or check correct fastening of the front occupants'seat belts.

EXCESSIVE ENGINE OIL TEMPERATUREThe warning light switches on in the case of engine oiloverheating.

13)

If the problem persists, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

WARNING

31) The fault of the warning light is signalled by the switching on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may notindicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checked immediately.32) If the warning light does not switch on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message onthe display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the airbags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or,in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the system checkedimmediately.

77

32)

IMPORTANT

13) If the symbol switches on when driving, stop the vehicle and the engine immediately.

Amber warning lights

Warning light What it means What to do

ABS FAILUREThe warning light switches on when the ignition device isbrought to ON, but it should switch off after a fewseconds.The warning light switches on to indicate an ABS fault. Inthis case the braking system maintains its efficiencyunaltered but without the advantage of the ABS system.

Drive carefully and contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership assoon as possible.

TPMS FAILUREThe warning light switches on when a failure is detected inthe TPMS. Should one or more wheels be fitted withoutsensors, the display will show a warning message untilinitial conditions are restored.

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres ashandling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoidingsharp braking and steering. Immediately restore thecorrect inflation pressure using the Tire Repair Kit (see"Repairing a wheel" paragraph in the "In an emergency"chapter) and contact the dedicated Alfa RomeoDealership as soon as possible.

Tyre pressure low

The warning light switches on to indicate that the tyrepressure is lower than the recommended value and/orthat slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,optimal tyre duration and fuel consumption may not beguaranteed.

In any situation in which the message on the display is "Seemanual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to the contents of the"Wheels and rims" paragraph in the "Technical data"chapter, strictly complying with the indications that youfind there.

78

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Warning light What it means What to do

ESC SYSTEMWhen the ignition device is brought to ON, the warninglight switches on, but should switch off as soon as theengine is started.ESC system intervention: Intervention by the system isindicated by the flashing of the warning light: it indicatesthat the car is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ECS system failure: If the warning light does not switchoff, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure wasfound in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon

as possible.Hill Start Assist system failure: the switching on of thewarning light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.

PARTIAL / TOTAL DEACTIVATION OF ACTIVE SAFETYSYSTEMSWhen the ignition device is brought to ON, the warninglight switches on, but should switch off as soon as theengine is started.The warning light switches on to indicate that some activesafety systems have been partially or totally deactivated.For further details about the active safety systems seethe "Active safety systems" paragraph in the "Safety"chapter. When the active safety systems are reactivated,the warning light switches off.

79

Warning light What it means What to do

INJECTION / EOBD SYSTEM FAILUREIn normal conditions, when the ignition device is brought toON, the warning light switches on, but it should switch offas soon as the engine is started.The operation of the warning light may be checked by thetraffic police using specific devices. Comply with the lawsand regulations of the country where you are driving.

14)

Injection system failure

If the warning light remains on, or it switches on whiledriving, the injection system is not working properly. Thewarning light on constantly signals a malfunction in thesupply/ignition system which could cause high exhaustemissions, a possible loss of performance, poordriveability and high consumption.The warning light switches off if the malfunctiondisappears, but is still stored by the system.

Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travellingat moderate speed but without demanding excessiveeffort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of thecar with the warning light on constantly may causedamage. Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon aspossible.

Catalytic converter damaged

If the warning light flashes, it means that the catalyticconverter may be damaged.

Release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed of theengine until the warning light stops flashing. Continue thejourney at moderate speed, trying to avoid drivingconditions that may cause further flashing and contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

IMPORTANT

14) If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versionstogether with the message on the display), contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

80

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Warning light What it means What to do

REAR FOG LIGHTThe warning light switches on when the rear fog light isactivated.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) (whereavailable)This warning light informs the driver that the frontalcollision alarm function is not enabled.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGEThe warning light (or the icon on the display) turns on whenthere are about 1.8 UK gal (8 litres) of fuel left in the tank,for Diesel versions, and about 2 UK gal (9 litres) of fuel forpetrol versions.

33)

WARNING

33) If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes whilst driving, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

81

Greenwarning lights

Warning light What it means What to do

SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTSThe warning light switches on when the side lights ordipped headlights are turned on.

"Follow me" function engaged

This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30,60 or 90 seconds after the ignition device was placed inSTOP position.

FRONT FOG LIGHTSThe warning light comes on when the front fog lights areturned on.

LEFT DIRECTION INDICATORThe warning light switches on when the direction indicatorcontrol stalk is moved downwards or, together with theright direction indicator, when the hazard warning lightbutton is pressed.

RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATORThe warning light switches on when the direction indicatorcontrol stalk is moved upwards or, together with the leftdirection indicator, when the hazard warning light buttonis pressed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 3.5" TFTDisplay)This warning light comes on when the automatic mainbeam headlights are activated.

82

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Bluewarning lights

Warning light What it means What to do

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 3.5" TFT display)The symbol comes on when the main beam headlights areactivated.

83

SYMBOLSONTHEDISPLAY

Red symbols

Symbol What it means What to do

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSUREThe symbol indicates that the engine oil pressure is low.If it turns on temporarily or flashes (for about 5 seconds),check the oil level by following the correspondingprocedure (see the description in the “Checking levels”paragraph in the “Maintenance and care” chapter) and topup to the correct level if necessary.If the symbol turns on continuously, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership to have the system checked.WARNING IF THE SYMBOL TURNS ON CONTINUOUSLY:Do not use the car until the failure has been solved. Whenthe symbol turns on, it does not indicate the amount of oilin the engine: the oil level can be checked on the displayupon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oillevel" function on the Connect system.

15)

IMPORTANT

15) If the symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

84

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Symbol What it means What to do

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGHThe symbol lights up when the engine has overheated.

In normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch off theengine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir isnot below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine tocool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top upwith coolant and check that the level is between the MINand MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visuallyfor any fluid leaks. Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership ifthe symbol comes on when the engine is started again.If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in

high-performance driving): slow down and, if the warninglight stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for 2 or 3 minuteswith the engine running and slightly accelerated tofacilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engineoff. Check that the coolant level is correct as describedabove.IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, it is advisable tokeep the engine running and slightly accelerated for a fewminutes before turning it off.

POWER STEERING FAILUREIf the symbol remains on, you could not have steeringassistance and the effort required to operate the steeringwheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

DOOR OPENThe symbol switches on when one or more doors are notcompletely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with thedoors open and the car moving.

Close the doors properly.

85

Symbol What it means What to do

BONNET NOT PROPERLY SHUTThe symbol turns on when the bonnet is not properlyclosed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with anopen bonnet appears on the display.A buzzer is heard when the bonnet is open and the vehicleis moving.

Close the bonnet properly.

TAILGATE NOT PROPERLY SHUTThe symbol turns on when the tailgate is not properlyclosed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with anopen tailgate appears on the display.an acoustic warning is heard with open tailgate and carmoving.

Close the tailgate properly.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILUREThe symbol switches on, together with a buzzer warning,to indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.16)

IMPORTANT

16)Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hotengine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

86

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Symbol What it means What to do

INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL LEVELThe symbol switches on, along with the related messageon the display, to indicate low engine oil level.

OIL OVER MAXIMUM LEVELThe symbol switches on, along with the respectivemessage on the display, to indicate that the engine oillevel is too high.

Go to an Alfa Romeo dealership as soon as possible tohave the correct level restored. Run the engine under3000 rpm during this time.

ALTERNATOR FAILUREThe switching on of the symbol with the engine runningcorresponds to an alternator failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

ALFA™ SYSTEM STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILUREThe switching on of the symbol signals a failure in theautomatic steering correction system.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the systemchecked.

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED(only SASO version)The symbol switches on when the speed limit of 74.5 mph(120 km/h) is exceeded.

BRAKE DISC TEMPERATUREWhen it turns on, it indicates an excessive temperature ofthe brake discs.

Let the braking system cool down by reducing the speed.

87

Amber symbols

Symbol What it means What to do

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer system failure

The symbol switches on to report a failure of the EngineImmobilizer system.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

Break-in attempt

The symbol switches on when the ignition device is movedto ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attemptdetected by the alarm system.Electronic key not recognised

The symbol switches on when the engine is started and theelectronic key is not recognized by the system.Alarm system failure

This symbol switches on to report an alarm system failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM OPERATIONThe symbol switches on in the event of fuel cut-off systemintervention.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to thedescription in the "Fuel cut-off system" section in the "Inan emergency" chapter. If it is not possible to restore thefuel supply, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURELights up when the system has failed or is not available.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the systemchecked.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROADThe symbol turns on when the outside temperature isbelow or equal to 37.4°F (3°C).

88

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Symbol What it means What to do

ENGINE OIL DETERIORATED(where provided)The symbol is displayed only for a limited time.IMPORTANT After the first indication, each time theengine is started the symbol will continue to switch on asdescribed above until the oil is changed.If the symbol flashes, this does not mean that there is afault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is nownecessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of thevehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated byusing the car for short drives, preventing the engine fromreaching operating temperature.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.17)

IMPORTANT

17)Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 km after it firstswitches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the warranty.When this symbol comes on, itdoes not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Symbol What it means What to do

GLOW PLUG PREHEATING (Diesel versions)This warning light comes on when the ignition device isbrought to ON and will switch off when the glow plugshave reached the preset temperature. The engine can bestarted as soon as the symbol turns off.

IMPORTANT In mild or high temperature conditions, thesymbol turns on for a very short time only.

GLOW PLUG PREHEATING FAILURE (Diesel versions)If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault in the glow plugpreheating system.

In this case, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon aspossible.

89

Symbol What it means What to do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILUREThe symbol switches on in the event of engine oil levelsensor failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILUREThe symbol switches on in the event of engine oil levelsensor failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEMFAILUREThe symbol switches on in the case of failure of theForward Collision Warning system.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

START & STOP EVO SYSTEM FAILUREThis symbol switches on to report a Stop & Start Evosystem failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

RAIN SENSOR FAILUREThe symbol switches on in the case of failure of theautomatic windscreen wiper.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

DUSK SENSOR FAILUREThe symbol switches on in the case of failure of theautomatic low beam alignment.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILUREThe symbol comes on in the event of a Blind SpotMonitoring system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILUREThe symbol switches on in the event of fuel level sensorfailure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

90

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Symbol What it means What to do

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILUREThe symbol switches on to indicate a failure on thefollowing lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parkinglights / trailer direction indicators (if present) / trailerlights (if present) / side lights / direction indicators / rearfog light / reversing light / brake lights / number platelights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blownprotection fuse or an interruption of the electricalconnection.Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.

KEYLESS START SYSTEM FAILUREThe symbol switches on in the event of Keyless Startsystem failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILUREThe symbol switches on in the event of fuel cut-off systemfailure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDW) FAILUREThe symbol comes on also in the case of a fault to the LaneDeparture Warning system.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE(where provided)The symbol switches on to report a failure of theautomatic main beam headlights.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (diesel versions)The symbol switches on constantly when driving, along toindicate the presence of water in the diesel filter.

18)

91

IMPORTANT

18) The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may cause severe damage to the injection system and irregular engine operation. If thesymbol is displayed contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible to bleed the system. If the above indications come on immediately

after refuelling, water has probably been introduced into the tank: stop the engine immediately and contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

Symbol What it means What to do

DPF CLEANING (particulate trap) in progress (dieselversions with DPF only)The symbol comes on when the ignition device is broughtto ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds.The symbol switches on constantly to indicate that theDPF system needs to eliminate the trapped pollutants(particulate) through the regeneration process.The symbol does not switch on during every DPFregeneration, but only when driving conditions requirethat the driver is notified.To turn off the symbol, keep the car in motion until theregeneration process is over. On average, the processlasts 15 minutes. Optimal conditions for completing theprocess are achieved by travelling at 37 mph (60 km/h)with engine speed above 2000 rpm.When this symbol switches on, it does not indicate a faultand thus it should not be taken to a workshop.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATINGThe symbol switches on in the case of transmissionoverheating, after a particularly demanding use. In thiscase an engine performance limitation is carried out.

Wait for the symbol to disappear with the engine off oridling.

92

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Symbol What it means What to do

TRAILER LIGHT CONTROL UNIT FAILUREThe symbol turns on to warn of failure in the control unitthat manages the trailer lights.

Check that the trailer light is correctly connected to thesocket. If the fault persists the next time you start theengine, contact the Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon aspossible to have the system checked.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILUREThe symbol switches on to report a failure of the audiosystem.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILUREWhile driving, the symbol switches on to signal a SpeedLimiter system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

FUEL TANK PLUG(where provided)Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properlyclosed.

Tighten the cap properly.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILUREThe symbol and the the respective message appear on thedisplay to indicate a failure in the electric parking brakesystem.This failure could partially or completely block the carbecause the electric parking brake could remain activatedeven if automatically or manually disengaged using therelevant controls.

If the car can still be used (electric parking brake notengaged), drive carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeodealership, remembering that the electric parking brakewill not work.

34)

WARNING

34) If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

93

Symbol What it means What to do

INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT LEVELIf the symbol switches on, it indicates a low engine coolantlevel condition.

Top up, as described in the "Servicing and Care" chapter

ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILUREThe symbol appears while driving to indicate a failure inthe Adaptive Cruise Control system.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the systemchecked.

WEAR ON BRAKE PADSThe symbol lights up when the brake pads have reachedtheir wear limit.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible.

IMPORTANT Always use genuine parts or similarbecause the Integrated Brake System (IBS) could

detect anomalies.

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILUREThe symbol appears to indicate the dynamic tractioncontrol system failure.

WINDSCREEN WIPER FAILUREIf the symbol turns on, it indicates a windscreen wiperfailure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

GENERIC INDICATIONWhen the symbol turns on, it indicates information andfaults.The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILUREThis symbol switches on to report a four wheel drivesystem failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

AFS SYSTEM FAILUREIf this symbol appears, it indicates a failure of theautomatic directional headlight system.

Go to an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the systemchecked.

94

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Symbol What it means What to do

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION (whereprovided)The system appears when the most comfortablesuspension setting is activated.

SHOCK ABSORBER FAILURE (ADC) (where provided)While driving, if the symbol switches on, it signals a failurein the suspension system.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to have the systemchecked.

WINDSCREEN WASHER LIQUID LEVELThe symbol appears for some seconds to indicate that thelevel of the windscreen and headlight washing fluid (if any)is low.

Refill the liquid: to do this, please consult the "Level check"section in the "Service and care" chapter. Always use liquidwith the features indicated in the "Liquids and lubricants"section in the "Technical information" chapter.

TAILGATE ELECTRIC OPENING/CLOSING FAILUREThe symbol turns on to indicate a tailgate electricopening/closing system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

ELECTRIC TOW HOOK FAILUREThe symbol turns on to indicate an electric towing hookextraction/closing system failure.

Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon as possible tohave the failure eliminated.

95

Green symbols

Symbol What it means What to do

LOW BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 7" TFT display)The symbol comes on when the dipped beam headlightsare activated.

AUTOMATIC DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 7" TFTdisplay)The symbol lights up when the automatic dipped beamheadlights are on.

START & STOP EVO OPERATIONThe symbol comes on in the case of Start & Stop Evosystem intervention (stopping the engine).When the engine is restarted the symbol switches off (forthe engine restarting modes see the "Start & Stop Evo"paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter).

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMThe symbol comes on when the Cruise Control system isactivated.

ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMThe symbol comes on when the Active Cruise Controlsystem is activated.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL HDC SYSTEMThe symbol lights up when the HDC system intervenes.

96

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

Blue symbols

Symbol What it means What to do

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 7" TFTdisplay)The symbol comes on when the automatic main beamheadlights are activated.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS (on 7" TFT display)The symbol comes on when the main beam headlights areactivated.

97

EOBDSYSTEM (EuropeanOnBoard Diagnosis)

(where provided)

OPERATION

The EOBD (European On Board Diagnosissystem) carries out a continuousdiagnosis of the components of thevehicle related to emissions.It also alerts the driver, by switching onthe warning light on the instrumentpanel, when these components are nolonger in peak condition (see “Warninglights and messages” paragraph in thischapter).The aim of the EOBD system (EuropeanOn Board Diagnosis) is to:

monitor the efficiency of the system;indicate an increase in emissions;indicate the need to replace damaged

components.

The vehicle also has a connector, whichcan interface with appropriate tools, thatmakes it possible to read the error codesstored in the electronic control unitstogether with a series of specificparameters for engine operation anddiagnosis. This check can also be carriedout by the traffic police.

IMPORTANT After eliminating a fault, tocheck the system completely, the AlfaRomeo Dealership is obliged to run testsand, if necessary, road tests which mayalso require a long journey.

98

KN

OW

ING

THE

INS

TRU

MEN

TPA

NEL

The chapter that you are about to read is very important: itdescribes the safety systems with which the vehicle is equipped

and provides instructions on how to use them correctly.

SAFETYACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113SBA (Seat Belt Alert) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115PRE-TENSIONERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116CHILD PROTECTION SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG . . . . . . .130

ACTIVE SAFETYSYSTEMS

The vehicle may be equipped with thefollowing active safety devices:

ABS (Anti-Lock Brakes);DTC (Drive Train Control);ESC (Electronic Stability Control);TC (Traction Control);PBA (Panic Brake Assist);HSA (Hill Start Assist);AST (Alfa™ Steering Torque);HDC (Hill Discent Control)

For the operation of the systems, see thefollowing pages.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

This system, which is an integral part ofthe braking system, prevents one or morewheels from locking and slipping in allroad surface conditions, irrespective ofthe intensity of the braking action,ensuring that the vehicle can becontrolled even during emergencybraking and optimising stoppingdistances.The system intervenes during brakingwhen the wheels are about to lock,typically in emergency braking orlow-grip conditions, when locking may bemore frequent.The system also improves control andstability of the vehicle when braking on asurface where the grip of the left andright wheels varies, or on corners.The Electronic Braking Force Distribution(EBD) system completes the system

allowing the brake force to be distributedbetween the front and rear wheels.

System intervention

The ABS equipped on this vehicle isprovided with the "Brake by wire"(Integrated Brake System - IBS) function.With this system, the brake pedalcommand given by pressing the brakepedal is not transmitted hydraulically butelectronically, therefore, the lightpulsation that could be felt on the pedalwith the traditional system is no longerperceptible.

35) 36) 37) 38) 39) 40)

DTC (DriveTrain Control) SYSTEM(where provided)Some versions of this vehicle areequipped with a four-wheel drive system(AWD), activated on request, which offersan optimal drive for countless drivingconditions and road surfaces. The systemreduces the slipping of the tyres to aminimum, automatically redistributingthe torque to the front and rear wheels,as needed.To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle withAWD automatically passes to rearfour-wheel drive (RWD) when the roadand environmental conditions are suchthat they wouldn't cause the tyres to slip.When the road and environmentalconditions require better traction, thevehicle automatically goes to AWD mode.

41)

The driving mode, RWD or AWD, is shown

on the instrument panel display.

IMPORTANT If the system failure symbolswitches on, after starting the engine orwhile driving, it means that the AWDsystem is not working properly. If thewarning message activates frequently, itis recommended to carry out themaintenance operations.

42)

ESC (Electronic Stability Control)SYSTEM

The ESC system improves the directionalcontrol and stability of the car in variousdriving conditions.The ESC system corrects the car’sundersteer and oversteer, distributingthe brake force on the appropriatewheels. The torque supplied by theengine can also be reduced in order tomaintain control of the vehicle.The ESC system uses sensors installedon the car to determine the trajectorythat the driver intends to follow andcompares it with the car’s effectivetrajectory. When the real trajectorydeviates from the desired trajectory, theESC system intervenes to counter thevehicle’s understeer or oversteer.

Oversteer: occurs when the car isturning more than it should according tothe angle of the steering wheel.

Understeer: occurs when the vehicle isturning less than it should according tothe angle of the steering wheel.

100

SA

FETY

System intervention

The intervention of the system isindicated by the flashing of the ESCwarning light on the instrument panel, toinform the driver that the vehiclestability and grip are critical.

43) 44) 45) 46) 47)

TC (Traction Control) SYSTEM

The system automatically operates in theevent of slipping, loss of grip on wetroads (aquaplaning) and acceleration onslippery, snowy or icy roads, etc. on oneor both drive wheels. Depending on theslipping conditions, two different controlsystems are activated:

if the slipping involves both drivewheels, the system intervenes, reducingthe power transmitted by the engine;

if the slipping only involves one of thedrive wheels, the BLD (Brake LimitedDifferential) function is activated,automatically braking the wheel which isslipping (the behaviour of a self-lockingdifferential is simulated). This willincrease the engine torque transferred tothe wheel which isn't slipping.

System intervention

The intervention of the system isindicated by the flashing of the ESCwarning light on the instrument panel, toinform the driver that the vehiclestability and grip are critical.

48) 49) 50) 51) 52)

PBA (Panic Brake Assist) SYSTEM

The PBA system is designed to improvethe vehicle’s braking capacity duringemergency braking.The system detects emergency brakingby monitoring the speed and force withwhich the brake pedal is pressed, andconsequently applies the optimal brakepressure. This can reduce the brakingdistance: the PBA system thereforecomplements the ABS.Maximum assistance from the PBAsystem is obtained by pressing the brakepedal very quickly. In addition, the brakepedal should be pressed continuouslyduring braking, avoiding intermittentpresses, to get the most out of thesystem. Do not reduce pressure on thebrake pedal until braking is no longernecessary.The PBA system is deactivated when thebrake pedal is released.

53) 54) 55)

HSA (Hill Start Assist) SYSTEM

This is an integral part of the ESC systemand facilitates starting on slopes,activating automatically in the followingcases:

uphill: vehicle stationary on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, brake pressed and transmissionin neutral or gear other than reverseengaged;

downhill: vehicle stationary on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, brake pressed and reverse gearengaged.When setting off, the ESC system controlunit maintains the braking pressure onthe wheels until the engine torquenecessary for starting is reached, or inany case for a maximum of 2 seconds,allowing your right foot to be movedeasily from the brake pedal to theaccelerator.When two seconds have elapsed, withoutstarting, the system is automaticallydeactivated, gradually releasing thebraking pressure. During this releasestage it is possible to hear a typicalmechanical brake release noise,indicating the imminent movement of thecar.

56) 57)

101

AST (Alfa™ SteeringTorque) SYSTEM

58)

The AST function integrates the ESCsystem with the electric power steeringto increase the safety level of the wholevehicle.In critical situations (braking on surfaceswith different grip conditions), throughthe AST function, the ESC systemcontrols the steering to implement anadditional torque contribution on thesteering wheel, to suggest the mostcorrect manoeuvre to the driver.The coordinated action of the brakes andsteering increases the sensation ofsafety and control of the vehicle.

HDC (Hill Descent Control) SYSTEM(where provided)On vehicles equipped in this way, thisfunction is an integral part of the ESCsystem and is aimed at keeping thevehicle at a constant speed during adescent, operating autonomously and indifferent ways on the brakes.In this way the vehicle stability andcompletely safe driving are guaranteed,above all in poor grip conditions andsteep descents.

The system has three different modes:Off: the system is deactivated;Enabled: the system is enabled and

ready to intervene when the activationconditions are met;

Active: the system actively controlsthe car speed.

Enabling the system

To enable the system, press the buttonfig. 111.

The system is enabled if the followingcondition is met:

the car speed is below 22 mph(35 km/h);System activation is indicated by thewhite icon on the displayfig. 112 turning on fixed.

Activation of the system

Once enabled, the HDC system willactivate automatically if the vehicle isdriven on a downhill slope with sufficientgradient, greater than 10%.The speed set for the HDC system can beadjusted using the SET switch fig. 113 (inthe range from 4 mph to 15.5 mph(6 km/h to 25 km/h)). Once the desiredspeed has been reached, release the SETswitch and the HDC system will maintainthe set speed.It is also possible to reduce the set speedwith the brake pedal. The system willacquire the current speed when the pedalis released as the reference.

111 06006V0001EM

112 06006V0002EM

102

SA

FETY

If the car speed exceeds 6 mph(10 km/h), but remains below 37 mph(60 km/h) and the accelerator pedal isreleased, as soon as the car gets close tothe set speed, the HDC system will braketo bring the car to the set speed.The driver can cancel HDC systemintervention at any time by pressing theaccelerator pedal.

System deactivation

The HDC system is deactivated, butremains available, if one of the followingconditions is met:

the car is on a downhill slope withinsufficient gradient, less than 10%, or alevel surface, or is going uphill;

P (Park) mode is engaged.

Disabling the system

The system is disabled if one of thefollowing conditions is met:

fig. 111 button pressed;

Cruise Control / Active Cruise Controlis activated.

37 mph (60 km/h) is exceeded.System deactivation is shown by the icon

on the display turning off.59)

WARNING

35) For maximum efficiency of the brakingsystem, a bedding-in period of about 500 km(310 miles) is required: during this period itis advisable to avoid sharp, repeated andprolonged braking.36) If the ABS intervenes, this indicates thatthe grip of the tyres on the road is nearing itslimit: you must slow down to a speedcompatible with the available grip.37) The ABS cannot overrule the naturallaws of physics, and cannot increase the gripavailable according to the condition of theroad.38) The ABS cannot prevent accidents,including those due to excessive speed oncorners, driving on low-grip surfaces oraquaplaning.39) The capability of the ABS must never betested irresponsibly and dangerously, insuch a way as to compromise personalsafety and the safety of others.40) For the correct operation of the ABS, thetyres must of necessity be the same makeand type on all wheels, in perfect conditionand, above all, of the prescribed type anddimensions.41) There may be a brief delay in shifting toAWD mode after a tyre slipping event.

42)When a DTC system failure symbolappears, the driver must be aware of thedifferent driving reaction and thereforereduce the speed. The symbol warns thedriver not to drive in areas that requirefour-wheel drive or on snow-covered roads.43) The ESC system cannot alter the naturallaws of physics, and cannot increase grip,which depends on the condition of the road.44) The ESC system cannot preventaccidents, including those due to excessivespeed on corners, driving on low-gripsurfaces or aquaplaning.45) The capability of the ESC system mustnever be tested irresponsibly anddangerously, in such a way as to compromisepersonal safety and the safety of others.46) For the correct operation of the ESCsystem, the tyres must necessarily be of thesame make and type on all wheels, in perfectcondition and, above all, of the prescribedtype and size.47) ESC performance features must notinduce the driver to take unnecessary orunwarranted risks. Your driving style mustalways be suited to the road conditions,visibility and traffic. The driver is, in anycase, responsible for safe driving.48) For the correct operation of theTCsystem, the tyres must of necessity be thesame make and type on all wheels, in perfectcondition and, above all, of the prescribedtype and dimensions.49) TC performance features must notinduce the driver to take unnecessary orunwarranted risks. Your driving style mustalways be suited to the road conditions,visibility and traffic. The driver is, in anycase, responsible for safe driving.

113 07146V0017EM

103

50) TheTC system cannot overrule thenatural laws of physics, and cannot increasethe grip available according to the conditionof the road.51) TheTC system cannot preventaccidents, including those due to excessivespeed on corners, driving on low-gripsurfaces or aquaplaning.52) The capability of theTC must never betested irresponsibly and dangerously, insuch a way as to compromise personalsafety and the safety of others.53) The PBA system cannot overrule thenatural laws of physics, and cannot increasethe grip available according to the conditionof the road.54) The PBA system cannot preventaccidents, including those due to excessivespeed on corners, driving on low-gripsurfaces or aquaplaning.55) The capability of the PBA system mustnever be tested irresponsibly anddangerously, in such a way as to compromisethe safety of the driver, the other occupantsof the vehicle or any other road user.56) The HSA system is not a parking brake;therefore, never leave the vehicle withouthaving engaged the electric parking brake,turned the engine off and engaged first gear,so that it is parked in safe conditions (forfurther information read the "Parking"paragraph in the "Starting and driving"chapter).57) There may be situations on smallgradients (less than 8%), with vehicle laden,in which the Hill Start Assist system may notactivate, causing a slight reversing motionand increasing the risk of collision withanother vehicle or object. The driver is, in anycase, responsible for safe driving.

58) The ASTsystem is an aid for driving anddoes not relieve the driver of responsibilityfor driving the vehicle.59) The performance of a vehicle with HDCmust never be tested in imprudent ordangerous ways, with the possibility ofputting the safety of the driver or otherpeople at risk.

DRIVINGASSISTANCESYSTEMS

The vehicle can feature the followingdriving assistance systems:

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring);FCW (Forward Collision Warning);TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System).For the operation of the systems, see thefollowing pages.

BSM (Blind SpotMonitoring) SYSTEM

The BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) systemuses two radar sensors, located in therear bumper (one for each side - seefig. 114 ), to detect the presence ofvehicles (cars, trucks, motorbikes, etc.) inthe rear side blind spots of your vehicle.

The system warns the driver about thepresence of vehicles in the detectionarea by lighting up, on the relevant side,the warning light located on the doormirror fig. 115.

114 06016V0001EM

104

SA

FETY

When the engine is started the warninglight turns on to signal the driver that thesystem is active.

Sensors

60)

The sensors are activated when anyforward gear is engaged at a speedhigher than about 6 mph (10 km/h), orwhen reverse is engaged.The sensors are temporarily deactivatedwhen the car is stationary and the P(Park) mode active.The detection area of the system coversabout a lane on both sides of the car(around 10 ft (3 metres)).This area begins from the door mirror andextends for about 20 ft (6 metres)towards the rear part of the car.When the sensors are active the systemmonitors the detection areas on bothsides of the car and warns the driver

about the possible presence of cars inthese areas.While driving the system monitors thedetection area from three different inputpoints (side, rear and front) to checkwhether a signal needs to be sent to thedriver. The system can detect thepresence of a vehicle in one of thesethree areas.

IMPORTANT The system does not signalthe presence of fixed object (e.g. safetybarriers, poles, walls, etc.). However, insome circumstances, the system mayactivate in the presence of these objects.This is normal and does not indicate asystem malfunction.

IMPORTANT The system does not warnthe driver about the presence of vehiclescoming from the opposite direction, inthe adjacent lanes.

Important notes

If a trailer is hitched to the vehicle, thesystem automatically deactivates.For the system to operate correctly, therear bumper area where the radarsensors are located must stay free fromsnow, ice and dirt gathered from the roadsurface.Do not cover the rear bumper area wherethe radar sensors are located with anyobject (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.).If, after purchasing the vehicle, you wishto install the tow hook, you need todeactivate the system via the Connect

system. To access the function, on themain menu select the following items insequence: "Settings", "Safety" and "BlindSpot Alert".

Rear view

The system detects cars coming from therear part of your car on both sides andentering the rear detection area with adifference in speed of less than 31 mph(50 km/h) with respect to your car.

Overtaking vehicles

If another vehicle is overtaken slowly(with a difference in speed of less thanabout 15.5 mph (25 km/h) and this staysin the blind spot for about 1.5 seconds,the warning light on the door mirror ofthe corresponding side lights up.If the difference in speed between thetwo vehicles is greater than about15.5 mph (25 km/h), the warning lightdoes not light up.

RCP (Rear Cross Path detection) system

This system helps the driver duringreverse manoeuvres in the case ofreduced visibility.The RCP system monitors the reardetection areas on both sides of the car,to detect objects moving towards thesides of the car at a minimum speedbetween about 0.6 mph and 2 mph(1 km/h and 3 km/h) and objects movingat a maximum speed of 22 mph(35 km/h), as generally happens inparking areas.

115 06016V0002EM

105

The system activation is signalled to thedriver by means of a visual and acousticwarning.

IMPORTANT If the sensors are coveredby objects or vehicles, the system will notwarn the driver.

Operating mode

The system may be activated/deactivated via the Connect system. Toaccess the function, on the main menuselect the following items in sequence:"Settings", "Safety" and "Blind SpotAlert".

"Blind spot alert", "Visual" mode

When the system is enabled, a visualwarning is sent to the door mirror on theside of the detected object.The visual warning on the mirror will blinkif the driver switches on the directionindicators, thus indicating the intentionto change lane.The warning will be fixed if the driverstays on the same lane.

"Blind spot alert" function deactivation

When the system is deactivated ("BlindSpot Alert" mode at "OFF"), the BSM orRCP systems will not emit neitheracoustic warnings.The BSM system will store the operatingmode running when the engine wasstopped. Each time the engine is started,the operating mode stored previously willbe recalled and used.

FORWARDCOLLISIONWARNING (FCW)SYSTEM

60) 61) 62) 63) 64)

19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25) 26) 27)

This is a driving assistance systemcomposed of a radar located behind thefront bumper fig. 116 and a cameralocated in the middle of the windscreenfig. 117.

In the event of an imminent collision thesystem intervenes by automaticallybraking the car to prevent the impact orreduce its effects.The system provides the driver withacoustic and visual signals throughspecific messages on the instrumentpanel display.The acoustic and visual signals before thesystem cuts in depend on the car speed.No acoustic/visual signal is generated atspeeds slower than 30 km/h.Acoustic/visual signal is generated atspeeds faster than 30 km/h, instead.The system may lightly brake to warn thedriver if a possible frontal accident isdetected (limited braking). Signals andlimited braking are intended to allow thedriver to react promptly, in order toprevent or reduce the effects of apotential accident.In situations with the risk of collision, ifthe system detects no intervention bythe driver, it provides automatic brakingto help slow the car and mitigate thepotential frontal accident (automaticbraking). If intervention by the driver onthe brake pedal is detected but notdeemed sufficient, the system mayintervene in order to improve thereaction of the braking system, thereforereducing vehicle speed further(additional assistance in braking stage).The system will intervene automaticallyin case of imminent collision or impactagainst a pedestrian crossing the road

116 06016V0003EM

117 06016V0004EM

106

SA

FETY

(speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).

IMPORTANT For safety reasons, whenthe car has stopped, the brake callipersmay remain blocked for about 2 seconds.Make sure you press the brake pedal ifthe vehicle moves slightly forwards.

Engagement/disengagement

The Forward Collision Warning systemcan be deactivated (and then reactivated)via the Connect system. To access thefunction, on the main menu select thefollowing items in sequence: "Settings","Safety", "Forward Collision Warning" and"Status".The system can be deactivated even withthe ignition device ON.

IMPORTANT The system status can bechanged with vehicle at a standstill only.

Activation/deactivation

The Forward Collision Warning system isactivated whenever the engine is startedregardless of the Connect systemsetting.After deactivation, the system will notwarn the driver about a possible collisionwith the vehicle ahead, regardless of thesetting selected with the Connectsystem.

IMPORTANT Each time the engine isstarted, the system is activatedregardless of where was when it waspreviously switched off.This function is not active at a speed

lower than 4.3 mph (7 km/h) or higherthan 124 mph (200 km/h).The system is active when:

each time the engine is started;is active (ON) in the Connect system;the ignition device is at ON;- the vehicle speed is between 4.3 and

124 mph (7 and 200 km/h);the front seat belts are fastened.

Changing the system sensitivity

The sensitivity of the system can bechanged through the Connect systemmenu, choosing from one of the followingthree options: "Near", "Med" or "Far". Seethe description in the Connect systemsupplement for how to change thesettings.The default option is "Med". With thissetting, the system warns the driver of apossible collision with the vehicle in frontwhen that vehicle is at a standarddistance, between that of the other twosettings.With the system sensitivity set to "Far",the system will warn the driver of apossible accident with the vehicle in frontwhen that vehicle is at a greater distance,thus providing the possibility of acting onthe brakes more lightly and gradually.This setting provides the drivers with themaximum possible reaction time toprevent a potential accident.With the option set to "Near", the systemwill warn the driver of a possible accidentwith the vehicle in front when that vehicle

is close. This setting offers the driver alower reaction time compared to the"Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of apotential accident, but permits moredynamic driving of the car.The system sensitivity setting is kept inthe memory when the engine is switchedoff.

System limited operation warning

If the dedicated message is displayed, acondition limiting the system operationmay have occurred. The possible reasonsof this limitation are something blockingthe camera view or a fault.In this condition it will still be possible todrive the car normally, but automaticbraking will not be available in the eventof an impending collision.If an obstruction is signalled, clean thearea of the windscreen shown in fig. 117.When the conditions limiting the systemfunctions end, this will go back to normaland complete operation. Should the faultpersist, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.

System failure warning

If the system switches off and adedicated message is shown on thedisplay, it means that there is a fault onthe system.In this case, it is still possible to drive thecar, but you are advised to contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership as soon aspossible.

107

Radar warning not available

If conditions are such that the radarcannot detect obstacles correctly, thesystem is deactivated and a dedicatedmessage appears on the display. Thisgenerally occurs in the event of poorvisibility, such aswhen it is snowing orraining heavily.The system can also be temporarilydimmed due to obstructions such asmud,dirt or ice on the bumper. In such cases, adedicatedmessagewill be shown on thedisplay and the systemwill bedeactivated. Thismessage cansometimes appear in conditions of highreflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflectivetiles or ice or snow).When the conditionslimiting the system functions end, thiswill go back to normal and completeoperation.In certain particular cases, this dedicatedmessage could be displayedwhen theradar is not detecting any vehicles orobjectswithin its view range.If atmospheric conditions are not the realreason behind thismessage, check if thesensor is dirty. It may be necessary toclean or remove any obstructions in thearea shown in fig. 116.If themessage appears often, even in theabsence of atmospheric conditions suchas snow, rain, mud or other obstructions,contact an Alfa RomeoDealership for asensor alignment check.In the absence of visible obstructions,cleaning the radar surface, bymanually

removing the decorative cover trim,could be required. Have this operationperformed at an Alfa RomeoDealership.

IMPORTANT It is recommended that youdo not install devices, accessories oraerodynamic attachments in front of thesensor or darken it in anyway, as this cancompromise the correct functioning ofthe system.

Frontal collision alarm with activebraking(where provided)If this function is selected, the brakes areoperated to reduce the speed of the carin the event of potential frontal impact.This function applies an additionalbraking pressure if the braking pressureapplied by the driver does not suffice toprevent potential frontal impact.The function is activewith speed above4.3mph (7 km/h).

Driving in special conditions

In certain driving conditions, such as, forexample:

driving close to a bend;the vehicle ahead is leaving a

roundabout;vehicleswith small dimensions and/or

not aligned in the driving lane;lane change by other vehicles;vehicles travelling at right angles to

the vehicle.

system interventionmight beunexpected or delayed. The drivermusttherefore be very careful, keepingcontrol of the vehicle to drive in completesafety.

IMPORTANT In particularly complextraffic conditions, the driver candeactivate the systemmanually throughthe Connect system.

Driving close to a bend

When entering or leaving awide bend, thesystemmay detect a vehicle that is infront of you, but that is not driving in thesame lane fig. 118. In cases such asthese, the systemmay intervene.

118 06016V0005EM

108

SAFE

TY

The vehicle ahead is leaving aroundabout

On a roundabout, the system couldintervene when it detects a vehicle aheadthat is leaving the roundabout fig. 119.

Vehicles with small dimensions and/ornot aligned in the driving lane

The system cannot detect vehicles infront of the car if they are outside therange of the radar sensor or may notreact to small vehicles, such as bicyclesor motorcycles fig. 120.

Lane change by other vehicles

Vehicles suddenly changing lane to enterthe same lane as your car within theoperating range of the radar sensor, maycause the system to intervene fig. 121.

Vehicles travelling at right angles tothe vehicle

The system could temporarily react to avehicle that is passing at right anglesthrough the radar sensor’s operatingrange fig. 122.

Important notesThe system has not been designed to

prevent impacts and cannot detectpossible conditions leading to anaccident in advance. Failure to take intoaccount this warning may lead to seriousor fatal injuries.

The system may be activated,assessing the trajectory of the car, incase of reflecting metal objects differentfrom other cars, such as safety barriers,road signs, barriers before parking lots,tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways,objects near road constructions sites orhigher than the car (e.g. a flyover). In thesame way, the system may intervene

119 06016V0010EM

120 06016V0006EM

121 06016V0007EM

122 06016V0008EM

109

inside multi-storey car parks or tunnels,or due to a glare on the road surface.These possible activations are aconsequence of the real driving scenariocoverage by the system and must not beregarded as faults.

The system has been designed forroad use only. If the vehicle is driven on atrack, the system must be deactivated toavoid unnecessary warnings. Automaticdeactivation is signalled by the dedicatedwarning light/symbol switching on in theinstrument panel (see the instructions inthe "Warning lights and messages"paragraph, "Knowing the instrumentpanel" chapter).

TPMS (Tyre PressureMonitoringSystem)

65) 66) 67) 68) 69) 70) 71)

28)

The car is equipped with Tyre PressureMonitoring System (TPMS), which canadvise the driver in the event ofinsufficient tyre pressure on the basis ofthe pressure when cold indicated in the"Technical specifications" chapter.The system consists of a radio-frequencytransmitter sensor fitted to each wheel(on the rim inside the tyre), which cansend information on the inflationpressure of each tyre to the control unitfig. 123.

Inflation pressure varies in relation totemperature by about 1 psi (0.07) barevery 43.7 °F (6.5 °C). This means thatwhen the outdoor temperature falls, thetyre pressure decreases. Always adjustthe tyre inflation pressure when cold.This is defined as the tyre pressure afterat least 3 hours of vehicle inactivity ortravel of less than 1mile (1.6 km) afterthe 3 hour interval.The cold tyre inflation pressure must notexceed the maximum pressure indicatedon the shoulder of the tyre: for furtherdetails see the instructions in the "Rimsand tyres" paragraph, in the "Technicaldata" chapter.Tyre pressure increases when the car isdriven. This is normal, and no adjustmentof the pressure is required.The TPMS signals the driver a possibleinsufficient pressure if this falls belowthe warning limit for any reason, includingthe effects of low temperature andnormal loss of pressure from the tyre.

The TPMS will stop indicating insufficienttyre pressure when it is equal to orgreater than the prescribed cold inflationpressure. Therefore, if insufficient tyrepressure is indicated ( warning light oninstrument panel on), increase theinflation pressure up to the prescribedcold inflation value.The system automatically updates andwarning light switches off each timethe system receives the updatedinflation pressures. The vehicle mightneed to be driven at a speed higher thanabout 15.5 mph (25 km/h) up to20 minutes for the TPMS to receive thisinformation.

Operating example

Supposing that the prescribed coldinflation pressure (i.e. vehicle stationaryfor at least 3 hours) is 33.4 psi (2.3 bar),if the ambient temperature is 68°F(20°C) and the detected tyre pressure is28.3 psi (1.95 bar), a temperaturereduction of 19.4°F (−7°C) results in adecrease in tyre pressure, bringing it toapproximately 24 psi (1.65 bar). Thispressure is sufficiently low to activatethe warning light.Heating of tyres due to driving thevehicle may increase tyre pressure up toapproximately 28.3 psi (1.95 bar), butthe warning light will stay on. In thissituation, the warning light will switch offonly after the tyres are inflated to theprescribed cold pressure value for thecar.

123 06016S0009EM

110

SA

FETY

IMPORTANT The TPMS is designed fororiginal tyres and wheels. The prescribedpressures and consequent alarmthresholds set in the TPMS are based onthe dimensions of the tyres fitted on thevehicle. Using spare wheels of a size, typeand/or design different from the originalones may cause an irregular operation ofthe system and damage the sensors.Aftermarket fitted wheels may damagethe sensors. Using aftermarket tyresealants may damage the Tyre PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) sensor. Ifaftermarket tyre sealant is used it isrecommended to go to an Alfa RomeoDealership to have the sensors checked.After checking or adjusting the tyreinflation pressure, always refit the valvecap to prevent humidity and dirt fromentering, these may damage the TyrePressure Monitoring System sensor.

LOW TYRE PRESSURE WARNING

If an insufficient pressure value isdetected on one or more tyres, the

warning light on the instrument panelswitches on and the dedicated messagesare shown on the display. The system alsohighlights the tyre or tyres withinsufficient pressure graphically. Anacoustic warning is also emitted.In this case, stop the car, check theinflation pressure of each tyre and inflatethem to the correct cold inflationpressure value, shown on the display or inthe dedicated TPMS menu.

TPMS TEMPORARILY DISABLED

TPMS check message

If a system failure is present, thewarning light flashes for about

75 seconds and then stays on solid. Anacoustic warning is also emitted.A dedicated message and dashes "– –"instead of the pressure value are shownon the display, to indicate that detectionis impossible.When the ignition device is set to STOPand then back to ON, the indicationsequence repeats provided that thefailure is still resent.The warning light switches off whenthe failure condition disappears and thepressure value is displayed again in placeof the dashes.A fault in the system could occur in thefollowing cases:

intense radio-frequency interferencemay prevent the correct operation of theTPMS. This condition will be indicated bya dedicated message on the display. Thewarning will disappear automatically assoon as the radio-frequency interferenceceases to affect the system;

aftermarket application of colouredfilms on the windows that interfere withthe radio waves emitted by the TPMS;

accumulation of layers of snow or iceon the wheels or the wheel arches;

using snow chains;use of rim/tyre assemblies without

sensors for TPMS;After the punctured tyre has beenrepaired with the original tyre sealantcontained in the TireKit, the previouscondition must be restored, so that the

warning light is off during normaldriving.

Deactivating TPMS messages

(for markets where provided)When replacing the standard wheels withothers that do not have TPMS sensors(for example when substituting therim/tyre assembly for the winter season)and depending on the country of sale, themessages only can be disabledautomatically at the next start-up afterthe fault.The TPMS will emit an acoustic warning,the warning light will flash for about75 seconds, then it will stay oncontinuously and the instrument panelwill display the "TPMS check" messagewith dashes (– –) instead of the pressurevalues on the Connect system display.From the following ignition cycle, theTPMS will not emit any acoustic warningand the display will not show themessage "TPMS check", but the dasheswill be still displayed instead of thepressure value.The system will only resume normaloperation when all the pressure sensorshave been detected again.

111

IMPORTANT If wheels without pressuresensors (e.g. wheels with winter tyres)have been installed on the vehicle and thestandard wheels (with sensors) arestored close the vehicle, the systemcould detect the pressures of the latterand consequently display the fault cycleagain once its has left the sensitive area.

WARNING

60) The system is an aid for vehicle driving,it DOES NOTwarn the driver about incomingvehicles outside of the detection areas. Thedriver must always maintain a sufficientlevel of attention to the traffic and roadconditions and for controlling the trajectoryof the vehicle.61) The system is an aid for the driver, whomust always pay full attention while driving.The responsibility always rests with thedriver, who must take into account thetraffic conditions in order to drive incomplete safety. The driver must alwaysmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle infront.62) If the driver depresses the brake pedalfully or carries out a fast steering duringsystem operation, the automatic brakingfunction may stop (e.g. to allow a possiblemanoeuvre to avoid the obstacle).63) The system intervenes on vehiclestravelling in the same lane. People, animalsand things (e.g. pushchairs) are not takeninto consideration.

64) If the car must be placed on a rollerbench for maintenance interventions or if itis washed in an automatic roller washingtunnel with an obstacle in the front part (e.g.another car, a wall or another obstacle), thesystem may detect its presence andactivate. In this case the system must bedeactivated through the settings of theConnect system.65) The presence of theTPMS does notpermit the driver to neglect regular checksof the tyre pressure, including for the sparetyre, and correct maintenance: the system isnot used to signalling a possible tyre fault.66) Tyre pressure must be checked withtyres rested and cold. Should it becomenecessary for whatever reason to checkpressure with warm tyres, do not reducepressure even though it is higher than theprescribed value. Repeat the check when thetyres are cold.67)Should one or more wheels be fittedwithout sensors, the system will no longer beavailable and a warning message will beshown on the display, until wheels withsensors are fitted again.68) TheTPMS cannot indicate sudden tyrepressure drops (e.g. if a tyre bursts). In thiscase, stop the vehicle, braking with cautionand avoiding abrupt steering.69)Changes in outside temperature maycause tyre pressures to vary. The systemmay temporarily indicate insufficientpressure. In this case, check the tyrepressure when cold and, if necessary,restore the inflation values.70)Replacing standard tyres with wintertyres and vice versa requiresTPMS systemadjustment that must only be performed byAlfa Romeo Dealerships.

71)When a tyre is removed, it is advisableto replace the rubber valve seal as well:contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership. Thefitting/removal of the tyres and/or rimsrequire special care. To avoid damaging orfitting the sensors incorrectly, tyre and/orrim fitting/removal operations should onlybe carried out by specialised staff. Contactan Alfa Romeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT

19) The system may have limited or absentoperation due to weather conditions such as:heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow.20) The section of the bumper before thesensor must not be covered with adhesives,auxiliary headlights or any other object.21)System intervention might beunexpected or delayed when other vehiclestransport loads projecting from the side,above or from the rear, with respect to thenormal size of the vehicle.22)Operation can be adversely affected byany structural change made to the vehicle,such as a modification to the front geometry,tyre change, or a heavier load than thestandard load of the vehicle.23) Incorrect repairs made on the front partof the vehicle (e.g. bumper, chassis) may alterthe position of the radar sensor, andadversely affect its operation. Go to an AlfaRomeo Dealership for any operation of thistype.24)Do not tamper with nor carry out anyintervention on the radar sensor or on thecamera on the windscreen. In the event of asensor failure, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.

112

SA

FETY

25)Do not wash with high-pressure jets inthe bumper lower area: in particular do notoperate on the system's electrical connector.26)Be careful in the case of repairs and newpaintings in the area around the sensor(panel covering the sensor on the left side ofthe bumper). In the event of a frontal impactthe sensor may automatically deactivateand display a warning to indicate that thesensor needs to be repaired. Even without amalfunction warning, deactivate the systemoperation if you think that the position of theradar sensor has changed (e.g. due tolow-speed frontal impact as during parkingmanoeuvres). In these cases, go to an AlfaRomeo Dealership to have the radar sensorrealigned or replaced.27)When towing a trailer, a vehicle or duringloading manoeuvres on a vehicle transporter(or in vehicle for transport), the system mustbe deactivated via the Connect system.28) TheTire Repair Kit, provided with thevehicle, is compatible with theTPMSsensors. Using sealants different from thatin the original kit may compromise itsoperation. If sealants not equivalent with theoriginal ones are used, it is recommended tohave theTPMS sensor operation checked bya qualified repair centre.

OCCUPANTPROTECTIONSYSTEMS

The following protection systems areamong the vehicle’s most importantsafety equipment:

seat belts;SBA (Seat Belt Alert) system;head restraints;child restraint systems;Front airbags and side bags.

Read the information given the followingpages with the utmost care. It is offundamental importance that theprotection systems are used in thecorrect way to guarantee the maximumpossible safety level for the driver andthe passengers.For the description of the head restraintadjustment see the "Head restraints"paragraph in the "Knowing your vehicle"chapter.

SEATBELTS

All the seat belts have three anchorpoints and a retractor.The retractor mechanism operateslocking the belt in the event of sharpbraking or strong deceleration due to animpact. This allows the belt strap to slidefreely and to adapt to the body of theoccupant. In the event of an accident, thebelt will lock reducing the risk of impactinside the passenger compartment andof being projected outside the vehicle.The driver is responsible for respecting,and ensuring that all the other occupantsof the vehicle also respect, the local lawsin force in relation to the use of the seatbelts.Always fasten the seat belts beforesetting off.

USINGTHE SEATBELTS

The seat belt should be worn keeping thechest straight and rested against thebackrest.To fasten the seat belts, hold the tongue1 fig. 124 and insert it into the buckle 2,until it clicks into place.

113

On removal of the belt, if it jams, let itrewind for a short stretch, then pull it outagain without jerking.To unfasten the seat belts, press button3 and guide the seat belt with your handwhile it is rewinding, to prevent it fromtwisting.

72)

The retractor may lock when the vehicleis parked on a steep slope: this isperfectly normal. Furthermore, the reelmechanism locks the belt if it is pulledsharply or in the event of sudden braking,collisions and high-speed bends.Wear the rear seat belts as shown infig. 125 and fig. 126.

73)

ADJUSTING THE SEAT BELT HEIGHT

Four different adjustments in height arepossible.To adjust the window height, from the topdownwards, press the button 4fig. 127 and slide the handle downwards.The height adjuster moves upwards evenwithout pressing the button.Always adjust the height of the seat belts

to fit the person wearing it: thisprecaution could greatly reduce the riskof injury in the event of collision.Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes approximately half waybetween the shoulder and the neck.

74) 75)

WARNING

72)Never press button 3 when travelling.73)Remember that, in the event of anaccident, the rear seat passengers notwearing seat belts are exposed to a veryserious risk and also represent a seriousdanger for the front seat occupants.74)Make height adjustment of the seatbelts when the car is stationary.

124 06056V0001EM 125 06056V0005EM

126 06056S0003EM

127 06056V0002EM

114

SA

FETY

75)After height adjustment, always checkthat the cursor to which the ring is fastenedis locked in one of the preset positions. To dothis, with the adjustment button released,exert further pressure downwards to allowthe locking device to click if the grip has notbeen released in one of the possiblepositions.

SBA (Seat Belt Alert) SYSTEM

The SBR system warns the passengers ofthe front and rear (where provided) seatsif their seat belt is not fastened.The system warnings unfastened seatbelts with visual warnings (warning lightson in the instrument panel and icons onthe display) and an acoustic warning (seethe following paragraphs).

FRONTSEATBELTWARNING LIGHTBEHAVIOUR

When the ignition device is turned to ON,warning light (see fig. 128 ) comes onfor a few seconds, regardless of thestatus of the front seat belts.With car at a standstill, if the driver sideseat belt or the passenger side seat belt(with occupant seated) is unfastened, thewarning light stays on constantly.

As soon as the threshold of 5 mph(8 km/h) is exceeded for a few seconds(variable according to the vehicle

conditions) with driver or passenger side(with passenger seated) seat beltsunfastened, an acoustic warning isactivated together with the flashing ofthe warning light for approximately105 seconds.When this cycle of warnings is activatedit will stay on for its entire length(regardless of the car speed) or until theseat belts are fastened again.When the reverse is engaged, during thecycle of warnings, the acoustic warning isdeactivated and the warning lightturns on constantly. The cycle ofwarnings will be reactivated as soon asthe speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h) again.

REARSEATBELT ICONBEHAVIOUR

(where provided)

The icons are shown on the display(fig. 129 ) after a few seconds after theignition device is turned to ON anddisappear after approximately30 seconds.After a door closes, or following a changein belt fastening status, the icons areshown again for approximately30 seconds before disappearing.The icons shown on the display indicate:1 - rear left seat belt;2 - rear central seat belt;3 - rear right seat belt.128 06066S0001EM

115

The icons are displayed according to thecorresponding seat belts in the rearseats, and stay on for about 30 secondsfrom the last seat belt status change:

if the seat belt is fastened thecorresponding icon will be green;

if the seat belt is unfastened thecorresponding icon will be red.If a rear seat belt is unfastened, anacoustic warning (3 "beeps") will beactivated along with the relevant iconlighting up in the display.Furthermore the icons will light up againfor 30 seconds each time one of the reardoors is closed.

The visual indication (flashing red) willstart and stop independently for eachwarning light if several seat belts areunfastened.The icon will turn green after thecorresponding seat belt has beenfastened.The rear seat icons will go out, regardlessof the state of the belt (red icon or greenicon), approximately 30 seconds afterthe last signal.

IMPORTANT NOTES

As far as the rear seats are concerned,the SBR system will only indicatewhether the seat belts are unfastened(red icon) or fastened (green icon), notthe presence of any passengers.The warning lights/icons all stay off if allseat belts (front and rear) are fastenedwhen the ignition device is set to ON.For the rear seats, the icons will activatea few seconds after the ignition devicehas been turned to ON, regardless of thestatus of the seat belts (even if the seatbelts are all fastened).All the warning lights/icons will come onwhen at least one belt changes fromfastened to unfastened status or viceversa.

PRE-TENSIONERS

The car is equipped with front and rearlateral seat belt pretensioners, whichdraw back the seat belts by severalcentimetres in the event of a strongfrontal impact. This guarantees theperfect adherence of the seat belts tothe occupant's bodies before theretention action begins.It is evident that the pretensioners havebeen activated when the belt withdrawstoward the retractor.This car is also equipped with a secondpretensioner on the front seat belts(fitted in the kick plate area). Itsactivation is signalled by the shorteningof the metal cable.A slight discharge of smoke may beproduced during the activation of thepretensioner which is not harmful anddoes not involve any fire hazard.The pretensioner does not require anymaintenance or lubrication: any changesto its original conditions will invalidate itsefficiency.If, due to unusual natural events (floods,sea storms, etc.), the device has beenaffected by water and/or mud, contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership to have itreplaced.

IMPORTANT To obtain the highestdegree of protection from the action ofthe pretensioner, wear the seat belt tightto the torso and pelvis.

129 06066S0002EM

116

SA

FETY

LOAD LIMITERS

76)

29)

To increase safety in the event of anaccident, the front and rear lateral seatbelt retractors contain a load limiterwhich controls the force acting on thechest and shoulders during the beltrestraining action in the event of ahead-on collision.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FORUSINGTHE SEATBELTS

77) 78) 79)

Respect and ensure that all the otheroccupants of the vehicle comply with thelocal laws in force regarding the use ofseat belts. Always fasten the seat beltsbefore setting off.Seat belts must also be worn by pregnantwomen: the risk of injury in the event ofan accident is reduced for them and theunborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt.Pregnant women must position the lowerpart of the belt very low down so that itpasses over the pelvis and under theabdomen fig. 130. While pregnancyprogresses, the driver must adjust bothseat and steering wheel to have fullcontrol over the vehicle (pedals andsteering wheel must be easy to access).The maximum clearance should be keptbetween the abdomen and the steeringwheel.

The seat belt must not be twisted. Theupper part must pass over the shoulderand cross the chest diagonally. The lowerpart must adhere to the pelvis fig. 131,not to the abdomen of the occupant.Never use devices (clips, clamps, etc.)that hold the seat belt away from yourbody.

Each seat belt must be used by only oneperson. Never travel with a child sittingon the passenger's lap and a single belt to

protect them both fig. 132. In general, donot place any objects between the personand the belt.

SEATBELTSMAINTENANCE

For keeping the seat belts in efficientconditions, carefully observe thefollowing warnings:

always use the seat belt wellstretched and never twisted; make surethat it is free to run without obstructions;

check seat belt operation as follows:attach the seat belt and pull it hard;

replace the belt after an accident of acertain severity even if it does not appearto be damaged. Always replace the seatbelt if the pretensioners were deployed;

prevent the retractors from gettingwet: their correct operation is onlyguaranteed if water does not get inside;

replace the seat belt when it showswear or cuts.

130 06076S0001EM

131 06076S0002EM

132 06076S0003EM

117

WARNING

76) The pretensioner may be used only once.After its activation, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership to have it replaced.77)Removing or otherwise tampering withpretensioner and seat belt components isstrictly prohibited. Any intervention on thesecomponents must be performed by qualifiedand authorised technicians. Always contactan Alfa Romeo Dealership.78) For maximum safety, keep the backrestupright, lean back into it and make sure theseat belt fits closely across your chest andpelvis. Always fasten the seat belts for boththe front and rear seats! Travelling withoutwearing seat belts will increase the risk ofserious injury and even death in the event ofan accident.79) If the belt has been subjected to highlevels of stress, for example after anaccident, it should be changed completelytogether with the attachments, attachmentfixing screws and the pretensioner. In fact,even if the belt has no visible defects, it mayhave lost its resilience.

IMPORTANT

29)Operations which lead to impacts,vibrations or localised heating (over 100°Cfor a maximum of six hours) in the areaaround the pretensioner may cause damageor make it deploy. Contact an Alfa RomeoDealership should intervention be necessaryon these components.

CHILD PROTECTIONSYSTEMS

CARRYING CHILDRENSAFELY

80) 81) 82) 83)

For optimal protection in the event of animpact, all occupants must be seated andwearing adequate restraint systems,including newborn and other children!This prescription is compulsory in all ECcountries according to EC Directive2003/20/EC.Children below the height of 4.9 ft(1.50 metres) and up to 12 years must beprotected with suitable restraintsystems and be seated on the rear seats.Statistics on accidents indicate that therear seats offer greater safety forchildren.Compared with an adult, a child's head islarger and heavier in proportion to theirbody and the child's muscular and bonestructures are not fully developed.Therefore, correct restraint systemsother than adult seat belts are necessary,to reduce as much as possible the risk ofinjuries in the event of an accident,braking or sudden manoeuvre.Children must be seated safely andcomfortably. Depending on thecharacteristics of the child restraintsystems used, you are advised to keepchildren in rearward facing child restraintsystems for as long as possible (at leastuntil 3-4 years old), since this is the mostprotected position in the event of animpact.

The choice of the most suitable childrestraint system depends on the weightand size of the child. There are varioustypes of child restraint systems, whichcan be secured to the car by means of theseat belts or with the ISOFIX/i-Sizeanchorages.It is recommended to always choose therestraint system most suitable for thechild; for this reason always refer to theOwner Handbook provided with the childrestraint system, to be sure that it is ofthe right type for the children it isintended for.

In Europe the characteristics of childrestraint systems are ruled by theregulation ECE-R44, dividing them intofive weight groups:

Group Weight range

Group 0 up to 22 lb (10 kg) inweight

Group 0+ up to 28.7 lb (13 kg)in weight

Group 1 20 - 40 lb (9 - 18 kg)in weight

Group 2 33 - 55 lb (15 - 25 kg)in weight

Group 3 48.5 - 79.4 lb (22 -36 kg) in weight

The ECE-R44 standard was recentlypaired with the ECE R-129 regulation,which defines the characteristics of the

118

SA

FETY

new i-Size child restraint systems (seethe "Suitability of passenger seats fori-Size child restraint system use"paragraph for more information).All restraint devices must bear thetype-approval data, together with thecontrol mark, on a label solidly fixed tothe child restraint system which mustnever be removed.Lineaccessori includes child restraintsystems for each weight group. Thesedevices are recommended having beenspecifically tested for Alfa Romeo cars.

INSTALLINGA CHILD CARSEATWITHSEATBELTS

The Universal child restraint systemsinstalled with the seat belts only aretype-approved on the basis of the ECER44 standard and are divided intovarious weight groups.

84) 85) 86) 87)

IMPORTANT The figures are only anexample for installation. Fit the childrestraint system according to theinstructions, which must be included.

Group 0 and 0+

Babies up to 28.7 lb (13 kg) must becarried with a rear facing child restraintsystem of a type as shown infig. 133 which, supporting the head, doesnot induce stress on the neck in the eventof sudden decelerations.

The child restraint system is secured bythe vehicle seat belts, as shown infig. 133 and it must restrain the child inturn with its own belts.

Group 1

From 20 to 40 lb (9 to 18 kg), childrencan be transported facing forwardfig. 134.

133 06086V0001EM

134 06086V0002EM

119

seatbelts, so the diagonal part of the beltadheres to the thorax and not to the neck,and the horizontal part adheres to thechild's stomach and not its abdomen.

Group 3

For children from 48.5 to 79.4 lb (22 to36 kg), there are restraining devices thatallow the seatbelts to pass throughproperly.The fig. 136 shows the correct childpositioning on the rear seat.The fig. 136 shows the correct childpositioning on the rear seat.

Children over 4.9 ft (1.50 m) tall wearseatbelts like adults.

136 06086V0004EM

120

SA

FETY

Group 2

Children from 33 to 55 lb (15 to 25 kg)can be held directly by the car's seatbeltsfig. 135.

In this case the carseats only correctlyposition the child with respect to the

135 06086V0003EM

PASSENGERSEATCOMPLIANCEWITHREGULATIONSONUNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEMUSE

According to the European Directive 2000/3/EC the suitability of each passenger seat position for the fixing of universal childrestraint systems is shown in the following table:

Positioning the “Universal” child restraint system

Group Weight range

Front passenger Rear passengers

Passenger airbagson

Passenger airbagsoff

Rear central passengerRear side

passengers

Group 0 up to 22 lb (10 kg) X U U U

Group 0+ up to 26.7 lb (13 kg) X U U U

Group 1 20 - 40 lb (9-18 kg) X U U U

Group 2 33 - 55 lb (15-25 kg) U U U U

Group 3 48.5 - 79.4 lb(22-36 kg) U U U U

X = Restraint system not suitable for children in this weight category.U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified“Groups”.

121

INSTALLINGAN ISOFIX CHILD CARSEAT

88) 89) 90) 91) 92)

The rear side seats of the vehicle areequipped with ISOFIX attachments, forfitting child restraint systems quickly,simply and safely.The ISOFIX system lets you install theISOFIX child restraining system withoutusing the car seat belts but connectingthem directly to the carseat with threeanchors in the car.Traditional child restraint systems can befitted alongside ISOFIX child restraintsystems on different seats in the samevehicle.To install an ISOFIX child restraintsystem, attach it to the two metalanchors fig. 137. They can be reached bylifting the flaps 2 located behind the rearseat cushion, at the point where it meetsthe backrest. Then fix the upper hook(available with the child restraint system)to the dedicated "top tether" anchorfig. 138 located behind the seatbackrest. As an example, fig. 139 shows a

Universal Isofix child restraint system forweight group 1.

IMPORTANT The fig. 139 is indicativeand for assembly purposes only. Fit thechild restraint system according to theinstructions, which must be included.

NOTE When a Universal ISOFIX childrestraint system is used, only ECE R44"ISOFIX Universal” (R44/03 or furtherupgrades), type-approved child restraintsystems can be used (see fig. 140 ).The other weight groups are covered byspecific ISOFIX child restraint systems,which can be used only if specificallytested for this vehicle (see list of vehiclesprovided with the child restraint system).

137 06086V0009EM

138 06086V0005EM

139 06086V0006EM

140 06086S0007EM

122

SA

FETY

SUITABILITYOF PASSENGERSEATS FOR ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEMUSE

ISOFIX POSITIONS ON THE VEHICLE

Weight categories Size category Device Front passengerRear side

passengersRear centralpassenger

Group 0 (up to 22 lb(10 kg)) E ISO/R1 X IL X

Group 0+ (up to 28.7 lb(13 kg))

E ISO/R1 X IL X

D ISO/R2 X IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL X

Group 1 (from 20 to 40 lb(from 9 kg to 18 kg))

D ISO/R2 X IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL X

B ISO/F2 X IUF –IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X IUF –IL X

A ISO/F3 X IUF –IL X

Group 2 (from 33 to 55 lb(from 15 kg to 25 kg)) X IL X

Group 3 (from 48.5 to79.4 lb (from 22 kg to36 kg))

X IL X

X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child protection systems for this weight and/or size category.IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Specific for the vehicle", "Restricted", or "Semiuniversal" categories, approved for this type of vehicle.IUF Suitable for forward facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Universal category and type-approved for the use in the weight group.

123

SUITABILITYOF PASSENGERSEATSFOR i-Size CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEMUSE

The rear side seats of the vehicle aretype-approved to house thestate-of-the-art i-Size child restraintsystems.These child restraint systems, built andtype-approved according to the i-Size(ECE R129) standard, ensure bettersafety conditions to carry children onboard a vehicle:

the child must be transportedrearward facing until 15 months;

child restraint system protection isincreased in the event of a side collision;

the use of the ISOFIX system ispromoted to avoid faulty installation ofthe child restraint system;

efficiency in the choice of the childrestraint system, which isn't madeaccording to weight anymore butaccording to the child's height, isincreased;

compatibility between the vehicleseats and the child restraint systems isbetter: the i-Size child restraint systemscan be considered as "Super ISOFIX"; thismeans that they can be perfectly fitted intype-approved i-Size seats, but can alsobe fitted in ISOFIX (ECE R44)type-approved seats.

NOTE The vehicle seats, i-Sizetype-approved, are marked by thesymbol shown in fig. 141.

141 06086S0008EM

124

SA

FETY

The following table, according to European standard ECE 129, indicates the possibility of i-Size child restraint system installation.

i-Size POSITIONS ON THE VEHICLE

Device Front passenger Rear side passengersRear centralpassenger

i-Size child restraint systemsISO/R2 X i-U X

ISO/F2 X i-U X

i-U: suitable for Universal i-Size child restraint systems, both rearward facing and forward facing.X: seat not suitable for Universal i-Size child restraint systems.

125

CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEMSRECOMMENDEDBYALFAROMEOFORTHE STELVIO

Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes a complete range of child restraint systems to be fixed using the seat belt with three anchoragepoints or the ISOFIX anchorages.

IMPORTANT Alfa Romeo recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included.

Weight group Child restraint systemType of child restraint

systemChild restraint system installation

Group 0+: from birthto 28.7 lb (13 kg)from 15.7 to 33.5 in(from 40 to 85 cm)

PEG-PEREGOPrimo Viaggio SL

Universal/ISOFIX child restraintsystem.It must be installed rearward facing,using the vehicle seat belts only, orthe dedicated ISOFIX K base (whichcan be purchased separately) and thevehicle ISOFIX anchorages.Alfa Romeo recommends using thespecific ISOFIX K base (which canbe purchased separately) and theISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle toinstall it.With the base it must be fitted on therear outer seats.ISOFIX Basic 0+1 K

126

SA

FETY

Weight group Child restraint systemType of child restraint

systemChild restraint system installation

Group 1: from 20 to40 lb (from 9 kg to18 kg)from 26.4 to 41.3 in(from 67 to 105 cm)

Fair G0/1S

Universal/ISOFIX child restraintsystem.It can be fitted using the vehicle seatbelts (forward facing only) or usingthe ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle.Alfa Romeo recommends fitting itusing the rear facing ISOFIXplatform (A RWF type - to bepurchased separately) or theforward facing ISOFIX platform (G -FWF type - to be purchasedseparately), the rigid head restraint(to be purchased separately) andthe ISOFIX anchorages for the car.With the base it must be fitted on therear outer seats.

Reference 1: Fair ISOFIX RWFplatformorReference 2: Fair ISOFIX FWFplatform

Group 2: from 33 to55 lb (from 15 kg to25 kg)from 37.4 to 53 in(from 95 to 135 cm)

Britax Römer KidFix XP

It can only be fitted facing forwards,using the three-point seat belt andthe ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle.Alfa Romeo recommends to install itusing the ISOFIX anchorages of thevehicle.It must be fitted on the rear outerseats.

127

Weight group Child restraint systemType of child restraint

systemChild restraint system installation

Group 3: from 48.5 to79.4 lb (from 22 kgto 36 kg)from 53.5 to 59 in(from 136 to150 cm)

Britax Römer KidFix XP

It can only be fitted facing forwards,using the three-point seat belt andthe ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle.Alfa Romeo recommends to install itusing the ISOFIX anchorages of thevehicle.It must be fitted on the rear outerseats.

128

SA

FETY

Main recommendations to carrychildren safely

Install the child restraint systems onthe rear seat, which is the most protectedposition in the event of an impact.

Keep children in rearward facing childrestraint systems for as long as possible,until 3–4 years old if possible.

The rear head restraint or the frontpassenger head restraint can be lifted ifneeded to install a child restraint system.The head restraint must always bepresent in the vehicle and fitted if theseat is used by an adult passenger or achild sitting in a restraint system withoutbackrest (refer to the proceduredescribed in ‘’Head restraint’’ paragraph,‘’Knowing your vehicle’’ chapter).

If the front passenger airbag has beendeactivated, always check that thewarning light on the courtesy light is oncontinuously to make sure that it iseffectively deactivated.

Carefully follow the instructionssupplied with the child restraint system.Keep the instructions in the vehicle alongwith the other documents and thishandbook. Do not use second-hand childseats without instructions.

Only one child is to be strapped intoeach restraint system; never carry twochildren using one child restraint system.

Always check that the seat belts donot rest on the child’s neck.

Always check that the seat belt is wellfastened by pulling on it.

While travelling, do not let the child sitincorrectly or unfasten the belts.

Never allow a child to put the belt'sdiagonal section under an arm or behindtheir back.

Never carry children on your lap, evennewborns. No-one can hold a child in thecase of a crash.

In the event of an accident, replace thechild restraint system with a new one.

WARNING

80)SEVERE DANGERWhen a frontpassenger airbag is fitted, do not installrearward facing child restraint systems onthe front passenger seat. Deployment of theairbag in an accident could cause fatalinjuries to the child regardless of theseverity of the collision. It is advisable toalways carry children in a child restraintsystem on the rear seat, which is the mostprotected position in the event of a collision.81)On the sun visor there is a label withsuitable symbols reminding the user that it iscompulsory to deactivate the airbag if arearward facing child restraint system isfitted. Always comply with the instructionson the passenger side sun visor (see the"Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) -Airbag" paragraph).

82)Should it be necessary to carry a child onthe passenger side front seat in a rear facingchild restraint system, the passenger sidefront airbag and side bag must bedeactivated through the Connect systemmain menu (see the SupplementaryRestraint System (SRS) - Airbag"paragraph), verifying deactivation bychecking whether the OFF LED hasilluminated on the front ceiling light. Movethe passenger's seat as far back as possibleto avoid contact between the child seat andthe dashboard.83)Do not move the front or rear seat if achild is seated on it or on the dedicated childrestraint system84) Incorrect fitting of the child restraintsystem may result in an inefficientprotection system. In the event of anaccident the child restraint system maybecome loose and the child may be injured,even fatally.When fitting a restraint systemfor newborns or children, strictly complywith the instructions provided by theManufacturer.85)When the child restraint system is notused, secure it with the seat belt or with theISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from thevehicle. Do not leave it unsecured inside thepassenger compartment. In this way, in thecase of sudden braking or an accident, it willnot cause injuries to the occupants.86)After installing a child restraint system,do not move the seat: always remove thechild restraint system before making anyadjustment.

129

87)Always make sure that the chest sectionof the seat belt does not pass under thearms or behind the back of the child. In theevent of an accident the seat belt will not beable to secure the child, with the risk ofinjury, including fatal injury. Therefore thechild must always wear the seat beltcorrectly.88)Do not use the same lower anchorage toinstall more than one child restraint system.89) If a Universal ISOFIX child seat is notfixed to all three anchorages, the child seatwill not be able to protect the child correctly.In a crash, the child could be seriously orfatally injured.90) Fit the child restraint system when thecar is stationary. The child restraint systemis correctly fixed to the brackets when youhear the click. Follow the instructions forassembly, disassembly and positioning thatthe Manufacturer must supply with the childrestraint system.91) If the vehicle was involved in an accidentof a certain severity, have the ISOFIXanchorages and the child restraint systemreplaced.92) If the vehicle was involved in an accidentof a certain severity, have both the childrestraint system and the seat belt it wasattached to replaced.

SUPPLEMENTARYRESTRAINTSYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG

The vehicle is equipped with:front driver airbag;front passenger airbag;driver and passenger front side bags

for pelvis, chest and shoulder protection(Side bags);

side bags for head protection of frontseat passengers and rear side seatpassengers (window bag).The location of the airbags on the vehicleis marked by the word "AIRBAG" underthe Alfa Romeo emblem on the steeringwheel, on the dashboard, on the side trimor on a label placed next to the airbagdeployment area.

FRONTAIRBAGS

The front (driver and passenger) airbagsprotect the front seat occupants in theevent of head-on crashes of medium-highseverity, by placing the cushion betweenthe occupant and the steering wheel ordashboard.Therefore non-activation of airbags inother types of collisions (side impacts,rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does notindicate a system malfunction.Driver and passenger front airbags arenot a replacement of but complementaryto the seat belts, which should always beworn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non-European countries.In the event of impact, those not wearinga seat belt are projected forwards andmay come into contact with the bagwhich is still inflating. The protectionoffered by the bag is compromised inthese circumstances.Front airbags may not activate in thefollowing situations:

frontal impacts against highlydeformable objects not involving thefront surface of the vehicle (e.g. wingcollision against guard rail, etc.);

vehicle wedging under other vehiclesor protective barriers (e.g. trucks orguard rails).Failure to activate in the conditionsdescribed above is due to the fact thatthey may not provide any additionalprotection compared with seat belts, so

130

SA

FETY

their activation would be inappropriate.In these cases, non-deployment does notindicate a system malfunction.

Front airbag driver's side

This consists of an instantly inflating bagcontained in a special compartment in thecentre of the steering wheel fig. 142.

Passenger side front airbag

This consists of an instantly inflating bagcontained in a special recess in thedashboard fig. 143. This bag has a largervolume than that of the driver's.

Passenger side front airbag and childrestraint systems

Rearward facing child restraint systemsmust NEVER be fitted on the front seatwith an active passenger side airbagsince in the event of an impact the airbagactivation may cause fatal injuries to thetransported child.ALWAYS comply with the instructions onthe label on the passenger side sun visorfig. 144, and shown in table fig. 147.

142 06106V0001EM

143 06106V0002EM

144 06106V0003EM

131

Deactivating/activating the passengerside airbags: front airbag and side bag

(where provided)To deactivate the front and sidepassenger side airbag, use the Connectsystem. Select the following functions insuccession from the main Menu, andactivate them by pressing the MENUfig. 145 button: “Settings", "Safety","Front Passenger Airbag". They can beselected by turning and pressing theRotary Pad. The system informs you ofthe activation/deactivation status of theairbags and asks for confirmation of thestatus change. Press the Rotary Pad ifyou want to proceed.

On the dashboard are the ON and OFFLED status. Moving the ignition device toMAR, the two LEDs switch on for a fewseconds. If not, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership. During the first seconds, theactivation of the LEDs does not actuallyshow the passenger protection status,but only checks its correct operation.After a test of a few seconds, the LEDswill indicate the status of the passengerairbag protection.Passenger protection activated: the ONLED fig. 146 switches on fixed.Passenger protection deactivated: theOFF LED turns on fixed.

145 05036V0040EM

146 06106S0008EM

132

SA

FETY

Passenger side front airbag and child restraint systems: IMPORTANT

147 J0A0215

133

SIDE AIRBAGS

To help increase occupants protection inthe event of side impact collisions, thevehicle is equipped with front side bagsand window bags.

Side bag

These consist of two bags located in thefront seat backrests fig. 148 that protectthe occupants’ pelvis, chest and shoulderarea in the event of a side impact ofmedium/high severity.They are marked by the "AIRBAG" labelsewn on the outer side of the front seats.

Window bag

This consists of a "curtain" bag housedbehind the roof side linings and coveredby special trims fig. 149.They are designed to protect the head offront and rear occupants in the event of aside collision, thanks to the wide cushioninflation surface.

The deployment of side bags in the eventof side impacts of low severity is notrequired.In the event of a side impact, the systemprovides best protection if the passengersits on the seat in a correct position,allowing the window bag to inflatecorrectly.

93) 94) 95) 96) 97) 98) 99) 100) 101) 102) 103) 104) 105)

106)

Important notes

Do not wash the seats with water orpressurised steam (wash by hand or atautomatic seat washing stations).The front and/or side airbags mayactivate in the event of sharp impacts tothe underbody of the vehicle (e.g. impactwith steps, pavements, potholes or roadbumps etc.).When the airbag deploys it emits a smallamount of dust: the dust is harmless anddoes not indicate the beginning of a fire.The dust may irritate the skin and eyes

however: in this case, wash with neutralsoap and water.Airbag checking, repair and replacementmust be carried out at an Alfa RomeoDealership.If the car is scrapped, have the airbagsystem deactivated at an Alfa RomeoDealership.Pretensioners and airbags are deployedin different ways on the basis of the typeof collision. Failure to activate one ormore of the devices does not indicate asystem malfunction.

WARNING

93)Do not apply stickers or other objects onthe steering wheel, on the dashboard in thepassenger side airbag area, on sideupholstery on the roof or on the seats. Neverput objects (e.g. mobile phones) on thepassenger side of the dashboard since theycould interfere with correct inflation of thepassenger airbag and also cause seriousinjury to the passengers.94)Always drive with your hands on the rimof the steering wheel so that the airbag caninflate freely if required. Do not drive withyour body bent forward. Keep your backstraight against the backrest.95) The passenger airbag can bedeactivated on the Connect system byselecting the following functions in sequenceon the main menu: “Settings”; “Safety”;“Passenger airbag” and “Deactivation”.96)Do not affix rigid objects to the garmenthooks or support handles.

148 06106V0004EM

149 06106V0005EM

134

SA

FETY

97)Do not rest your head, arms or elbows onthe door, windows or the area in which theWindow bag is located to avoid possibleinjury during airbag inflation.98)Never lean your head, arms or elbowsout of the window.99) If, when the ignition device is turned toON, the warning light does not switch onor stays on whilst driving, a fault may haveoccurred in the restraint systems. In thiscase the airbags or pretensioners may notbe deployed in an impact or, in a lowernumber of cases, they may be deployedaccidentally. Before continuing, contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership immediately to havethe system checked.100) In case of a LED OFF failure(located on the front courtesy light), the

warning light appears on the instrumentpanel.101)On cars with side bags, do not coverthe front seat backrests with extra covers.102)Do not travel carrying objects in yourlap, in front of your chest or between yourlips (pipe, pencils, etc.): they could causesevere injury if the airbag is deployed.103) If the car has been subject to theft,attempted theft, vandalism, or flooding,have the airbag system inspected at an AlfaRomeo Dealership.104)Malfunction of the airbag failurewarning light is indicated by the activationof an airbag failure icon and a dedicatedmessage on the instrument panel display.The pyrotechnic charges are not disabled.Before continuing, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership immediately to have the systemchecked.

105) The airbag deployment threshold ishigher than that of the pretensioners. Forcollisions in the range between the twothresholds, it is normal for only thepretensioners to be activated.106) The airbag does not replace seat beltsbut increases their efficiency. Because frontairbags are not deployed for low-speedcrashes, side collisions, rear-end shunts orrollovers, occupants are protected, inaddition to any side bags, only by their seatbelts, which must therefore always befastened.

135

This page is intentionally left blank

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle: seeing how you can exploit allof its potential to the full. We’ll look at how to drive it safely in any

situation, so that it can be a welcome companion, with our comfortand our wallets in mind.

STARTINGANDDRIVINGSTARTING THE ENGINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138PARKING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142"ALFA DNA™" SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149START & STOP EVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150SPEED LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155PARK SENSORS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES . . . . . . . . . . .169REFUELLING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173TOWING TRAILERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

STARTINGTHE ENGINE

STARTINGTHE ENGINE

Before starting the engine, adjust theseat, the interior rear view mirrors, thedoor mirrors and fasten the seat beltcorrectly.Never press the accelerator pedal forstarting the engine.If necessary, messages indicating thestarting procedure can be shown on thedisplay.

PROCEDURE FORPETROLVERSIONS

107) 108) 109)

30) 31) 33)

Proceed as follows:engage the electric parking brake and

set the gear lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral);

fully depress the brake pedal withouttouching the accelerator;

briefly press the ignition button;if the engine doesn't start within a few

seconds, you need to repeat theprocedure.If the problem persists, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.

PROCEDURE FORDIESELVERSIONS

32)

Proceed as follows:engage the parking brake and set the

gear lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral);

fully depress the brake pedal withouttouching the accelerator;

briefly press the ignition button;if the engine doesn't start within a few

seconds, you need to repeat theprocedure.If the problem persists, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.

STARTINGAFTERA LONG INACTIVITY

If the vehicle has not been started nordriven for at least 35 days, it is advisableto follow the indications below.To start the engine, proceed as follows:

briefly press the ignition button;if the engine does not start, wait

5 seconds and let the starter cool downand then repeat the starting procedure;

if the engine does not start after8 attempts, let the starter cool down forat least 10 seconds and then repeat thestarting procedure.If the problem persists, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT After prolonged vehicleinactivity, very difficult starting, that canbe noticed through rapid fatigue of thestarter, might also be due to a partiallyflat battery. In this case, see the"Emergency starting" paragraph in the "Inan emergency" chapter.

ENGINE STARTING FAILURE

Important notes

Do not try to start the engine pouring fuelor other flammable fluid inside thethrottle body air intake: this mightdamage the engine and injury peoplenearby.Do not try to start the engine by towingor pushing the vehicle. This manoeuvrecould let unburnt fuel enter the catalyticconverter. When the engine is started,this would ignite, causing catalyticconverter overheating and damage.If the battery is flat, you can jump startthe vehicle by connecting the batterywith an auxiliary one or with one onanother vehicle using suitable cables.This manoeuvre can anyway bedangerous when not performed correctly.See the indications in the "Emergencystarting" paragraph in the "In anemergency" chapter.

Starting the engine with electronic keybattery (Keyless Start) run down or flat

If the ignition device does not respondwhen the relevant button is pressed theelectronic key battery might be run downor flat. Therefore, the system does notdetect the presence of the electronic keyon board the vehicle and displays adedicated message.In this case, follow the instructions inparagraph "Starting with flat key battery"in the "Knowing your vehicle" chapter andstart the engine normally.

138

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

WARMINGUPTHE ENGINEAFTER ITHAS JUSTSTARTED

Proceed as follows:drive off slowly, letting the engine

turn at medium revs. Do not accelerateabruptly;

do not demand full performance atfirst. It is advisable to wait until thedigital engine coolant temperatureindicator starts moving.

STOPPINGTHE ENGINE

33)

To stop the engine, proceed as follows:park the vehicle in a position that is not

dangerous for oncoming traffic;engage P (Park) mode;with engine idling, press the start

button.

IMPORTANT Do not leave the ignitiondevice in the ON position when the engineis off.

Vehicles with electronic key (KeylessStart)

If the vehicle speed is above 8km/h, it isstill possible to stop the engine if a gearoperating mode other than P (Park) isselected. To switch off the engine in thissituation, hold down the ignition devicebutton for a while or press it 3 times in arow within a few seconds.With the Keyless Start system, it ispossible to go away from the vehicletaking the electronic key with you,

without the engine switching off. Thevehicle will inform about the absence ofthe key on board, only if the doors areclosed.Stopping the engine (switching from theON to the STOP position) the accessoriesare still powered for about 3 minutes.When the driver side door is opened withinstrument panel on, a brief acousticsignal will be emitted to remind the driverto stop the engine. The display will show adedicated message.When the starting device is at STOP, theelectric windows can still be operated forabout 3 minutes. Opening one of thefront doors cancels this function.After a demanding drive, before turningthe engine off you should allow it to idleto allow the temperature in the enginecompartment to decrease.

TURBOVERSION COOLING

Before switching the engine off, keep itidling for a few minutes so that theturbocharger can be suitably lubricated.This procedure is particularlyrecommended after a demanding drive.After a full load operation, or anywayafter heavy power demands, keep theengine idling for 3 to 5 minutes beforeswitching it off.This time allows the lubricating oil andthe engine coolant to eliminate theexcessive heat from combustionchamber, bearings, inner components andturbocharger.

WARNING

107) It is dangerous to run the engine inenclosed areas. The engine takes in oxygenand releases carbon dioxide, carbonmonoxide and other toxic gases.108) The electro-hydraulic braking systemis not active until the engine starts running.So, the brake pedal travel will be longer thannormal. This does not indicate a fault.109)Do not start the engine by pushing,towing or driving downhill. Thesemanoeuvres may damage the catalyticconverter.

IMPORTANT

30)We recommend that during the initialperiod, or during the first 1600 km(1000 miles), you do not drive to full carperformance (e.g. excessive acceleration,long journeys at top speed, sharp braking,etc.).31)When the engine stopped never leavethe ignition device in the ON position toprevent useless current draw from drainingthe battery.32)Warning light will flash after startingor during prolonged cranking to indicate afault with the glow plug heating system. Ifthe engine starts, the vehicle can be regularlyused, but an Alfa Romeo Dealership must becontacted as soon as possible.33)A quick burst on the accelerator beforeturning off the engine serves absolutely nopractical purpose; it wastes fuel and isdamaging for the engine.

139

PARKINGTHEVEHICLE110) 111) 112)

IMPORTANT In addition to parking thevehicle with the parking brake alwaysengaged, the wheels turned, chocks orstones positioned in front of the wheels(when on a steep slope), you must always:

engage P (Park) mode;always take the key with you when

leaving the vehicle.

IMPORTANT Always engage the electricparking brake before leaving the vehicle.

ELECTRIC PARKINGBRAKE

The car is equipped with electric parkingbrake to guarantee better use andoptimal performance compared to amanually operated parking brake.The electric parking brake features aswitch, located on the central tunnelfig. 150, a motor with caliper for eachrear wheel and an electronic controlmodule.

The electric parking brake can beengaged in two ways:

manually, by pulling the switch on thecentral tunnel;

automatically in "Safe Hold" or "AutoPark Brake" conditions.

IMPORTANT Normally, the electricparking brake is engaged automaticallywhen the engine is stopped. This functioncan be deactivated/activated on theConnect system by selecting thefollowing items in sequence on the mainmenu: "Settings", "Driver assistance" and"Automatic parking brake".

IMPORTANT Should the vehicle batterybe faulty, to unlock the electric parkingbrake the battery must be replaced.

Engaging the parking brake manually

Briefly pull the switch located on thecentral tunnel to manually engage theelectric parking brake when the car isstationary.Noise may be heard from the rear part ofthe car when engaging the electricparking brake.A slight movement of the brake pedalmay be detected when engaging theelectric parking brake with the brakepedal pressed.With the electric parking brake engaged,the warning light on the instrumentpanel and the LED on the switchfig. 150 turn on.

IMPORTANT With the Electronic ParkingBrake failure warning light on, somefunctions of the electric parking brakeare deactivated. In this case the driver isresponsible for brake activation andvehicle parking in complete safetyconditions.If, under exceptional circumstances, theuse of the brake is required with thevehicle in motion, keep the switch on thecentral tunnel pulled as long as the brakeaction is necessary.The warning light may switch on withthe hydraulic system temporarilyunavailable; in this case braking iscontrolled by the motors.The brake lights (stop) will alsoautomatically switch on in the same wayas for normal braking with the use of thebrake pedal.Release the switch on the central tunnelto stop the braking action with the car inmotion.If, through this procedure, the vehicle isbraked until a speed below 2 mph(3 km/h) is reached and the switch is keptpulled, the parking brake will definitivelyengage.

IMPORTANT Driving the vehicle with theelectric parking brake engaged, or usingit several times to slow down the vehicle,may cause severe damage to the brakingsystem.

150 07046V0001EM

140

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

Releasing the electric parking brakemanually

In order to manually release the parkingbrake, the ignition device should be at ONposition. Moreover, you need to press thebrake pedal, then press the switch on thecentral tunnel briefly.Noise may be heard from the rear of thevehicle and a slight movement of thebrake pedal may be detected duringdisengagement.After disengaging the electric parkingbrake, the warning light on theinstrument panel and the LED on thefig. 150 switch turn off.If the warning light on the instrumentpanel remains on with the electric parkingbrake disengaged, this indicates a fault:in this case contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.

IMPORTANT Never use gear position P(Park) instead of the electric parkingbrake. Always engage the electric parkingbrake when parking the vehicle toprevent injury or damage caused by theunexpected movement of the vehicle.

OPERATINGTHE ELECTRIC PARKINGBRAKE

The electric parking brake can operate inthe following ways:

"Dynamic driving way": this way isactivated by pulling the switchcontinuously while driving;

"Static engagement and releasemode": with the car stationary, theelectric parking brake can be activatedby pulling the switch on the central tunnelonce. To deactivate the brake, press theswitch and the brake pedal at the sametime;

"Drive Away Release": (whereprovided) the electric parking brake willautomatically disengage with the driverside seat belt fastened and the detectionof an action performed by the driver tomove the car (forward gear or reversegear);

"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed islower than 2 mph (3 km/h), the gear leveris not in P (Park) position and the driver'sintention of leaving the vehicle isdetected, the electric parking brake willautomatically engage to hold the vehiclein safety conditions;

"Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speedis below 2 mph (3 km/h), the electricparking break will automatically engagewhen the gear lever is in P (Park) position.When the parking brake is engaged andapplied to the wheels, the LED on theswitch located on the central tunnelfig. 150 switches on together with thewarning light on the instrumentpanel. Each automatic parking brakeengagement can be cancelled by pressing

the switch on the central tunnel and atthe same time moving the gear lever forthe transmission to position P (Park).

SAFEHOLD

It is a safety function that automaticallyengages the electric parking brake in theevent of a dangerous condition for thecar.If:

the car speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h);a transmission mode other than P

(Park) is activated;the driver's seat belt is not fastened;the driver side door is open;no attempts to apply pressure on the

brake pedal have been detected.the electric parking brake engagesautomatically to prevent vehiclemovement.The Safe Hold function can betemporarily disabled by pressing theswitch located on the central tunnel andthe brake pedal at the same time, withthe vehicle stationary and the driver sidedoor open.Once disabled, the function will activateagain when the vehicle speed reaches12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition device ismoved to STOP and then to ON.

141

WARNING

110) In the case of parking manoeuvres onroads on a gradient, the front wheels mustbe steered towards the pavement (whenparking downhill), or in the oppositedirection if the vehicle is parked uphill. Blockthe wheels with a wedge or a stone if the caris parked on a steep slope.111)Never leave children alone in anunattended vehicle; make sure that whenyou move away from the vehicle, you havethe key with you.112) The electric parking brake mustalways be engaged when leaving the vehicle.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

The vehicle is equipped with anelectronically controlled 8-speedautomatic transmission, whichautomatically changes gear according tothe vehicle's instantaneous usageparameters (vehicle speed, road gradientand accelerator pedal position).The new transmission is an absoluteinnovation as it can match the Start &Stop Evo system with the traditionalautomatic transmissions with built-intorque converter.It is still possible to change gear manuallythanks to the "sequential mode" positionfor the gear lever.

DISPLAY

The following information is shown on thededicated area of the display fig. 151:

in automatic mode: the active mode (P,R, N, D). In D (Drive) mode, when changinggear using the steering wheel lever(where present), it also shows the gearengaged with a number;

in manual drive mode (sequential):the mode (M), the current gear and thegear shift request, both up and down(arrow).

GEAR LEVER

Gearbox operation is controlled by theshift lever 1 fig. 152, which can have thefollowing operating positions:

P = ParkR = ReverseN = NeutralD = Drive, (automatic forward speed)AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in

sequential driving mode; – shifting tolower gear in sequential driving mode.The operating mode diagram isillustrated on the top of the lever.

151 07076S0001EM

142

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

The letter corresponding to the selectedmode lights up and can be seen on theinstrument panel display.To select one of the operating modes,move the lever forwards or backwardsand press the brake pedal at the sametime.To engage R (Reverse) mode, press thebrake pedal and the button 3fig. 153 together.To pass from P (Park) mode directly to D(Drive) mode, in addition to pressing thebrake pedal, it is also necessary to pressbutton 3.To pass from R (Reverse) mode directlyto D (Drive) mode and vice versa, inaddition to pressing the brake pedal, it isnecessary to press button 3.

The lever functions like a joystick, soreleasing it after giving the command, itautomatically returns to the centreposition.The P (Parking) mode can be enabledpressing the P (Parking) 2 button fig. 152.If using the gear shift in "sequential"mode. you can activate it by moving thelever from D (Drive) to the left and thenforward towards the - symbol or backtowards the + symbol and the gear isshifted.To exit P (Park) mode, or to pass fromposition N (Neutral) to position D (Drive)or R (Reverse) when the car is stopped oris moving at a low speed, the brake pedalmust also be pressed.

IMPORTANT DO NOT accelerate whileshifting from position P (or N) to anotherposition.

IMPORTANT After selecting a gear, waita few seconds before accelerating. Thisprecaution is particularly important witha cold engine.

TRANSMISSIONOPERATINGMODES

Park (P)

113) 114)

34)

The transmission is locked in this mode.The engine can be started in this mode.

IMPORTANT Never try to engage the P(Park) mode when the car is moving.Before leaving the car, make sure thismode is engaged (letter P shown on thedisplay) and that the parking brake isengaged.When parking on a flat surface, firstengage the P mode and then engage theparking brake.Parking uphill, before activating the Pmode, engage the parking brake,otherwise it could be difficult to engagethe P mode.To check that the P (Park) mode isactually engaged, make sure P isilluminated on the display.It is not possible to select N (Neutral)mode from P (Park) mode.

152 07076V0002EM 153 07076V0005EM

143

Automatic activation of P (Park) mode

P (Park) mode is automatically activatedif the following conditions are metsimultaneously:

D (Drive) or R (Reverse) operatingmode is active;

the car’s speed is close to 0;the brake pedal is released;the driver’s seat belt is not fastened;the driver’s door is open.

Reverse (R)

Select this mode only with the car at astandstill.

35)

Neutral (N)

115)

It corresponds to neutral for a manualtransmission. The engine can be startedwith the N mode (neutral) selected.Engage the N mode in the case ofprolonged stops with engine running.Also engage the electric parking brake.

Drive (D) - Automatic forward gear

Use this mode in normal drivingconditions.Passage from D to P (Park) or R (Reverse)modes must take place only afterreleasing the accelerator pedal, with carat a standstill and brake pedal pressed.This mode ensures automaticengagement of the most suitable gearsfor driving needs and maximum fueleconomy in terms of fuel consumption.

In this position, the transmission shiftsthe gears automatically, selecting themost suitable for forward driving amongthose available as you go. In this way thevehicle's optimal driving characteristicsare guaranteed in all the classic usageconditions.

AutoStick - Manual (sequential)shifting mode

In the case of frequent gearshifting (e.g.for sport driving, when the vehicle isdriven with a heavy load, on slopes, withstrong headwind or when towing heavytrailers), it is recommended to use theAutostick (sequential shifting) mode toselect and keep a lower fixed ratio.In these conditions, the use of a lowergear improves car performance,preventing overheating.It is possible to shift from D mode (Drive)to sequential mode regardless of carspeed.

Activation

Starting from D (Drive) mode, to activatethe sequential drive mode, move thelever to the left (– and + indication of thetrim). The gear engaged will be shown onthe display.Gearshifting is made by moving the gearlever forwards, towards symbol – orbackwards, towards symbol +.

Steering wheel stalks

(where provided)The gear can also be manually shifted by

using the levers behind the steeringwheel. Pull the right shift lever (+)towards the steering wheel and release itto engage a higher gear; perform thesame operation with the left lever (-) toengage a lower gear fig. 154.To engage N (Neutral): pullsimultaneously both levers.To activate D (Drive) mode, from N(Neutral), P (Parking) and R (Reverse):push the brake pedal and the right lever(+).

IMPORTANT If only one manual shift isnecessary, the letter D will remain on thedisplay with the engaged gear next to it.

Deactivation

To deactivate the sequential drivingmode, bring the gear lever back inposition D (Drive) ("automatic" drivingmode).

154 07076V0006EM

144

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

Important notesDo not downshift on slippery surfaces:

the drive wheels might lose grip withfollowing risk for the car to slip. Thiscould cause accidents or personalinjuries.

To select the correct gear formaximum deceleration (engine brake),just keep the gear lever pressedforwards (–): the transmission goes to anoperating mode in which the vehicle canslow down easily.

The car will keep the gear selected bythe driver until the safety conditionsallow it.

This means, for example, that thesystem will try to prevent the enginefrom switching off, automaticallydownshifting if the engine speed is toolow.

TRANSMISSION EMERGENCYFUNCTION(where provided)Transmission operation is constantlymonitored to detect any fault. If acondition that might damage thetransmission is detected, the"transmission emergency" function isactivated.In this condition, the transmission staysin 4 th gear, regardless of the selectedgear. The P (Parking), R (Reverse) and N(Neutral) modes continue to work.

The symbol might light up in thedisplay.In the event of a "transmissionemergency" immediately contact thenearest Alfa Romeo Dealership.

Temporary failure

If the warning light turns on, the failuremay be temporary, in which case, proceedas follows to restore correcttransmission operation:

stop the vehicle;engage P (Park) mode;bring the ignition device to STOP;wait for about 10 seconds, then

restart the engine;select the desired gear: if the problem

is not detected anymore thetransmission correct operation isrestored.

IMPORTANT In the event of a temporaryfailure it is in any case recommended tocontact an Alfa Romeo Dealership assoon as possible.

GEAR ENGAGEMENTDISABLINGSYSTEMWITHOUTBRAKEPEDALPRESSED

This system prevents you from movingthe gear lever from position P (Park) ifthe brake pedal has not been previouslydepressed.To bring the gear lever to a position otherthan P (Park), the ignition device must bein position AVV (engine on or off) and thebrake pedal must be pressed.

PARK ENGAGEMENT DISABLING WHENENGINE IS STOPPED

Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing thevehicle, conveyor vehicle washingsystems) inhibit the automatic activationof P mode (Park) when stopping theengine, or proceed as described below:

car at a standstill;N (neutral) mode activated;press the ignition button for at least

3 seconds.The automatic parking brakeengagement function when the engine isstopped can also be deactivated on theConnect system by selecting thefollowing functions on the main menu:"Settings", "Driver assistance" and"Automatic parking brake".

IMPORTANTNOTES

Failure to comply with what is reportedbelow may damage the transmission:

select P mode (Park) only with thevehicle at a standstill;

select R mode (Reverse), or pass fromR to another mode only with the vehicleat a standstill and engine idling;

do not change between P (Park), R(Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) modeswith engine running at a speed aboveidling;

before activating any transmissionoperating mode, fully depress the brakepedal.

145

IMPORTANT The unexpected movementof the vehicle can injure the occupants orpeople nearby. Do not leave the vehiclewith engine running: before getting out ofthe passenger compartment alwaysengage the electric parking brake, selectthe P mode (Park), stop the engine.With the ignition device in the STOPposition, the transmission is blocked inthe P position (Park), to preventaccidental vehicle movement; on versionsequipped with Keyless Start, do not leavethe electronic key near the vehicle (or in aplace accessible to children) and do notleave the ignition device activated.A child could activate the electric windowwinders, other controls or even start theengine; it is dangerous to select a modeother than P (Park) or N (Neutral) at anengine speed higher than idling.If the brake pedal is not fully depressedthe vehicle could rapidly accelerate.Only engage the gear with engine atidling, fully depressing the brake pedal; ifthe transmission temperature exceedsthe normal operating limits, thetransmission control unit may change thegear engagement order and reduce thedrive torque; if the transmissionoverheats the display shows the

symbol. In this case the transmissioncould operate incorrectly until it coolsdown; when using the vehicle withextremely low external temperatures,the transmission operation may changedepending on the engine and

transmission temperature, as well asvehicle speed; activation of the torqueconverter clutch and of the 7 th or 8 th

gear is inhibited until the transmission oilis correctly warmed up. Completeoperation of the transmission will beenabled as soon as the fluid temperaturereaches the predefined value.

WARNING

113)Never use position P (Park) instead ofthe electric parking brake. Always engagethe electric parking brake when parking thevehicle to avoid the accidental movement ofthe vehicle.114) If the P (Park) position is not engaged,the vehicle could move and injure people.Before leaving the vehicle, make sure thatthe gear lever is in position P and that theelectric parking brake is engaged.115)Do not shift the gear lever to N(Neutral) and do not stop the engine whendriving on a downhill road. This type ofdriving is dangerous and reduces thepossibility of intervening in the case ofvariation of the road traffic or surface. Yourisk losing control of your vehicle andcausing accidents.

IMPORTANT

34)Before selecting P (Park) mode, bring theignition device to position ON and press thebrake pedal. Otherwise, the gear lever mayget damaged.35) Engage reverse only with the carstationary, engine at idling speed andaccelerator fully released.

146

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

"ALFADNA™" SYSTEM

"ALFADNA™" SYSTEM

By operating the selector (on the centraltunnel) fig. 155, this device allows you toselect different car response modesaccording to your driving style and theroad conditions:

d = Dynamic (sports driving mode)n = Normal (mode for driving in normal

conditions)a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving

mode for maximum fuel savings).On the instrument panel display, thedifferent modes are characterised bydifferent colours:

Normal - Blue,Dynamic - RedAdvanced Efficiency - Green

The different driving modes aregraphically different from the colour ofthe frames and the contents only on the"performance" screens.

DRIVINGMODES

"Normal" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "n", the displays light up in blue,fig. 157.

Engine and transmission/transmission:standard response.The "Performance" screen graphicallyreproduces some parameters closelylinked to the efficiency of the drivingstyle, with a view to limiting consumption,fig. 158.

Turning off

To deactivate the Normal mode, movethe selector to another mode ("d" or "a").

"Dynamic" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "d", the displays light up in red,fig. 159.

155 07076V0004EM

156 07076S0003EM

157 07116S0002EM

158 07116S0001EM

147

ESC and ASR systems: interventionthresholds that ensure more enjoyable,sportier driving whilst guaranteeing thestability of the car."Electronic Q2" system: the system iscalibrated to increase traction whilstaccelerating on bends, improving theagility of the car.Engine and gearbox/transmission:adoption of sports mapping.IMPORTANT In "Dynamic", the sensitivityof the accelerator pedal increasesconsiderably. Consequently, driving isless fluid and comfortable.The "Performance" screen displaysparameters related to car stability, thegraphs illustrate the trend of thelongitudinal/lateral accelerations(G-meter information), consideringgravity acceleration as a reference unit.Lateral acceleration peaks are displayedon the right, fig. 160.

Turning off

To deactivate the Dynamic mode, movethe selector to "n", Normal mode.

"Advanced Efficiency" Mode

Activation

It is activated by rotating the selector tothe letter "a", the displays light up ingreen, fig. 161.

ESC and ASR systems: interventionthresholds aimed at ensuring maximumsafety in low-grip driving conditions. It isadvisable to select "Advanced Efficiency"mode in the presence of low-grip roadsurfaces."ELECTRONIC Q2" SYSTEM: the systemis deactivated.Reduced engine performance.ECO shifting strategy for the automatictransmission.The "Performance" screen graphicallydisplays some parameters closelyrelated to the car consumption, fig. 162.

159 07116S0003EM 160 07116S0006EM

161 07116S0005EM

148

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

Turning off

To deactivate the Advanced Efficiencymode, move the selector to "n", Normalmode.IMPORTANT NOTES

When the engine is next started, the"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and"Normal" mode selected previously isretained. The system will reactivate in"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or"Normal" mode, depending on whichmode was selected before the enginewas stopped.

It is not possible to go directly from"Dynamic" mode to "AdvancedEfficiency" mode and vice versa. Youmust always activate the “Normal” modefirst and then select the other mode.

ALFAACTIVE SUSPENSION(AAS)

(where provided)The vehicle's electronic suspensionsmanagement system is the result of asophisticated elaboration of the variousboard sensors, aimed at optimizing thevehicle's performance.The system continuously monitors thedamping of the suspensions through theactuator installed on each shockabsorber. In this way, the shockabsorbers can be adjusted to theconditions of the road surface and to thedynamic conditions of the vehicle,improving its comfort and road holding.The driver can choose, even while driving,(only in "d" mode), between two types ofsuspension calibration: a more sporty or amore comfortable one.By pressing the button, the systemprepares to work with a shock absorbercalibration which favours drivingcomfort.

In the case of a system failure, thefollowing symbol appears on theinstrument panel display .

162 07116S0008EM 163 04306V0001EM

149

START&STOP EVO

The Stop/Start Evo automatically stopsthe engine each time the vehicle isstationary and starts it again when thedriver wants to move off.In this way, the vehicle efficiency isincreased, by reducing consumption,dangerous gas emissions and soundpollution.

IMPORTANT When the Start & Stop Evostops the engine, the power steering isalso disabled.

OPERATINGMODE

Stopping the engine

With car at a standstill and brake pedalpressed, the engine switches off if thegear lever is in a position other than R.The system does not operate when thegear lever is in R, for making parkingmanoeuvres easier.In the event of stops uphill, engineswitching off is disabled to make the "HillStart Assist" function available (worksonly with running engine).NOTE The engine can only beautomatically stopped after having run atabout 6.2 mph (10 km/h). After anautomatic restart, to stop the engine youonly need to move the car (exceed aspeed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h).Engine stopping is signalled by the

symbol lighting up on the instrumentpanel display.

Restarting the engine

To restart the engine, release the brakepedal.With the brake pressed and thetransmission in automatic mode D(Drive), the engine will restart by shiftingto R (Reverse), for petrol engine versionsonly, to "AutoStick".With brake pressed, also for versionswith petrol engines, if the gear lever is in"AutoStick" mode, the engine can berestarted by moving the lever to + or -.

SYSTEMMANUALACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

To manually activate/deactivate thesystem, press the button inserted in thecontrol panel on the left of the steeringwheel fig. 164.

System activation

The activation of the system is indicatedby the symbol lighting up on thedisplay. In this condition, the LED on thefig. 164 button is off.

System deactivation

A message will appear on the displaywhen the system is deactivated. In thiscondition, the LED on the fig. 164 buttonis on.

IMPORTANT Each time the engine isstarted, the system is activatedregardless of where was when it waspreviously switched off.

MISSED ENGINE STOPPINGCONDITIONS

36)

When the system is active, for a highercomfort and safety, and to reduceemissions, the engine does not stop insome conditions, such as:

engine still cold;especially cold outside temperature;battery not sufficiently charged;particulate filter (DPF) regeneration in

progress (Diesel engines only);driver's door not shut;driver's seat belt not fastened;reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking

manoeuvres);

164 07126V0001EM

150

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

with the automatic climate controlactive, if an adequate level of thermalcomfort has not been reached or withMAX-DEF function active;

during the first period of use, toinitialize the system;

a half turn of the steering wheel or tothe right or left with respect to thewheels in a straight position.

ENGINE RESTARTING CONDITIONS

Due to comfort, emission control andsafety reasons, the engine can restartautomatically without any action by thedriver, under special conditions, such as:

battery not sufficiently charged;reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. if

the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly);vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on

roads with a gradient);engine stopping by the Start & Stop

Evo system for more than 3 approx.minutes;

with the automatic climate controlsystem activated, for adjusting thethermal comfort level or after MAX-DEFfunction activation;

SAFETYFUNCTIONS

When the engine is stopped through theStart & Stop Evo system, if the driverreleases their seat belt, opens thedriver's or passenger's door or releasesthe engine bonnet from inside the vehicle,

the engine can be restarted only by usingthe ignition device.This condition is indicated to the driverboth through a buzzer and a message onthe display.

"ENERGYSAVING" FUNCTION

If, following the automatic enginerestarting, the driver does not carry outany action for more than 3 minutes, theStart & Stop Evo system stops theengine definitely, to prevent fuelconsumption.In these cases, the engine can only berestarted using the ignition device.NOTE In any case, it is possible to keepthe engine running by deactivating thesystem.

IRREGULAROPERATION

In the event of malfunction, the Start &Stop Evo system is deactivated.For failure indications, see the "Warninglights and messages" paragraph,"Knowing the instrument panel" chapter.

VEHICLE INACTIVITY

116)

In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if thebattery is replaced), special attentionmust be paid to the disconnection of thebattery power supply.Proceed as follows:Remove connector 3 fig. 165 fromsocket 1 to disconnect sensor 2 (batterystatus monitoring) installed on the

negative pole of the battery. This sensorshould never be disconnected from thepole except if the battery is replaced.

IMPORTANT After setting the ignitiondevice to STOP and having closed thedriver side door, wait at least 1 minutebefore disconnecting the electricalsupply from the battery. Whenreconnecting the electrical supply to thebattery, make sure that the ignitiondevice is in the STOP position and thedriver side door is closed.

WARNING

116)When replacing the battery, alwayscontact an Alfa Romeo Dealership. Replacethe battery with one of the same type(HEAVYDUTY) and with the samespecifications.

165 07126V0002EM

151

IMPORTANT

36) If the climate comfort is to be favoured,the Start&Stop system can be deactivated,for a continuous operation of the climatecontrol system.

SPEED LIMITER

DESCRIPTION

This device allows the speed of the car tobe limited to values which can be set bythe driver.The maximum speed can be set both withvehicle stationary and in motion. Theminimum speed that can be set is 20 mph(30 km(h).When the device is active, the car speeddepends on the pressure at theaccelerator pedal, until the programmedspeed limit is reached (see "Speed limitprogramming" paragraph).

ACTIVATINGTHEDEVICE

The function can be activated/deactivated on the Connect system.Activating the device

To access the function, on the main menuselect the following items in sequence:"Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and“on”.The activation of the device is signalledby the displaying of the green symbolalong with the last speed set fig. 166. TheSpeed Limiter function can remain activeconcurrently with the Cruise Controlsystem. If a speed limit below the oneindicated in the Cruise Control isselected, the Cruise Control speed will belowered to that of the Speed Limiter.

SPEED LIMITPROGRAMMING

The speed limit can be programmed onthe Connect system.To access the function, on the main menuselect the following items in sequence:"Settings", "Safety" and "Speed LimiterSet Speed".By turning the Rotary Pad, the speedincreases by 5 mph (5 km/h), on rotation,from a minimum of 20 mph (30 km/h) to amaximum of 110 mph (80 km/h).

EXCEEDINGTHE PROGRAMMEDSPEED

By fully depressing the accelerator pedal,the programmed speed can be exceededeven with the device active (e.g. in theevent of overtaking).The device is disabled until the speeddrops below the set limit, after which itreactivates automatically.

166 07136S0001EM

152

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

PROGRAMMEDSPEED ICON FLASHING

The programmed speed flashes in thefollowing cases:

when the accelerator pedal has beenfully depressed and the vehicle hasexceeded the programmed speed;

activating the system after setting alimit below the effective speed of thevehicle;

in the event of sharp acceleration.

DEACTIVATINGTHEDEVICE

The function can be activated/deactivated on the Connect system.Deactivating the device

To access the function, on the main menuselect the following items in sequence:"Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and“off”.

Automatic deactivation of the device

The device deactivates automatically inthe event of fault in the system. In thiscase, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

Temporary signal loss

When the devices loses the signal, thewhite symbol without the speedindication lights up on the display.

System failure

When the system is in failure, the ambersymbol lights up on the display.

CRUISE CONTROL

This is an electronically controlled drivingassistance device that allows the desiredcar speed to be maintained, withouthaving to press the accelerator pedal.This device can be used at a speed above25 mph (40 km/h) on long stretches ofdry, straight roads with few variations(e.g. motorways).It is therefore not recommended to usethis device on extra-urban roads withtraffic. Do not use the device in town.The Cruise Control buttons are locatedon the right side of the steering wheel.To ensure correct operation, the CruiseControl is designed to deactivate if morethan one function is operatedsimultaneously. In this case the systemcan be reactivated pressing button

and setting the desired speed.Travelling downhill, the system couldbrake the car to keep the set speedunvaried.

ACTIVATINGTHEDEVICE

117) 118) 119)

To activate the device press buttonfig. 167.The activation of the device is signalledby the switching on of the white warninglight on the display.The Cruise Control function can remainactive concurrently with the SpeedLimiter system. If a speed limit below theone indicated in the Cruise Control is

selected, the Cruise Control speed will belowered to that of the Speed Limiter.

The device cannot be engaged in 1 st orreverse gear: it is advisable to engage itin 3 rd gear or higher.

IMPORTANT It is dangerous to leave thedevice on when it is not used. There is arisk of inadvertently activating it andlosing control of the vehicle due tounexpected excessive speed.

SETTINGTHEDESIRED SPEED

Proceed as follows:operate the device (see the previous

instructions);when the vehicle has reached the

desired speed, raise/lower the SETswitch and release fig. 168 to activatethe device. When the accelerator isreleased, the vehicle will keep theselected speed automatically.If needed (when overtaking for instance),

167 07146V0001EM

153

you can accelerate simply by pressing theaccelerator; when you release the pedal,the vehicle goes back to the speed storedpreviously.When travelling downhills with the deviceactive, the vehicle speed may slightlyexceed the stored one.

IMPORTANT Before raising/lowering theSET switch the vehicle must be travellingat a constant speed on a flat surface.

INCREASING/DECREASING SPEED

Increasing speed

Once the Cruise Control has beenactivated, the speed can be increased bylifting the SET switch.Keeping the button pressed, the setspeed will increase until the button isreleased, then the new speed will bestored.At every movement of the SET switch theset speed is fine-adjusted.

Decreasing speed

When the device is active, to reduce thespeed, lower the SET switch.Keeping the button pressed, the setspeed will decrease until the button isreleased, then the new speed will bestored.At every movement of the SET switch theset speed is fine-adjusted instead.

IMPORTANT Moving the SET switchallows to adjust the speed according tothe selected unit of measurement("metric" or "imperial") set on the Connectsystem (see dedicated supplement).

Accelerating when overtaking

Depress the accelerator pedal: when thisis released the vehicle will gradually goback to the stored speed.

Use of the device on hilly routes

In versions equipped with automatictransmission, the device canautonomously downshift to keep the setspeed when driving on hilly routes.On steep gradients, the loss or gain inspeed may be considerable and it istherefore preferable to deactivate thedevice.

IMPORTANT The device keeps the speedstored even uphill and downhill. A slightvariation in the speed on slight rises iscompletely normal.

RECALLINGTHE SPEED

For versions with automatic transmissionoperating in D mode (Drive - automatic),press and release the RESfig. 169 button to recall the previouslyset speed.With an automatic transmission inAutostick (sequential) mode, beforerecalling the previously set speed youshould accelerate to get close to it, thenpress and release the RES button.

DEACTIVATINGTHEDEVICE

Lightly pressing the brake pedaldeactivates the Cruise Control withoutdeleting the stored speed.The Cruise Control may be deactivatedalso by applying the electric parkingbrake or when the braking system isoperated (e.g. operation of the ESCsystem).

168 07146V0002EM

169 07146V0003EM

154

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

The stored speed is deleted in thefollowing cases:

pressing the on/off button orswitching off the engine;

if there is a malfunction in the CruiseControl.

DEACTIVATINGTHEDEVICE

The Cruise Control is deactivated bypressing the system on/off button or byputting the starter switch in the STOPposition.

WARNING

117)When travelling with the device active,never move the gear lever to neutral.118) In case of a malfunction or failure ofthe device, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.119) The Cruise Control can be dangerous ifthe system cannot keep a constant speed. Inspecific conditions speed may be excessive,resulting in the risk of losing control of thevehicle and causing accidents. Do not use thedevice in heavy traffic or on winding, icy,snowy or slippery roads.

ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROL(where provided)

120) 121) 122) 123) 124) 125)

37) 38) 39) 40) 41) 42) 43)

The Active Cruise Control (ACC) is adriver assist device which combines theCruise Control functions with one forcontrolling the distance from the vehicleahead.The device allows to hold the vehicle atthe desired speed without needing topress the accelerator. It also allows tohold a given distance from the vehicleahead (the distance can be set by thedriver).The Active Cruise Control (ACC) uses aradar sensor, located behind the frontbumper fig. 170 and a camera, located inthe middle area of the windscreenfig. 171, to detect the presence of avehicle close ahead.

The device further enhances drivingcomfort provided by the electronicCruise Control when on the motorway orout of town with light traffic.

Important notes

If the sensor does not detect any vehicleahead, the device will maintain a fixed setspeed.If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, thedevice automatically intervenes bybraking (or accelerating) slightly in ordernot to exceed the original set speed, sothat the vehicle keeps the presetdistance, seeking to adapt to the speedof the vehicle ahead.In the cases described below, the systemperformance is not guaranteed, it istherefore advisable to turn the device onby pressing the fig. 172 button:

driving in fog, heavy rain, snow, heavytraffic and in complex driving situations(e.g. on motorways with roadworks inprogress);

170 06016V0003EM

171 06016V0004EM

155

driving near a bend (winding roads), icy,snowy, slippery roads or with steepclimbs and descents;

entering a turn lane or on a slip road;towing a trailer;when circumstances do not allow safe

driving at a constant speed.

ACTIVE CRUISE CONTROLACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION

The device may have four operatingstates:

Enabled (speed not programmed);Activated (speed programmed);Paused;Deactivated.

Enabling / Activation

To enable the device, press and releasethe fig. 172 button.

With the device enabled and ready foroperation, the display shows the white

icon with dashes fig. 173 in place of thespeed.

Setting a speed activates the system.The displays shows the green icon withthe set speed.

IMPORTANT It is dangerous to leave thedevice activated when it is not used.There is a risk of inadvertently activatingit and losing control of the vehicle due tounexpected excessive speed.

Pausing / Deactivating

With the device enabled (speed not set),press the button.With the device activated (speed set),press the button to enter the Pausedstate. The display shows the white iconwith the speed in brackets. Press the

button again to deactivate the devicecompletely.

SETTINGTHEDESIRED SPEED

The speed can be programmed from aminimum of 20 mph (30 km/h) to amaximum of 110 mph (180 km/h).When the vehicle reaches the desiredspeed, raise/lower the SET switchfig. 174 and release it to activate thedevice. When the accelerator is released,the vehicle will keep the selected speedautomatically

While the accelerator pedal is pressed:the device will not be able to control

the distance between the vehicle and theone ahead. In this case the speed will bedetermined only by the position of theaccelerator pedal.The device will return to normaloperation as soon as the acceleratorpedal is released.The system cannot be set:

when pressing the brake pedal;when the brakes are overheated;

172 07146V0010EM

173 07146S0016EM

174 07146V0017EM

156

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

when the electric parking brake isengaged;

when it is in P (park), R (reverse) or N(neutral) mode;

when the engine speed is above amaximum threshold;

when the car speed is not within thesettable speed range;

when the ESC (or ABS or otherstability control systems) are operatingor have just operated;

when the ESC system is off;during automatic braking by the

Forward Collision Warning Plus system(where provided);

in the event of device failure;when the engine is off;in case of obstruction of the radar

sensor (in this case the bumper areawhere it is located must be cleaned).In case of system set, the conditionsdescribed above also cause acancellation or deactivation of thesystem with times that may varyaccording to the conditions.

IMPORTANT The device does notdeactivate on reaching speeds higherthan those that can be set (180 km/h or110 mph for instrument panels setto mph) with the accelerator pedalpressed. In these conditions, the devicemay not work correctly and it is advisableto deactivate it.

CHANGINGSPEED

Speed increase

Once the device has been activated, youcan increase the speed by lifting the SETswitch. Each time it is operated, thespeed increases by 1 mph (1 km/h).By holding the button up, the set speedwill increase in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h)until the button is released, then the newspeed will be stored.

Decreasing speed

Once the device has been activated, youcan decrease the speed by lowering theSET switch. Each time it is operated, thespeed decreases by 1 mph (1 km/h).By holding the button down, the setspeed will decrease in steps of 6 mph(10 km/h) until the button is released,then the new speed will be stored.

IMPORTANT Moving the SET switchallows you to adjust the speed accordingto the selected unit of measurement("metric" or "imperial") set on the Connectsystem (see dedicated supplement).

Important notes

By keeping the accelerator pedaldepressed, the car can continue toaccelerate beyond the set speed. In thiscase, use the SET switch to set the speedto the vehicle’s current speed.When the SET button is pressed toreduce the speed, the braking systemintervenes automatically if the enginebrake does not slow the car down

sufficiently to reach the set speed. Thedevice holds the set speed uphill anddownhill; however a slight variation isentirely normal, particularly on slightgradients.The automatic transmission could changeto a lower gears when driving downhill orwhen accelerating. This is normal andnecessary to maintain the set speed.The device is switched off while driving ifthe brakes overheat.

ACCELERATINGWHENOVERTAKING

When driving with the device active andfollowing a vehicle, the device providesadditional acceleration to facilitateovertaking, when travelling over a givenspeed and switches on the left directionindicator (of the right indicator forright-hand drive versions).In left-hand traffic, the overtaking assistfunction is only active when the left-handlane is used for overtaking the vehicleahead (the opposite activation logic isused in right-hand traffic countries).The device detects the direction oftraffic automatically when the vehiclepasses from left-hand traffic toright-hand traffic. In this case, theovertaking assist function is only activewhen the reference vehicle is overtakenon the right. The additional accelerationis activated when the driver uses theright direction indicator.In this condition, the device no longerprovides the overtaking assist function

157

on the left-hand side until it determinesthat the vehicle has returned to left-handtraffic conditions.

RECALLINGTHE SPEED

Once the system has been cancelled butnot deactivated, if a speed waspreviously set simply press the RESbutton and remove your foot from theaccelerator to recall it.The system will be set to the last storedspeed.

Before returning to the previously setspeed, bring the speed close to thatvalue, then press the RES button andrelease it.

IMPORTANT The recall function mustonly be used if the road and trafficconditions so allow. Recalling anexcessively high or low speed for thecurrent traffic and road conditions couldcause an acceleration or a deceleration ofthe vehicle. Failure to comply with these

precautions may cause serious accidentsand fatal injuries.

SETTINGTHEDISTANCE BETWEENVEHICLES

The distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle ahead may be set to 1 bar(short), 2 bars (medium), 3 bars (long) or4 bars (maximum) fig. 176.

The distances from the vehicle ahead areproportional to speed.The interval of time with respect to thevehicle ahead remains constant andvaries from 1 second (for the shortdistance 1-bar setting) to 2 seconds (forthe maximum distance 4-bar setting).The set distance is shown on the displaywith a dedicated symbol.The setting is 4 (maximum) the first timethe device is used. After the distance hasbeen modified by the driver, the newdistance will be stored also after thesystem is deactivated and reactivated.

To decrease the distance

Press and release the fig. 177 button todecrease the distance setting. Thedistance setting decreases by one bar(shorter) every time the button ispressed.

The set speed is held if there are novehicles ahead. Once the shortestdistance has been reached, a furtherpress of the button will set the longestdistance.If a vehicle is detected in the same lane ata lower speed, the symbol on the displayturns from grey to white. The deviceautomatically adjusts the car’s speed tomaintain the set distance, regardless ofthe set speed.The vehicle holds the set distance until:

the vehicle ahead accelerates to aspeed higher than the set speed;

the vehicle ahead leaves the lane orthe detection field of the Active CruiseControl sensor;

175 07146V0018EM

176 07146S0019EM

177 07146V0015EM

158

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

the distance setting is changed;Active Cruise Control is

deactivated/paused.

IMPORTANT The maximum breakingapplied by the device is limited. Thedriver may apply the brakes in all cases ifneeded.

IMPORTANT If the device predicts thatthe level of braking is not sufficient tomaintain the set distance, the word“BRAKE!” or a dedicated message on thedisplay warns the driver that the vehicleahead is too close. An acoustic signal isalso emitted. In this case, it is advisableto brake immediately as necessary tohold a safe distance from the vehicleahead.

IMPORTANT The driver is responsible forensuring that there are no pedestrians,other vehicles or objectives along thedirection of the vehicle. Failure to complywith these precautions may causeserious accidents and injuries.

IMPORTANT The driver is fullyresponsible for holding a safe distancefrom the vehicle ahead respecting thehighway code in force in the respectivecountry.

“STOPANDGO” STRATEGY

The “Stop and Go” operating strategyallows you to maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle ahead until the car hascompletely stopped. It will also restart

the car automatically if the vehicle aheadmoves off within two seconds, otherwiseit is necessary to press the acceleratorpedal or the RES button to restart.

DEACTIVATION

The device is deactivated and the setspeed is cancelled if:

the button on the Active CruiseControl is pressed (with the device on orpaused);

the starter switch is in the STOPposition;The device is cancelled (the set speedand distance are stored):

when the device is paused (see the“Active Cruise Control Activation /Deactivation” paragraph);

when the conditions shown in the“Setting the desired speed” paragraphoccur;

SYSTEMLIMITEDOPERATIONWARNING

If the dedicated message is shown on thedisplay, a condition limiting the systemoperation may have occurred.The possible reasons of this limitationare something blocking the camera viewor a fault. If an obstruction is signalled,clean the area of the windscreenindicated in fig. 171 and check that themessage has disappeared.

When the conditions limiting the systemfunctions end, this will go back to normaland complete operation.Should the fault persist, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.

PRECAUTIONSWHILE DRIVING

The device may not work correctly insome driving conditions (see below): thedriver must control the car at all times.

Towing a trailer

Use of the device is not recommendedwhile towing a trailer.

VEHICLE not aligned

The device may not detect a car travellingon the same lane but which is not alignedalong the same direction of travel or a carwhich is cutting in from a side lane.Sufficient distance from the cars aheadmay not be guaranteed in these cases.The non-aligned car can weave in and outof the driving direction causing the car tobrake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Steering and bends

When cornering fig. 178 with the deviceset, it could limit speed and accelerationto guarantee vehicle stability even if novehicles are detected ahead.When leaving the bend, the device resetsthe previously set speed.

159

IMPORTANT In case of narrow curves,the performance of the device could belimited. In this case, it is advisable todeactivate the device. Moreover,remember that the device only limits thespeed DURING a bend and not BEFOREit, so always take great care.

Using the device on gradient

When driving on roads with variablegradient, the device may not detect thepresence of a vehicle on the lane. Deviceperformance could be limited accordingto speed, load, traffic conditions andgradient steepness.

Lane change

The device may not detect the presenceof a vehicle until it is fully in your lane.

In this case, sufficient distance from thevehicle which is changing lane may not beguaranteed: it is advisable to pay theutmost attention at all times and bealways ready to press the brakes ifneeded.

Small cars

Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles andmotorcycles fig. 180 ) travelling near theouter edges of the lane or that enter thelane from the kerbside are not detecteduntil they are fully in the lane.

Sufficient distance from the cars aheadmay not be guaranteed in these cases.

Stationary objects and cars

The device cannot detect the presence ofstationary cars or objects. For example,the device will not operate if the vehicleahead leaves the lane and a vehicle aheadof that one is standing on the lane. Paythe utmost attention at all times and bealways ready to press the brakes ifneeded.

Objects and cars moving in opposite orcrosswise direction

The device cannot detect the presence ofobjects or vehicles travelling in theopposite direction or at right-angles andfig. 181 consequently will not intervenefor them.

178 06016V0005EM 179 06016V0007EM 180 06016V0006EM

160

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

WARNING

120)Pay the utmost attention while drivingat all times and be always ready to press thebrakes if needed.121) The system is an aid for the driver, whomust always pay full attention while driving.The responsibility always rests with thedriver, who must take into account thetraffic conditions in order to drive incomplete safety. The driver must alwaysmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle infront.122) The device is not activated in presenceof pedestrians, oncoming vehicles in theopposite direction of travel or moving in thecrosswise direction and stationary objects(e.g. a vehicle standing in a queue or a brokendown vehicle).123) The device cannot take account ofroad, traffic and weather conditions, andconditions of poor visibility (e.g. fog).

124) The device does not always fullyrecognise complex driving conditions thatcould cause it to determine the safe distanceto be held incorrectly or not at all.125) The device cannot apply the maximumbraking force: the car will not be stoppedcompletely.

IMPORTANT

37) The system may have limited or absentoperation due to weather conditions such as:heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow.38) The section of the bumper before thesensor must not be covered with adhesives,auxiliary headlights or any other object.39)Operation can be adversely affected byany structural change made to the vehicle,such as a modification to the front geometry,tyre change, or a heavier load than thestandard load of the vehicle.40) Incorrect repairs made on the front partof the vehicle (e.g. bumper, chassis) may alterthe position of the radar sensor, andadversely affect its operation. Go to an AlfaRomeo Dealership for any operation of thistype.41)Do not tamper with nor carry out anyintervention on the radar sensor or on thecamera on the windscreen. In the event of asensor failure, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.42)Do not wash with high-pressure jets inthe bumper lower area: in particular do notoperate on the system's electrical connector.

43)Be careful in the case of repairs and newpaintings in the area around the sensor(panel covering the sensor on the left side ofthe bumper). In the event of a frontal impactthe sensor may automatically deactivateand display a warning to indicate that thesensor needs to be repaired. Even without amalfunction warning, deactivate the systemoperation if you think that the position of theradar sensor has changed (e.g. due tolow-speed frontal impact as during parkingmanoeuvres). In these cases, go to an AlfaRomeo Dealership to have the radar sensorrealigned or replaced.

181 06016V0008EM

161

PARKSENSORSSYSTEM

(where provided)126)

44) 45) 46)

VERSIONSWITH4SENSORS

The parking sensors, located in the rearbumper fig. 182, detect the presence ofany obstacles and warn the driver aboutthem, through an acoustic signal and,where provided, visual indications on theinstrument panel display.

Engagement/disengagement

To disengage the system, press buttonfig. 183.The LED in the button will light up or notwhen the system switches from on to off(and vice versa).

LED off: system activated;LED light on steady: system

deactivated;If the button is pressed with a systemfailure, the LED flashes for about5 seconds, then it stays on constantly.When the ignition device is set to ON thePark Sensors system keeps the last statewhen the engine was stopped (activatedor deactivated) in its memory.

System activation/deactivation

The system, when engaged, isautomatically activated by engaging thereverse gear, while it is deactivated byengaging another gear.

Acoustic signal

When reverse is engaged and there is anobstacle behind the car, an acousticsignal with variable frequency isactivated:

increases as the distance between thevehicle and the obstacle decreases;

becomes continuous when thedistance between the car and theobstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) andstops if the distance increases;

is constant if the distance betweenthe vehicle and the obstacle isunchanged.If several obstacles are detected by thesensors, only the nearest one isconsidered.

Warning on display

Park Sensors system indications appearon the Connect system display. To accessthe function, on the main menu select thefollowing items in sequence: “Settings”,“Driver assistance”, “Parking sensors”,“Mode” and “Sound and Display”.The system indicates the presence of anobstacle by displaying a single arc in oneof the possible areas, in accordance withthe distance of the object and theposition in relation to the car.If the obstacle is detected in the rearcentral area, a single arc will be displayedas the obstacle approaches, firstconstant, then flashing, in addition to anacoustic warning.If the obstacle is detected in the rear leftand/or right area, a single flashing arc willbe shown in the corresponding area onthe display and the system will emit anacoustic warning, either at frequentintervals or constantly.In general, the car is closer to theobstacle when a single flashing arc is

182 07176V0001EM

183 07176V0002EM

162

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

shown on the display and the acousticwarning becomes continuous.If several obstacles are detectedsimultaneously in the rear area, thedisplay will show all of them, regardlessof the area in which they were detected.The colour on the display depends on thedistance from and position of theobstacle.It is possible to exit from the displayscreen by pressing the Rotary Pad. In anycase, the audible signal will remain active.

Anomaly warning

Parking sensor faults, if any, will beindicated when reverse is engaged by amessage on the instrument panel display(see description in the "Warning lightsand messages" paragraph, "Knowing theinstrument panel" chapter).

Messages on the display

In case of system failure, a dedicatedmessage appears on the instrumentpanel for about 5 seconds.

Clean sensors: if the display showsmessages requiring the front sensorcleaning, make sure that the outersurface and the underside of the bumperis free of dirt (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.).After performing this check, place theignition device in STOP position, thenturn it to the ON position and checkwhether the messages are no longerdisplayed. If messages are still displayed,contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

Sound system unavailable: if thedisplay shows the message that theaudio system is not available, it meansthat the acoustic warning will be emittedby the instrument panel.

Operation with a trailer

The operation of the sensors isautomatically deactivated when thetrailer is plugged to the tow hook socketof the car. The sensors are automaticallyreactivated when the trailer's cable plugis removed.

Important notes

When parking, take the utmost care overobstacles that may be above or under thesensor. Objects close to the car are notdetected under certain circumstancesand could therefore cause damage to thecar or be damaged.Some conditions may influence theperformance of the parking system:

reduced sensor sensitivity and areduction in the parking assistancesystem performance could be due to thepresence of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint,on the surface of the sensor;

the sensor may detect a non-existentobstacle ("echo interference") due tomechanical interference, for examplewhen washing the vehicle, in rain (strongwind), hail;

the signals sent by the sensor can alsobe altered by the presence of ultrasonicsystems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems

of trucks or pneumatic drills) near thevehicle;

parking assistance systemperformance can also be influenced bythe position of the sensors, for exampledue to a change in the ride setting(caused by wear to the shock absorbers,suspension), or by changing tyres,overloading the vehicle or carrying outspecific tuning operations that requirethe vehicle to be lowered;

the presence of a tow hook withouttrailer, which may interfere with thecorrect operation of the parking sensors.Before using the Park Sensors system, itis recommended to remove or close thetow hook ball assembly when the vehicleis not used for towing. Failure to complywith this prescription may cause personalinjuries or damage to vehicles orobstacles since, when the continuousacoustic warning is emitted, the tow hookball is already in a position that is muchcloser to the obstacle than the rearbumper. If you wish to leave the tow hookfitted without towing a trailer, it isadvisable to contact an Alfa RomeoDealership for the Park Sensors systemupdate operations because the tow hookcould be detected as an obstacle by thecentral sensors.

the presence of adhesives on thesensors. Therefore, take care not to placestickers on the sensors.

163

VERSIONSWITH 8 SENSORS

The parking sensors, located in the front(fig. 184 ) and rear (fig. 185 ) bumper,warn the driver of any obstacles throughan acoustic signal and, where provided,visual indications on the instrument paneldisplay.

Engagement/disengagement

To disengage the system, press buttonfig. 183.

The LED in the button will light up or notwhen the system switches from on to off(and vice versa).

LED off: system activated;LED light on steady: system

deactivated;If the button is pressed with a systemfailure, the LED flashes for about5 seconds, then it stays on constantly.When the ignition device is set to ON thePark Sensors system keeps the last statewhen the engine was stopped (activatedor deactivated) in its memory.

System activation/deactivation

When the reverse gear is engaged andthe system is on, the front and rearsensors are activated. If a different gearis engaged, the rear sensors aredeactivated, while the front sensorsremain active until 9 mph (15 km/h) areexceeded.

IMPORTANT In particular operatingconditions the system could startdetecting the obstacle only after the carhas moved slightly (a few centrimetres).

Acoustic signal

In the presence of an obstacle at thefront or the rear of the car, an acousticsignal with variable frequency isactivated:

increases as the distance between thevehicle and the obstacle decreases;

becomes continuous when thedistance between the car and the

obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) andstops if the distance increases;

is constant if the distance betweenthe vehicle and the obstacle isunchanged.If the sensors detect several front andrear obstacles, the acoustic warningconcerning the closest obstacle isemitted, or an intermittent warning if theobstacles are at the same distance.When the system emits an acousticsignal, the volume of the Connect system,if activated, is automatically lowered.

Indication on display

The Park Sensors system signals areshown along with an acoustic indicationonly if the function was enabled on theConnect system. To access the function,on the main menu select the followingitems in sequence: “Settings”, “Driverassistance”, “Parking sensors”, “Mode”and “Sound and Display”.The system indicates the presence of anobstacle by displaying a single arc in oneof the possible areas, in accordance withthe distance of the object and theposition in relation to the car.If the obstacle is detected in the front orrear central area, a single arc will bedisplayed as the obstacle approaches,first constant, then flashing, in additionto an acoustic warning.If the obstacle is detected in the front orrear left and/or right area, a singleflashing arc will be shown in the

184 07176V0003EM

185 07176V0001EM

164

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

corresponding area on the display andthe system will emit an acoustic signal,either at frequent intervals or constantly.If several obstacles are detectedsimultaneously in the front and rear area,the display will show all of them,regardless of the area in which they weredetected.In general, the car is closer to theobstacle when a single or several flashingarcs are shown on the display and theacoustic warning becomes continuous.The colour on the display depends on thedistance from and position of theobstacle.It is possible to exit from the displayscreen by pressing the Rotary Pad. In anycase, the audible signal will remain active.

Anomaly warning

Parking sensor faults, if any, will beindicated by a message on the display onthe instrument panel (see description inthe "Warning lights and messages"paragraph, "Knowing the instrumentpanel" chapter).

Messages on the display

In case of system failure, a dedicatedmessage appears on the instrumentpanel for about 5 seconds.

Cleaning the front or rear sensors: ifthe display shows messages requiringthe front or rear sensor cleaning, makesure that the outer surface and theunderside of the bumper is free of dirt(e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Afterperforming this check, place the ignitiondevice in STOP position, then turn it tothe ON position and check whether themessages are no longer displayed. Ifmessages are still displayed, contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership.

Audio system not available: if thedisplay shows the message that theaudio system is not available, it meansthat the acoustic warning will be emittedby the instrument panel.

Operation with a trailer

The operation of the rear sensors isautomatically deactivated when thetrailer is plugged to the tow hook socketof the car, while the front sensors stayactive and can provide acoustic andvisual warnings. The rear sensors areautomatically reactivated when thetrailer's cable plug is removed.

Important notes

Some conditions may influence theperformance of the parking system:

reduced sensor sensitivity and a

reduction in the parking assistancesystem performance could be due to thepresence of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint,on the surface of the sensor;

the sensor may detect a non-existentobstacle ("echo interference") due tomechanical interference, for examplewhen washing the vehicle, in rain (strongwind), hail;

the signals sent by the sensor can alsobe altered by the presence of ultrasonicsystems (e.g. pneumatic brake systemsof trucks or pneumatic drills) near thevehicle;

parking assistance systemperformance can also be influenced bythe position of the sensors, for exampledue to a change in the ride setting(caused by wear to the shock absorbers,suspension), or by changing tyres,overloading the vehicle or carrying outspecific tuning operations that requirethe vehicle to be lowered;

the presence of a tow hook withouttrailer, which may interfere with thecorrect operation of the parking sensors.Before using the Park Sensors system, itis recommended to remove or close thetow hook ball assembly when the vehicleis not used for towing. Failure to complywith this prescription may cause personalinjuries or damage to vehicles orobstacles since, when the continuousacoustic warning is emitted, the tow hook

165

ball is already in a position that is muchcloser to the obstacle than the rearbumper. If you wish to leave the tow hookfitted without towing a trailer, it isadvisable to contact an Alfa RomeoDealership for the Park Sensors systemupdate operations because the tow hookcould be detected as an obstacle by thecentral sensors.

the presence of adhesives on thesensors. Therefore, take care not to placestickers on the sensors.

WARNING

126) Parking and other potentiallydangerous manoeuvres are, however,always the driver’s responsibility.Whenperforming these operations, always makesure that there are no other people(especially children) or animals on the routeyou want to take. The parking sensors are anaid for the driver, but the driver must neverallow their attention to lapse duringpotentially dangerous manoeuvres, eventhose executed at low speeds.

IMPORTANT

44) The sensors must be clean of mud, dirt,snow or ice in order for the system tooperate correctly. Be careful not to scratchor damage the sensors while cleaning them.Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. Thesensors should be washed using clean waterwith the addition of car shampoo ifnecessary.When using special washingequipment such as high pressure jets orsteam cleaning, clean the sensors veryquickly keeping the jet more than 10 cmaway.45)Have interventions on the bumper in thearea of the sensors carried out only by anAlfa Romeo Dealership. Interventions on thebumper that are not carried out properlymay compromise the operation of theparking sensors.46)Only have the bumpers repainted or anyretouches to the paintwork in the area of thesensors carried out by an Alfa RomeoDealership. Incorrect paint application couldaffect the operation of the parking sensors.

LANEDEPARTUREWARNING(LDW) SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION

47) 48) 49) 50)

The Lane Departure Warning systemmakes use of a camera located on thewindscreen to detect the lane limits andcalculate the position of the vehiclewithin such limits, in order to make surethat it remains inside the lane.When one or both lane limits aredetected and the vehicle passes over onewithout the driver's say-so (directionindicator not turned on), the systememits an acoustic signal.If the vehicle continues to go beyond theline of the lane without any interventionfrom the driver, the surpassed line willlight up on the display (left or right) tourge the driver to bring the vehicle backinto the limits of the lane.

SYSTEMON/OFF

The system is activated/deactivated bypressing the button, fig. 186Each time the engine is started, thesystem maintains the operating modethat was selected when it was previouslyswitched off.

166

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

Activation conditions

Once switched on, the system becomesactive only if the following conditions aremet:

the car speed is above 37 mph(60 km/h);

the lane limit lines are visible at leaston one side;

there are suitable visibility conditions;the road is straight or with wide radius

bends;a suitable distance is kept from the

vehicle in front;the direction indicator (for leaving the

lane) is not active.

SYMBOLSANDMESSAGESONTHEDISPLAY

The Lane Departure Warning system alsoadvises the driver when the vehiclechanges lane by showing symbols andmessages on the instrument paneldisplay fig. 187.

When the system is active and the lanelimits have not been detected, the displayshows a specific grey icon, fig. 188.

Exiting a lane with detection of a singlelimit

When the system is active and only, forexample, the left lane limit has beendetected, the detected lane lights up inwhite on the display; the system is readyto provide visual warnings on the display

in the event of unintentional exiting ofthe lane (direction indicator notactivated) to the left, fig. 189

When the system detects that the vehiclehas approached the lane line and is aboutto pass it, the left line on the displaylights up in yellow, fig. 190.

The system operates in the same way,but mirrored, in the event of exiting theright lane when only the right lane limit

186 07226S0001EM 187 07226S0002EM

188 07226S0007EM

189 07226S0003EM

190 07226S0004EM

167has been detected.

Exiting a lane with detection of bothlimits

When the system is active, the lane lineson the display become white to indicatethe successful detection of the limits,fig. 191.

The system is ready to provideindications in case it is accidentallyabandoned (direction indicator notengaged).In accordance with the differentconditions detected, the system canattract the attention of the driver byaltering the lines that identify the laneson the display. In particular, the systemcan alter their colour (from white toyellow and vice versa), increase theirthickness, fig. 192

If a line is crossed, it is signalled by anacoustic signal as well. The signal isemitted from the loudspeakers on theside of the lane limit which is beingcrossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceedingthe left line of the lane, the acousticsignal will come from the loudspeakerson the left).

Changing the system settings

The system's sensitivity can be set viathe Connect system.To access the function, on the main menuselect the following items in sequence:“Settings”, “Safety”, “Lane DepartureWarning” and “Sensitivity”. The possibleoptions are:

High;Low.

System limited operation signal

51) 52)

If the dedicated message is shown on thedisplay, a condition limiting the system

operation may have occurred. Thepossible reasons of this limitation aresomething blocking the camera view or afault.If an obstruction is signalled, clean thearea of the windscreen by the interiorrear view mirror.Although the vehicle can still be driven innormal conditions, the system may be notcompletely available.When the conditions limiting the systemfunctions end, this will go back to normaland complete operation. Should the faultpersist, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.

System failure signalling

If the system switches off and thesystem appears on the display, itmeans that there is a fault on the system.In this case, it is still possible to drive thevehicle, but you are advised to contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership as soon aspossible.

IMPORTANT

47)Projecting loads on the roof of thevehicle may interfere with the correctoperation of the camera. Before startingmake sure the load is correctly positioned, inorder not to cover the camera operatingrange.

191 07226S0005EM

192 07226S0006EM

168

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

48) If the windscreen must be replaced dueto scratches, chipping or breakage, contactexclusively an Alfa Romeo Dealership. Do notreplace the windscreen on your own, risk ofmalfunction! It is advisable to replace thewindscreen if it is damaged in the area of thecamera.49)Do not tamper with nor operate on thecamera. Do not close the openings in theaesthetic cover located under the interiorrear view mirror. In the event of a failure ofthe camera, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.50)Do not cover the operating range of thecamera with stickers or other objects. Alsopay attention to other objects on the bonnet(e.g. a layer of snow) and make sure they donot interfere with the camera51) The camera may have limited or absentoperation due to weather conditions such as:heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow,formation of ice layers on the windscreen.52)Camera operation may also becompromised by the presence of dust,condensation, dirt or ice on the windscreen,by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that aredriving not aligned with yours, vehicle drivingin a transverse or opposite way on the samelane, bend with a small radius of curvature),by road surface conditions and by drivingconditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make surethe windscreen is always clean. Use specificdetergents and clean cloths to avoidscratching the windscreen. The cameraoperation may also be limited or absent insome driving, traffic and road surfaceconditions.

REARBACK-UP CAMERA /DYNAMIC GRIDLINES

DESCRIPTION

The Rear Back-up Camera is located onthe tailgate, near the opening button,fig. 193.

127)

53)

Camera activation/deactivation

The function can be activated/deactivated on the Connect system.

Activating the device

To access the function, on the main menuselect the following items in sequence:"Settings", "Driver assistance" and“Reversing Camera (Rear Back-upCamera)". The following submenuappears:

ViewSwitch-off delay;Camera Guidelines.

Select "View" to activate the cameraview on the Connect system display.Every time reverse is engaged, thedisplay of the Connect system, fig. 194,shows the area around the vehicle, asseen by the Rear Back-up Camera.

The images are shown on the displaytogether with a warning message.NOTE The displayed image may look a bitdistorted.By activating the "Switch-off delay"function, the display could continue to

193 07186V0001EM

194 07186V0002EM

169

show the image transmitted by thecamera for a few more seconds, even ifthe reverse gear is disengaged,afterwards the display will show againthe previously active screen.

SYMBOLSANDMESSAGESONTHEDISPLAY

Indications on the display

Through the Connect system settings, byactivating the "Camera Guidelines"function, you can see the gridlines on thedisplay. If activated, the grid is positionedon the image to highlight the width of thevehicle and the expected reversing pathin accordance with the steering wheelposition.A superimposed central broken lineindicates the centre of the car tofacilitate parking manoeuvres or towhook alignment. The various colouredareas indicate the distance from the rearpart of the car.The table below shows the approximatedistances for each area fig. 194:

AreaDistance from the rear

part of the car

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 – 30 cm)

Yellow 1 - 3.3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

Green 3.3 ft (1 m) or more

Messages on the display

If the tailgate is lifted, the camera will notdetect any obstacle in the car rear part.

The display will show a dedicated warningmessage.In this case, close the tailgate (see thedescription in the "Luggagecompartment" paragraph in the "Knowingyour car" chapter.

IMPORTANTNOTES

IMPORTANT In some circumstances, suchas with ice, snow or mud on the surface ofthe camera, the camera sensitivity maybe reduced.

IMPORTANT If the tailgate is to bere-painted following to repairs, makesure the paint does not get in contactwith the camera.

IMPORTANT When parking, take theutmost care over obstacles that may beabove or under the operating range of thecamera.

WARNING

127) Parking and other potentiallydangerous manoeuvres are, however,always the driver’s responsibility.Whilecarrying out these manoeuvres, alwaysmake sure that no people (especiallychildren) or animals are in the areaconcerned. The camera is an aid for thedriver, but the driver must never allowhis/her attention to lapse during potentiallydangerous manoeuvres, even thoseexecuted at low speeds. Always keep a slowspeed, so as to promptly brake in the case ofobstacles.

IMPORTANT

53) It is vital, for correct operation, that thecamera is always kept clean and free fromany mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not toscratch or damage the camera while cleaningit. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. Thecamera must be washed using clean water,with the addition of car shampoo ifnecessary. In washing stations which usesteam or high-pressure jets, clean thecamera quickly, keeping the nozzle morethan 10 cm away from the sensors. Also, donot apply stickers to the camera.

170

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

REFUELLINGTHEVEHICLE

PETROL ENGINES

Before refuelling, make sure that the fueltype is correct.Always stop the engine before refuelling.Only use unleaded petrol with a numberof octanes (R.O.N.) not lower than 95(EN228 specification).

IMPORTANT Never introduce leadedpetrol to the tank, even in small amountsin an emergency, as this would damagethe catalytic converter beyond repair.

IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyticconverter leads to harmful exhaustemissions, thus contributing to airpollution.

128) 129) 130)

DIESEL ENGINES

Only use automotive diesel fuel(EN590 and EN16734 specifications).

Operation at low temperatures

If the outside temperature is very low,Diesel thickens due to the formation ofparaffin clots with consequent defectiveoperation of the fuel supply system.In order to avoid these problems,different types of diesel are distributedaccording to the season: summer type,winter type and arctic type (cold,mountain areas).In the event of refuelling with dieselwhich is unsuitable for the operating

temperature, it is advisable to mix thediesel with a specific additive,introducing it to the tank before theanti-freeze and then the diesel.

REFUELLING CAPACITY

To ensure that you fill the tankcompletely, top up twice after the firstclick of the fuel supply gun.Further top-ups could cause faults in thefuel feeding system.

REFUELLING PROCEDURE

The fuel flap is unlocked when the centraldoor locking system is released, while itis automatically locked when the centrallocking system is applied.

Opening the flap

To refuel proceed as follows:open flap fig. 195 pressing on the

point shown by the arrow;remove the closing cap;put the cap back in position fig. 196;introduce the dispenser in the filler

and refuel;

after refuelling, before removing thedispenser, wait for at least 10 seconds inorder for the fuel to flow inside the tank;

then remove the dispenser from thefiller, close the cap and then close theflap.The refuelling procedure describedabove is illustrated on the label (whereprovided) located inside the fuel flap.

Fuels - identification of vehiclecompatibility. Graphic symbol forconsumer information in accordancewith EN16942

The symbols, shown below, make it easierto recognise the correct fuel type to usewith your car.Before refuelling, check the symbols(where provided) inside the fuel filler flapand compare them with the symbolsshown on the fuel pump (where provided).

195 07206V0001EM

171

PETROL ENGINES

Inside the flap there is also the fuel type(UNLEADED FUEL = petrol) and thesymbol (where provided) that certifiescompliance with the EN228 (petrol)standard fig. 196.

Symbols for petrol powered cars

E5: unleaded petrol containing up to2.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum5.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with theEN228 specification.E10: unleaded petrol containing up to3.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum10.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with theEN228 specification.

DIESEL ENGINES

The fuel cap shows the type of fuel(DIESEL - diesel fuel) fig. 197, whileinside the fuel flap there is the symbol(where provided) that certifiescompliance with the EN590 andEN16734 (diesel) standards.

Symbols for diesel powered cars

B7: diesel containing up to 7% (V/V) ofFAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)compliant with the EN590 specification.B10: diesel containing up to 10% (V/V)of FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)compliant with theEN16734 specification.

Emergency diesel version refuelling

Proceed as follows:open the luggage compartment and

take out the dedicated adapter, locatedunder the load platform fig. 198;

open flap fig. 195 pressing on thepoint shown by the arrow;

remove the closing cap;put the cap back in position;insert the adapter into the filler;when you have finished refuelling,

remove the adapter, close the cap andthen close the flap;

finally put the adaptor back in theluggage compartment.

196 07206V0002EM

197 07206V0004EM

198 07206V0005EM

172

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

Emergency fuel flap opening

In the event of an emergency the fuel flapcan be opened by operating from insidethe luggage compartment.Proceed as follows:

open the tailgate and reach theemergency opening cable located on theside of the fuel filler fig. 199;

pull the cord to unlock the fuel flaplock;

open the fuel flap by pressing on it(see the previous instructions).

IMPORTANT If the filler compartment iswashed with a high-pressure jet, keep itat a distance of at least 8 in (20 cm).

WARNING

128)Do not apply any object/plug to theend of the filler which is not provided for thecar. The use of non-compliant objects/plugscould cause a pressure increase inside thetank, resulting in dangerous situations.129)Do not bring naked flames or litcigarettes near to the fuel filler: fire risk.Keep your face away from the fuel filler toprevent breathing in harmful vapours.130)Do not use a mobile phone near therefuelling pump: risk of fire.

SUGGESTIONS FORDRIVING

SAVING FUEL

Below are some suggestions which mayhelp you save fuel and thus lower theamount of harmful emissions releasedinto the atmosphere.

Vehicle maintenance

Checks and operations should be carriedout in accordance with the "ScheduledServicing Plan" (see chapter"Maintenance and care").

Tyres

Check the tyre pressures at least onceevery four weeks: if the pressure is toolow, consumption levels increase asresistance to rolling is higher.

Unnecessary loads

Do not travel with an overloaded boot.The weight of the vehicle and itsarrangement greatly affect fuelconsumption and stability.

Electric devices

Use electrical devices only for theamount of time needed. The heated rearwindow, additional headlights, screenwipers and heater fan require aconsiderable amount of energy;increasing the current uptake increasesfuel consumption (by up to +25% in anurban cycle).

Climate control system

Using the climate control system willincrease consumption: use standard

199 07206V0003EM

173

ventilation when the temperatureoutside permits.

Devices for aerodynamic control

The use of non-certified devices foraerodynamic control may adverselyaffect air drag and consumption levels.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm up the engine at low or highrevs when the vehicle is stationary; thiscauses the engine to warm up moreslowly, thereby increasing fuelconsumption and emissions. It istherefore advisable to move offimmediately, slowly, avoiding highspeeds: in this way the engine will warmup more quickly.

Unnecessary actions

Avoid revving up when starting at trafficlights or before stopping the engine. Thelatter action, as well as double-declutching, is unnecessary and causesincreased fuel consumption andpollution.

Gear selection

Use a high gear when traffic and roadconditions allow it. Using a low gear forfaster acceleration will increase fuelconsumption. In the same way, improperuse of a high gear increases consumption,emissions and engine wear.

Max. speed

Fuel consumption considerably increasesas speed increases. Maintain a constantspeed, avoiding unnecessary braking andacceleration, which cost in terms of bothfuel consumption and emissions.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently severely affectsconsumption and emissions: accelerationshould be gradual and should not exceedthe maximum torque.

CONDITIONSOFUSE

Cold starting

Short journeys and frequent cold startsdo not allow the engine to reach optimumoperating temperature. This results in asignificant increase in consumptionlevels (from +15 to +30% on the urbancycle) and emissions.

Traffic and road conditions

High fuel consumption is caused by heavytraffic, for instance when travelling in aqueue with frequent use of low gears orin cities with many traffic lights. Windingmountain roads and rough road surfacesalso adversely affect consumption.

Stops in traffic

During prolonged hold-ups (e.g. levelcrossings) switch off the engine.

TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS

Important notes

IMPORTANT It is extremely dangerous toleave children in a parked vehicle whenthe temperature outside is very high. Theheat inside the passenger compartmentmay have serious, or even fatal,consequences.

IMPORTANT Never travel in the internalload compartment. In the event of anaccident, anyone inside the luggagecompartment would be at greater risk ofserious or even fatal injury.

IMPORTANT Ensure that all theoccupants of the vehicle wear their seatbelts correctly and that any children arepositioned correctly on the dedicatedchild restraint systems.

TRANSPORTINGANIMALS

The interventions of the airbags may bedangerous for an animal on the frontseat. It is therefore advisable to arrangeanimals on the rear seat inside dedicatedcages restrained by the vehicle’s seatbelts.Bear in mind also that, in the event of asudden braking or an accident, aninadequately restrained animal may beprojected within the passengercompartment, risking injury to the animalitself and the other occupants of thevehicle.

174

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

EXHAUSTGAS

Exhaust emissions are very dangerous,and may be lethal. They contain carbonmonoxide, a colourless, odourless gaswhich can cause fainting and poisoning ifinhaled.To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, takethe following measures:

do not keep the engine running inclosed spaces;

if, for some reason (e.g. transportingbulky loads), it is necessary to drive withthe boot open, close all the windows andrun the climate control fan at maximumspeed. DO NOT activate air recirculationmode;

should it be necessary to stay on boardthe stationary vehicle with enginerunning, adjust the ventilation/heatingsystem and operate the fan in such a waythat outside air enter the passengercompartment. Activate the maximum fanspeed.Adequate maintenance of the exhaustsystem represents the best protectionagainst leaks of carbon monoxide intothe passenger compartment.Should an unusual noise from the exhaustsystem or the presence of exhaust gas inthe passenger compartment beidentified, or if the underbody or rearsection of the vehicle is damaged, havethe entire exhaust system and adjoiningbodywork areas checked to identify anycomponents which are broken, damaged,

worn or have moved from their correctfitting position. For these operations,contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.Open welding or loose connections maypermit exhaust gas to enter thepassenger compartment.Check the exhaust system each time thevehicle is raised for lubrication or oilchange operations. Replace thecomponents where necessary. For theseoperations, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.

WARNING

131)After the car has been stopped for along time in a very cold place (temperaturebelow 0 °C), for the first five brakes, thecarbon-ceramic braking system efficiency isnot optimal, so you may need slightly morepressure on the brake pedal.

TOWINGTRAILERS(where provided)

132) 133)

For towing caravans or trailers the carmust be fitted with an approved towhook and an adequate electrical system.Should aftermarket installation berequested, this must be carried out byspecialists.Install any specific and/or additional doormirrors as specified by the HighwayCode.Remember that, when towing a trailer,steep hills are harder to climb, brakingdistances increase and overtaking takeslonger depending on the overall weight ofthe trailer.Engage a low gear when driving downhill,rather than constantly using the brake.The weight the trailer exerts on the cartow hook reduces the car's loadingcapacity by the same amount. To makesure that the maximum towable weight isnot exceeded (given in the vehicleregistration document) account shouldbe taken of the fully laden trailer,including accessories and luggage.Do not exceed the speed limits specificto each country you are driving in, in thecase of vehicles towing trailers. In anycase, the top speed must not exceed60 mph (100 km/h).Any electric brake must be powereddirectly by the battery through a cablewith a cross-section of no less than

1750.004 in 2 (2.5 mm 2).

In addition to the electrical branches, thecar electrical system can only beconnected to the supply cable for anelectric brake and to the cable for aninternal light for the trailer, notexceeding 15 W. For connections, use thepreset control unit with a battery cablewith section not less than 0.004 in 2

(2.5 mm 2).

IMPORTANT The use of auxiliary loadsother than external lights (e.g. electricbrake) must take place with enginerunning.

TOWHOOKSETUP

Instructions for using the removableball head tow hook

IMPORTANT NOTE Before setting off,check that the removable ball head towhook is locked correctly. To do this, checkthe following conditions:

the green mark on the knob mustcoincide with the green mark on the towhook fixing bracket;

the knob must be at the end of itstravel, resting on the tow hook fixingbracket (no crack);

the lock on the knob must be lockedwith the key removed. The knob cannotbe removed;

the tow hook fixing bracket must befirmly attached to the mounting pipe onthe car. Check by shaking with a hand.

The installation procedure must berepeated if any of these requirements isNOT met.If even only one of the requirements isnot met the tow hook must not be used,since there is risk of causing accidents.Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.The ball head tow hook can befitted/removed manually without theneed for specific tools.IMPORTANT Never use cars or worktools: the mechanism may be damaged.IMPORTANT NOTE Do not release thetow hook when it is attached to a traileror cargo-carrier.IMPORTANT NOTE When driving withouttrailer (or without a cargo-carrier), theball head tow hook must be removed andthe closing cap must always be insertedin the hook mounting pipe. This appliesparticularly if the tow hook reducesvisibility of the number plate or thelighting system.For the electrical connection, a 13 pin12 V DC connection is to be used(CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards).Follow the instructions provided by thevehicle Manufacturer and/or the towhook Manufacturer.

Installing the tow hook

Before inserting the tow hook, you mustremove the access cover to the tow hookfixing position under the rear bumper.

Remove the protection cap from thetow hook mounting pipe fig. 200;

get the tow hook from the luggagecompartment.

When you take out the tow hook, it isusually in the released position ( ). Youcan recognise this position by a crack ofabout 0.2 in (5 mm) between the knoband the tow hook fixing bracket. Inaddition, the red mark on the knob shouldline up with the green mark on thebracket, see fig. 201.Only install the tow hook in theseconditions.

200 07216V0001EM

176

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

If the tow hook locking system is NOTpretensioned before installation, or if it isin the locked position ( ), pretension itby following the “Hook pretensioning”procedure described at the end of thisparagraph.The tow hook is in the locked positionwhen the knob is resting on the bracket(no crack) and the green mark on the knoblines up with the green sign on thebracket fig. 202.

Position the tow hook so that the deltainserts on the tow hook fixing bracket arealigned with the crack between the loweredge and the mounting pipe on the carfig. 203;

push the tow hook upwards and thepretensioned mechanism willautomatically fasten itself in position.

134)

Use the supplied key to close themechanism:

insert the key into the lock on theknob, turn it fully anticlockwise andremove it;

fasten the protection cap onto thelock.

IMPORTANT The key can only beremoved when the locking mechanism isclosed ( ).

IMPORTANT To prevent losing the keywhile towing, DO NOT leave it in the lock.

Remove the ball protection cover fromthe tow hook and attach the trailer.

Connecting the electrical system

To connect the trailer’s electrical system,proceed as described below:

turn the connector mounting bracketdownwards. The bracket is to the left ofthe tow hook mounting pipe fig. 204;

once you have lowered the protectioncover, insert the trailer’s plug into thesocket on the car. To make sure that thetwo connectors fit together perfectly,check that the tab on the plug is alignedwith the notch on the socket fig. 205;

insert the plug fully into the socket andenable the safety lock, if provided.

201 07216V0002EM

202 07216V0003EM

203 07216V0004EM

204 07216V0007EM

177

Removing the tow hook

When the tow hook is no longer needed,disconnect the electrical connections andremove it from its position as describedbelow:

remove the protection cap and insertthe key into the lock fig. 206;

open the lock by turning the key fullyclockwise;

grab the tow hook and move the knob

away from the fixing bracket by pulling itin the direction indicated by the arrow Afig. 207;

to release the hook, turn the knobclockwise B, until the red mark on theknob lines up with the green mark on thebracket;

remove the tow hook from its positionfig. 208;

insert the protection cap into the towhook mounting pipe on the car;

clean the tow hook and remove anyresidues, especially from the ends;

fit the protection cover onto the ball;insert the tow hook into its case and

put it back inside the luggagecompartment;

fasten the cover onto the electricalconnector and push the mount upwards;

fit the cover onto the rear bumper.

Pretensioning the tow hook

If necessary, pretension the lockingmechanism as described below:

remove the cap from the lock on theknob and insert the key provided;

turn the key fully clockwise fig. 209;pull the knob out in the direction

indicated by the arrow A;turn the knob fully clockwise B. The

locking mechanism will remainpretensioned even when the knob isreleased.

205 07216V0008EM

206 07216V0009EM

207 07216V0010EM

208 07216V0011EM

178

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

The tow hook, with pretensioned lockingmechanism (knob position ), is nowready to be installed on the car.

ELECTRICALLYDRIVENTOWHOOK

The tow hook and the socket forconnecting the trailer lights are fixed toeach other and are located behind therear bumper when they are not in use.

During operation, the position of thewhole device (hook plus electrical socket)

is controlled by button 1 fig. 211 on theright-hand luggage compartment trim.

Its status can be changed from unused tooperational only if:

the handbrake is engaged or the shiftlever is in the P position;

the engine is off;the tailgate is open.

There is a LED on the button 1, which maybe in one of the following states:

LED off: indicates that at least one ofthe above conditions is not met, or thetrailer light wiring is connected to thesocket.

LED flashing: indicates that the towhook is moving or that the system mustbe initialised;

LED on fixed: indicates that the towhook can be moved.Safe opening and closing of the tow hookis guaranteed by a protection systemthat can stop and reverse its movement

when it encounters an obstacle whileopening or closing.The system must be initialised after thebattery has been disconnected, themovement has been blocked by aphysical obstacle or if the safety systemhas intervened three timesconsecutively.

IMPORTANT When the tow hook is not inuse, put it in the closed position.

System initialisation

In the conditions of movement describedabove, press the movement button 1 forat least 10 seconds. The LED will turn onto confirm the initialisation.

209 07216V0012EM

210 07216V0015EM

211 04056V0060EM

179

ASSEMBLYSCHEDULE

The tow hook structure must be secured to the body in the points shown in the fig. 212.Dimension D (see the figure): with the vehicle fully loaded: 330.35 mm, with the vehicle unladen: 350 to 420 mm

IMPORTANT Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership to install a tow hook.

212 07226V0040EM

180

STA

RTI

NG

AN

DD

RIV

ING

WARNING

132) The ABS with which the car is equippedwill not control the braking system of thetrailer. Particular caution is required onslippery roads.133)Do not, under any circumstances,modify the vehicle's braking system tocontrol the trailer breaking system.Thetowing braking system must be completelyindependent of the vehicle's hydraulicsystem.134) To avoid damage to your hands, keepthem away from the knob while inserting thetow hook into position on the car bracket.

181

This page is intentionally left blank

A punctured tyre or a burnt-out bulb?At times, a problem may interfere with our journey.

The pages on emergencies can help you to deal with criticalsituations independently and with calm.

In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephonenumber found in the Warranty Booklet.

You can also use the universal, national or international freephonenumber to find your nearest Alfa Romeo Dealership.

IN AN EMERGENCYHAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184REPLACING A BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184REPLACING FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190CHANGING A WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197TIRE REPAIR KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200RUN FLAT TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206EMERGENCY REFUELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206ENGINE OVERHEATING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206BROKEN-DOWN VEHICLE TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207TOWING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

HAZARDWARNING LIGHTS

CONTROL

54)

Press the fig. 213 button to switch thehazard warning lights on/off.When the hazard warning lights are on,the and warning lights flash.When you need to move away from thevehicle to look for help, the hazardwarning lights will continue flashing evenif the ignition device is in the STOPposition.

IMPORTANT The use of hazard warninglights is governed by the highway code ofthe country you are driving in: complywith legal requirements.

Emergency braking

The hazard lights are switched on andwarning lights and appear on theinstrument panel in case of emergencybraking and according to the mode

selected by the “Alfa DNA™” selector.When the "Alfa DNA™" selector is inposition "n" or "a", the activationthreshold of the hazard warning lights ishigher; on the other hand, in position "d"the sensitivity of the activation is lowerthan that in the "n" and "a" modes.The lights switch off automatically whenemergency braking ceases. For furtherdetails about the emergency braking, seethe "Active safety systems" paragraph inthe "Safety" chapter.

IMPORTANT

54)A prolonged use of the hazard warninglights may discharge the battery.

REPLACINGABULB135) 136) 137)

55)

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONSBefore replacing a bulb check the

contacts for oxidation;replace blown bulbs with others of the

same type and power;after replacing a headlight bulb,

always check its alignment;when a light is not working, check that

the corresponding fuse is intact beforechanging the bulb. For the location offuses, refer to the paragraph "If a fuseblows" in this chapter.

IMPORTANT In some particular climateconditions such as low teperature,humidity or after washing the car, a thincondensation layer may form on theinternal surfaces of the front and rearheadlights. This phenomenon willdisappear after switching on theheadlights.213 08016V0001EM

184

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

TYPESOFBULBS

The car is equipped with the following bulbs

Glass bulbs (type A): they are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-type bulbs (type B): to remove them from their holder, press thebulb and turn it anticlockwise, then extract it.

Tubular bulbs (type C): release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen bulbs (type D): to remove the bulb, turn the connector to the sideand pull it out.

Halogen bulbs (type E): to remove the bulb, turn it anticlockwise.

Xenon gas discharge bulb (type F): to remove the bulb, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.

185

Light bulbs Type Power Figure reference

Main beam headlights, front side lights/daylight running lights (DRL) (*) H15 55/15W D

Dipped beam headlights (*) H7 55W D

Front direction indicators (*) PY24W 24W B

Fog lights(*) H11 55W E

Main beam/dipped beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35W F

Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1W C

Glove compartment light W5W 4W A

Boot ceiling light W5W 5W A

Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5W A

(*) Only for basic version headlight with halogen main beam/dipped beam headlights

186

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

REPLACINGANEXTERNAL BULB

IMPORTANT Only replace the bulb whenthe engine is off. Also ensure that theengine is cold, to prevent the risk ofburns.

Front light cluster with mainbeam/dipped beam halogen headlights

Dipped beam headlights

To change the bulb of these lights,proceed as follows:

working inside the enginecompartment fig. 214;

remove the cover fig. 215;

remove the bulb/connector assemblyfrom the headlight body fig. 216;

remove the bulb by sliding it off theconnector;

install the new bulb, making sure it iscorrectly inserted in the connector;

then insert the bulb/connectorassembly in the housing on the headlightbody and make sure that it is lockedcorrectly;

remount the lid and cover, tighteningthe fixing bolts.

Main beam headlights

To change the bulb of these lights,proceed as follows:

working inside the enginecompartment fig. 217;

remove the cover fig. 218;

turn the bulb, bulb holder and

214 08026V0023EM

215 08026V0002EM

216 08026V0003EM

217 08026V0023EM

218 08026V0004EM

187

connector assembly anticlockwise andthen slide it off the headlight bodyfig. 219;

remove the bulb by sliding it off thebulb holder;

install the new bulb, making sure it iscorrectly inserted in the bulb holder;

then insert the bulb, bulb holder andconnector assembly in the housing on theheadlight body and turn it clockwise,making sure that it is locked correctly;

refit the protective cover.

Direction indicators

To change the bulb of these lights,proceed as follows:

working inside the enginecompartment fig. 220;

remove the cover by turning it fig. 221;

release the bulb, bulb holder andconnector assembly and then slide it offthe headlight body fig. 222;

remove the bulb by sliding it off thebulb holder;

install the new bulb, making sure it iscorrectly inserted in the bulb holder;

then insert the bulb, bulb holder andconnector assembly in the housing on theheadlight body and turn it clockwise,making sure that it is locked correctly;

refit the protective cover.

Fog lights

(where provided)To replace the fog lights, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership

Front light cluster with mainbeam/dipped beam Xenon gasdischarge headlights

To replace the bulbs of the main beamheadlights/dipped headlights contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership

219 08026V0005EM

220 08026V0023EM

221 08026V0006EM

222 08026V0007EM

188

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

REPLACINGAN INTERNAL BULB

Courtesy mirror light

To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:lift the cover 1 fig. 223 of the mirror

and extract the lens, levering at one ofthe two recesses;

change the bulb 2, releasing it from theside contacts, then insert the new bulb,making sure that it is correctly fastenedbetween the contacts;

refit the lens, inserting it firstly on oneside and then pressing on the other sideuntil it clicks into place;

finally, lower cover 1 of the mirror.

Glove compartment light

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:open the glove compartment;remove the courtesy light working in

the point shown by the arrow fig. 224;

open protection and replace the bulb,fig. 225;

close the cover on the lens;refit courtesy light, inserting it firstly

on one side and then pressing on theother side until it clicks into place;

then replace the glove compartment,ensuring that it locks.

Luggage compartment courtesy lights

To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:open the boot and extract the

courtesy light working in the point shownby the arrow, fig. 226;

open protection and replace the bulb,fig. 227;

close the cover on the lens;refit the ceiling light in the correct

223 08026V0008EM

224 08026V0009EM

225 08026S0011EM

226 08026V0010EM

227 08026S0011EM

189

position, inserting it firstly on one sideand then pressing on the other side untilit clicks into place.

Puddle lights on door panel

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:open the door and extract the ceiling

light, working in the point shown by thearrow, fig. 228;

open protection and replace the bulb,fig. 229;

close the cover on the lens;refit the ceiling light in the correct

position, inserting it firstly on one sideand then pressing on the other side untilit clicks into place.

WARNING

135)Before replacing the bulb, wait for theexhaust ducts to cool down: DANGER OFSCALDING!136)Modifications or repairs to the electricsystem that are not carried out properly ordo not take the system technicalspecifications into account can causemalfunctions leading to the risk of fire.137)Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas,in the case of breakage they may burstcausing glass fragments to be projectedoutwards.

IMPORTANT

55)Halogen bulbs must be handled holdingthe metallic part only. Touching thetransparent part of the bulb with yourfingers may reduce the intensity of theemitted light and even reduce the lifespan ofthe bulb. In the event of accidental contact,wipe the bulb with a cloth moistened withalcohol and let the bulb dry.

REPLACING FUSES

GENERAL INFORMATION

138) 139) 140) 141) 142)

56) 57)

Fuses protect the electrical system: theyintervene (blow) in the event of a failureor improper action on the system.When a device does not work, check thecondition of its protection fuse: thefilament 1 must be intact. If it is not,replace the blown fuse with another withthe same amperage (same colour).2 = intact fuse.3 = fuse with damaged filament.fig. 230 : MINI fuse.

fig. 231: J-CASE fuse.

228 08026V0012EM

229 08026S0011EM

230 08036S0001EM

190

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

Fuse extracting pliers

To replace a fuse, use the pliers hookedto the boot fusebox cover fig. 232.

Grab the pliers from the upper tabs,press them and extract the pliers pullingupwards.

The pliers fig. 233 have two differentends, specifically designed to remove thedifferent types of fuses present in thevehicle:

1: MINI fuse;2: J-CASE fuse.

After use, refit the pliers in position,proceeding as follows:

grasp the pliers from the upper tabs;press the pliers in their housing,

pushing downwards, until they click intoplace.

FUSE LOCATION

The fuses, which can be replaced by theuser, are grouped in two boxes below thepassenger side foot board and inside theboot.

CONTROLUNITUNDERPASSENGERSIDE FOOTBOARD

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:lift the top end of the footboard 1

fig. 234 on the passenger side, pulling itto release the 2 buttons;

remove the panel 2 fig. 235 extractingit downward, after unscrewing the twofixing hooks;

231 08036S0002EM

232 08036V0053EM

233 08036S0005EM

234 08036V0010EM

191

the fuses are freely accessible on thecontrol unit.The number identifying the electricalcomponent corresponding to each fuse isshown on the control unit cover.After replacing the fuse, make sure thatpanel 2 and footboard 1 are correctlylocked.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTFUSE BOX

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:remove the cover located on the right

side of the compartment;remove the control unit cover fig. 236;

The number identifying the electricalcomponent corresponding to each fuse isshown on the cover.After replacing a fuse, make sure thatyou have closed cover correctly.

235 08036V0011EM

236 08036V0014EM

192

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

CONTROLUNITUNDERPASSENGERSIDE FOOTBOARD

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE

Front electric window (driver side) F33 25

Front electric window (passenger side) F34 25

Power supply for Connect system, Climate Control system, Alarm,Electric door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port F36 15

Power Lock Device (Driver side door unlocking - whereprovided)/Door unlocking, Central locking F38 20

Windscreen washer pump F43 20

237 08036S0013EM

193

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE

Rear left electric window F47 25

Rear right electric window F48 25

Heater rear window coil, cigar lighter F94 15

194

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTFUSE BOX

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE

Tow hook module (TTM/TTEBM) F01 40

Hi-Fi system F08 30

I-Drive / USB Socket / AUX / USB Charger F21 10

KL15/a 12V Power socket in the luggage compartment F22 20

Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F1 20

Trailer light control unit power supply (+30) F2 15

238 08036V0015EM

195

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERE

Trailer socket (only EMEA) (+30) F3 10

Tow bar (+15) F4 10

196

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

WARNING

138)Never replace a fuse with another witha higher amp rating; DANGER OF FIRE.139)Before replacing a fuse, make surethat the ignition device is at STOP and thatall devices are switched off and/ordisconnected.140)Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership if asafety system (airbags, brakes),transmission system (engine, gearbox) orsteering system general protection fuseblows.141) If a fuse blows again, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.142) If a general protective fuse(MAXI-FUSE, MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE)blows, contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT

56)Never replace a fuse with metal wires oranything else.57) If it is necessary to wash the enginecompartment, take care not to directly hitthe fuse box and the window wiper motorswith the water jet.

CHANGINGAWHEEL

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

The car is equipped with the "Tire RepairKit": see the “Tire Repair Kit” paragraphfor how to use this device.As an alternative to the “Tire Repair Kit”,the car may be requested with aspace-saver wheel: see the instructionson the following pages for changing thewheel.

JACK

143) 144)

Please note that:the jack weighs about 4.4 lb (2 kg);the jack requires no adjustment;the jack cannot be repaired and in the

event of a fault it must be replaced byanother genuine one;

no tool other than its cranking devicemay be fitted on the jack.Jack maintenance:

prevent any dirt from depositing onthe "worm screw";

keep the "worm screw" lubricated;never modify the jack.

Conditions in which not to use the jack:temperatures below −40°F (-40°C);on sandy or muddy ground;on uneven ground;on steep slopes in extreme weather

conditions: thunderstorms, typhoons,hurricanes, blizzards, storms, etc.;

in direct contact with the engine or forrepairs under the car;

on boats.

CHANGINGPROCEDURE

145) 146) 147) 148) 149) 150) 151)

58) 59)

Proceed as follows:stop the car in a position that is not

dangerous for oncoming traffic whereyou can change the wheel safely.

The ground must be flat andsufficiently compact;

stop the engine, engage the hazardwarning lights and the parking brake;

engage P (Park) mode;wear the reflective safety jacket

(compulsory by law) before getting out ofthe car;

open the luggage compartment and liftup the mat using the handle;

when the situation dictates it (for yourown safety and to comply with theregulations in force in the country whereyou are), take the warning triangle andposition it at a suitable distance from thecar;

unscrew the locking device 1 fig. 239,take out the space-saver wheel and theinflation compressor;

197

remove the damaged wheel by takingthe wrench 3 fig. 240 and loosening thefixing bolts by about one turn; Shake thecar to help detach the rim from the wheelhub;

position the jack 4 fig. 241 under thecar, near the wheel to be changed, takingcare not to damage the plasticaerodynamic guard;

lift the extension lever 2 on the wrench3;

turn the extension lever 2 clockwiseuntil the round pin on the jack engages inthe hole in the lifting block located about6 in (15 cm) from the outside edge of thebody. The lifting points 5 can be seen infig. 241 marked by a triangle , visibleon the aerodynamic guard fig. 242;

warn anybody nearby that the car isabout to be raised;

they should stay clear and they shouldbe warned not to touch the car until it isback on the ground;

turn the extension lever 2 until thewheel is a few centimetres off theground;

remove the five wheel fastening boltsand take the wheel off;

make sure the contact surfacesbetween space-saver wheel and hub areclean so that the fastening bolts will notcome loose;

fit the space-saver wheel by insertingthe first bolt for two threads into the holeclosest to the valve;

take the wrench 3 and fully tighten thefixing bolts;

inflate the space-saver wheel byremoving the cap from its inflation valveand screwing on the compressor inflation

239 08066V0010EM

240 08066V0012EM

241 08066V0013EM

242 09056V0001EM

198

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

hose fitting 6 fig. 243;make sure that the switch 8 on the

compressor 6 is in the 0 (off) position,open the rear hatch and insert the pluginto the power socket in the luggagecompartment or on the central tunnel andstart the engine. Put the switch 8 in the I(on) position;

inflate the space-saver wheel to apressure of 43.5 psi (3 bar);

IMPORTANT To conserve the batterycharge, it is recommended to leave thevehicle running for the entire inflationprocess.To obtain a more accurate reading, it isadvisable to check the pressure of thespace-saver wheel on the pressure gauge7 with the compressor off.The compressor was designedexclusively for inflating the space-saverwheel. Do not use it for inflatingmattresses, rafts, etc.

operate the extension lever 2 on thejack 4 to lower the car;

then remove the jack 4;use the wrench 3 to fully tighten the

bolts, passing alternately from one boltto the diagonally opposite one.When replacing an alloy wheel, it isadvisable to place it upside down, withthe aesthetic part facing upwards.

WARNING

143) The jack may be used to replacewheels only on the car that it comes with orother cars of the same model. Never use thejack for other purposes, such as lifting othervehicle models. Never use it for repairoperations under the vehicle. Incorrectpositioning of the jack may cause the vehicleto fall. Do not use the jack for loads higherthan the one shown on its label. Never installsnow chains on the space-saver wheel; if afront tyre (driving wheel) is punctured andyou need to use snow chains, use a standardwheel from the rear axle and install thespace-saver wheel on the rear axle. In thisway, with two normal front drive wheels, it ispossible to use snow chains.

144) The jack is a tool developed anddesigned only for changing a wheel, if a tyregets punctured or damaged, on the vehiclewith which it is supplied or on other vehiclesof the same model. Any other use, e.g. to jackup other vehicle models or different things,is strictly prohibited. Never use formaintenance or repair activities under thecar or to exchange the summer/winterwheels and vice versa. Never go under theraised vehicle. Should it be necessary towork under the vehicle, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership. Incorrect positioning ofthe jack may cause the raised vehicle to fall:use only in the positions indicated. Do notuse the jack for loads higher than the oneshown on its label. Never start the enginewith vehicle raised. If the vehicle is raisedmore than necessary, everything canbecome more unstable, with the risk of thevehicle dropping violently. Thus, lift thevehicle only as needed in order to access thespare wheel.145) The space-saver wheel is specific foryour car. Do not use it on cars of differentmodels. Do not use space-saver wheels ofdifferent models on your car. Thespace-saver wheel must only be used in theevent of an emergency. Never use it for morethan strictly necessary and never exceed80 km/h. On the space-saver wheel there isan orange label, summarising the mainwarnings regarding space-saver wheelusage restrictions. Never remove or coverthe label. Never apply any hub cap to thespace-saver wheel.

243 08066V0011EM

199

146)Alert other drivers that the car isstationary in compliance with localregulations: hazard warning lights, warningtriangle, etc. Any passengers on boardshould leave the car, especially if it is heavilyladen. Passengers should stay away fromon-coming traffic while the wheel is beingchanged. On hills or uneven roads, usechocks or appropriate objects to block thewheels of the vehicle.147) If left in the passenger compartment,the punctured wheel and jack constitute aserious risk to the safety of occupants in theevent of accidents or sharp braking.Therefore, always place both the jack andpunctured wheel in the dedicated housing inthe boot.148) It is extremely dangerous to attemptto change a wheel on the side of the vehiclenext to the driving lane: make sure that thevehicle is at a sufficient distance from theroad, to avoid being run over.149)Alert other drivers that the car isstationary in compliance with localregulations: hazard warning lights, warningtriangle, etc. Any passengers on boardshould leave the car, especially if it is heavilyladen. Passengers should stay away fromon-coming traffic while the wheel is beingchanged.150)Never tamper with the inflation valve.Never introduce tools of any kind betweenthe rim and the tyre. Check tyre andspace-saver wheel pressures regularly,complying with the values given in the"Technical specifications" chapter.

151) The spare wheel must only be used inan emergency. Never use it for more thanstrictly necessary and never exceed80 km/h. On the wheel there is an orangesticker, summarising the main warningsregarding wheel usage restrictions. Neverremove or cover the label. The label containsthe following indications in four languages:"Warning! For temporary use only! 80 km/hmax! Replace with standard wheel as soonas possible. Never cover this indication."Never apply a wheel cap on the wheel. Thedriving characteristics of the car will bemodified with the wheel fitted. Avoid violentacceleration and braking, abrupt steeringand fast cornering. Have the wheel repairedand refitted as soon as possible. Using twoor more spare wheels at the same time isforbidden. Do not apply grease to the boltthreads before fitting: they could comeunscrewed.

IMPORTANT

58)When turning the jack handle make surethat it can turn freely without scraping yourhand against the ground. The movingcomponents of the jack ("worm screw" andjoints) can also cause injuries: avoid touchingthem. If you come into contact withlubricating grease, clean yourselfthoroughly.59)Contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership assoon as possible to have the correcttightening of the wheel bolts checked.

TIRE REPAIRKIT

DESCRIPTION

152) 153) 154) 155) 156) 157) 158) 159) 160) 161)

60)

3)

If a tyre is punctured, proceed as followsto use the Tire Repair Kit:

stop the vehicle in a position that is notdangerous for oncoming traffic whereyou can repair the tyre safely, as far aspossible from the side of the road;

turn on the hazard warning lights;engage the electric parking brake;engage P (Park) mode;stop the engine and put on the

reflective safety jacket (for your ownsafety and to comply with the regulationsin force in the country where you are)before getting out of the car.

when the situation requires it (for yourown safety and to comply with theregulations in force in the country whereyou are), take the warning triangle fromthe luggage compartment and position itat a suitable distance from the car.To access the Tire Repair Kit (containermarked with the Alfa Romeo logo), openthe luggage compartment and lift theload platform fig. 244.

200

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

The Tire Repair Kit consists of:a cannister 1 fig. 245 containing the

sealant, equipped with filling hose 2a compressor 4 complete with

pressure gauge, connectors and adhesivelabel 3 with the wording “< 80 km/h” to beplaced in a clearly visible position (e.g. onthe dashboard) after repairing the tyre.There is also an information label on thecompressor, to be referred to for quickand correct use of the Tire Repair Kit;

a pair of protective gloves;some adaptors, for inflating different

elements.

IMPORTANT The sealing liquid iseffective for outside temperaturesbetween -40°F and 122°F (-40°C and+50°C). The sealant has an expiry date.

REPAIR PROCEDURE

152) 153) 154) 155) 156) 157) 158) 159) 160)

Proceed as follows:engage the electric parking brake;engage P (Park) mode;put on the reflective safety jacket (for

your own safety and to comply with theregulations in force in the country whereyou are) before getting out of the car.

when the situation dictates it (for yourown safety and to comply with theregulations in force in the country whereyou are), take the warning triangle andposition it at a suitable distance from thecar;

Put on the gloves, connect the hose 5fig. 246 to the cannister 1 with the

connector 6. Unscrew the tyre valve capand screw the filler hose ring nut 2 ontothe tyre valve;

make sure that the switch 7fig. 247 on the compressor 4 is in the 0(off) position;

insert the plug into the socket in thepassenger compartment or in the

244 04206V0004EM 245 08066V0002EM

246 08066V0004EM

247 08066V0005EM

201

luggage compartment fig. 248 and startthe engine;

start the compressor by putting theswitch 7 fig. 247 in the I (on) position;

inflate the tyre to a pressure of atleast 32 psi (2.2 bar). In order to obtain amore precise reading, check the pressurevalue on pressure gauge 8 with thecompressor off;

if a pressure of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)is not reached within 15 minutes, the tyreis too damaged to be repaired. Do notcontinue driving, but contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership;

after having driven for about 5 miles(8 km), stop, engage the electric parkingbrake and recheck the tyre pressure;

if the measured pressure is unchanged(32 psi (2.2 bar)), continue driving to anAlfa Romeo Dealership;

if the measured pressure is between19 and 30.5 psi (1.3 and 2.1 bar), restore

pressure to 32 psi (2.2 bar), continuedriving to an Alfa Romeo Dealership;

if the measured pressure is lower than19 psi (1.3 bar), the tyre is too damagedto be repaired. Do not continue driving,but contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT Only use original tyre repaircannisters, which can be purchased at anAlfa Romeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT To conserve the batterycharge, it is recommended to leave thevehicle running for the entire inflationprocess.

CHECKINGANDRESTORINGTYREPRESSURE

The compressor can also be used tocheck and, if necessary, restore the tyrepressure.Proceed as follows:

make sure that switch 7 fig. 249 is inthe 0 (off) position;

connect the hose 5 directly to thevalve on the tyre to be inflated;

insert the plug into the socket in thepassenger compartment or in theluggage compartment and start theengine;

start the compressor by putting theswitch 7 to I (on). As soon as the correctpressure is reached, put the switch to 0(off).

If the tyre is over inflated, reduce thepressure by pressing the button 9 andreleasing it when the correct value isreached.

WARNING

152)Punctures on the sides of the tire maynot be repaired. Do not use theTire Repairkit if the tyre was damaged as a result ofbeing used when underinflated.153)Wear the protective gloves providedwith theTire Repair kit.154)Apply the adhesive label where it canbe easily seen by the driver as a reminderthat the tyre has been treated with theTireRepair Kit. Drive carefully, particularly onbends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoid suddenacceleration or braking.155)You must always indicate that the tyrewas repaired using theTire Repair Kit.

248 08066V0006EM

249 08066V0008EM

202

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

156)Repairs are not possible in the case ofdamage to the wheel rim (bad groovedistortion causing air loss). Do not removeforeign bodies (screws or nails) from thetyre.157)Never operate the compressor forlonger than 20 consecutive minutes. Risk ofoverheating. TheTire Repair Kit is notsuitable for definitive repairs, so therepaired tyres may only be used temporarily.158)As required by current regulations, theinformation on chemical substances for theprotection of human health and theenvironment and on the safe use of thesealing fluid are on the cannister label.Compliance with the indications on the labelis an essential condition to ensure the safetyand the effectiveness of the product.Remember to carefully read the label beforeuse; the user of the product is responsiblefor any damages caused by improper use.The sealing fluid has an expiry date. Replacethe bottle if the sealant has expired.159) If the pressure falls below 1.3 bar, donot drive any further: theTire Repair Kitcannot guarantee proper seal because thetyre is too damaged. Contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.160) TheTire Repair Kit provide atemporary repair, therefore the tyre must beexamined and repaired by a specialist assoon as possible. The sealant is suitable foruse at temperatures in the range from −40°Cto +50°C.

161) Indicate the presence of the stationarycar in accordance with current regulations:hazard warning lights, warning triangle, etc.Those on board should get out of the vehicleand wait for the wheel to be repaired awayfrom the threat posed by the traffic. Ifparked on a slope or rough surface, chockthe wheels with wedges or other suitabledevices (for the correct procedure forparking the car safely, refer to the "Parking"paragraph in the "Starting and driving"chapter).

IMPORTANT

60) In the event of a puncture caused byforeign bodies, the kit may be used to repairtyres showing damage on the tyre tread upto max. 6mm diameter.

IMPORTANT

3)Dispose of the bottle and the sealantliquid properly. Have them disposed of incompliance with national and localregulations.

RUNFLATTYRES(where provided)

162) 163) 164)

"Run Flat" tyres allow you to maintaincontrol of the car after a puncture and tocontinue driving safely for about 50 mi(80 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).The reinforced tyre wall retains its shapeand supports the weight of the car in theevent of pressure loss.Cars equipped with Run Flat tyres areNOT provided with Tire Repair Kits.For repair, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership as soon as possible.

WARNING

162)Do not exceed the maximum distanceor speed (80 km - 80 km/h) in the event ofpressure loss-puncture.163)A pressure loss alters the drivingbehaviour of the car, for example, causingless directional stability when braking,longer braking distances and alteredsteering geometry. Therefore, adjust yourdriving style to avoid sudden turns orobstacles such as pavements and potholes.164)Do not exceed 60 km/h when drivingwith an especially heavy trailer.

203

JUMPSTARTING

If the battery is flat, a jump starting canbe performed using the battery and thecables of another vehicle, or using anauxiliary battery. In all cases, the batteryused must have a capacity equal to or alittle higher than the flat one.Jump starting may be dangerous ifcarried out incorrectly: carefully followthe procedures described below.

61)

IMPORTANTNOTES

Do not use an auxiliary battery or anyother source of external supply with avoltage above 12 V: the battery, thestarter, the alternator and the electricalsystem of the vehicle could be damaged.Do not attempt jump starting if thebattery is frozen. The battery could breakand explode!

REMOTEBATTERYCONNECTIONPOLES

To facilitate the operation, the remotepoles of the battery for the jump startingcan be found in the engine compartment:the battery, on the other hand, is placedin the luggage compartment.The negative terminal (-) fig. 250 fig. 8 ispositioned next to the right bonnet lock.

You can access the positive terminal (+)by lifting the protective flap fig. 251.

The pole is shown in fig. 252.

To carry out the operation, you need tohave the correct cables to connect theauxiliary battery to the remote poles ofthe flat battery. Usually, these cableshave terminals at the ends and areidentified by different sheath colours(red = positive, black = negative).

JUMPSTARTING

165) 166) 167)

Proceed as follows:switch off all electrical devices in the

vehicle;engage the parking brake, actiate P

(Park) mode and put the starter switch inthe STOP position;

should you be using the battery ofanother vehicle, park the other vehiclewithin the range of the cables used forthe connection, operate the parkingbrake and ensure that its ignition is off.

250 08076V0006EM

251 08076V0002EM

252 08076V0001EM

204

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

IMPORTANT If the auxiliary battery isinstalled on another vehicle, check thatthere is no accidental contact of metalparts between the two vehicles, since anearth connection may result, with the riskof serious injury to any people who maybe nearby.

IMPORTANT If the procedure below iscarried out incorrectly, it can causesevere injury to people or damage therecharging system of one or bothvehicles. Carefully follow the instructionsgiven below.

Cable connection

62)

Proceed as follows to carry out a jumpstarting:

connect a terminal on the end of thepositive cable from the remote positivepole (+) of the car with flat battery;

connect the terminal on the oppositeend of the positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) pole of the auxiliary battery;

connect a negative cable end terminalto the negative (-) pole of the auxiliarybattery;

connect the terminal on the oppositeend of the negative (-) cable to the earthpoint (-) on the vehicle with the batteryflat;

start the engine of the car with anauxiliary battery, let it run for someminutes at idle and then start the engineof the car with flat battery. In case a

portable battery is used, before startingthe vehicle, wait a few seconds aftercompleting the connection.

Cable disconnection

Once the engine is started, remove theconnection cables in reverse sequence,as shown below:

disconnect the negative cable endterminal (-) from the earth point (-) of thecar with flat battery;

disconnect the terminal on theopposite end of the negative cable fromthe negative (-) pole of the auxiliarybattery;

disconnect the terminal on theopposite end of the positive (+) cablefrom the positive (+) pole of the auxiliarybattery;

disconnect the terminal on the end ofthe positive cable from the remotepositive pole (+) of the car with flatbattery.

BUMPSTARTING

Never, under any circumstances, jumpstart the engine by pushing, towing orcoasting downhill.

IMPORTANT Any accessories (e.g. mobilephones, etc.) connected to the vehiclepower sockets draw current even if theyare not used. These devices, if leftconnected too much time with engine off,may cause the battery to drain with

following reduction of its life and/orfailure to start the engine.

WARNING

165)Do not get too close to the radiatorcooling fan: the electric fan may start;danger of injury. Scarves, ties and otherloose clothing might be pulled by movingparts.166)Remove any metal objects (e.g. rings,watches, bracelets), that might cause anaccidental electrical contact and causeserious injury.167) The batteries contain acid that canburn skin or eyes. Batteries producehydrogen, which is easily flammable andexplosive. Thus keep away flames or deviceswhich may cause sparks.

IMPORTANT

61)Never use a fast battery-charger tostart the engine as this could damage theelectronic systems of your vehicle,particularly the ignition and engine fuelsupply control units.62)Do not connect the cable to the negativeterminal (–) of the flat battery. The followingspark could lead to battery explosion andcause serious harm. Only use the specificearth point; do not use any other exposedmetallic part.

205

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION

Depending on the type and violence ofthe impact, the control unit of the ORCoccupant protection systems determineswhether to activate the airbags and thefront seat belt pretensioners andwhether to immediately interrupt thecurrent from the batteries to the supplypumps and to the devices that operatethe engine. The power from the battery isinterrupted by "skipping" the pyrotechnicfuse placed on the fusebox next to thepositive pole of the battery.When the fuse is "skipped", only someservices, necessary for the safety of thecar (eg: door locks, anti-theft device, etc.),remain powered.

IMPORTANT After the impact, carefullycheck the car for fuel leaks, for instancein the engine compartment, under the caror near the tank area.

IMPORTANT Contact an Alfa RomeoDealership to have the system checked.

EMERGENCYREFUELLING

The refuelling after an emergency isdescribed in paragraph "Refuelling thevehicle", chapter "Starting and driving".

ENGINEOVERHEATING

Travelling on roads with a lot of traffic,frequent stops and engine restarts, andin the presence of exceptional climateconditions, phenomenons of engineoverheating may present signalled by theswitching on of the "Excessive enginecoolant temperature" warning light onthe instrument panel, along with adedicated message (see the descriptionin paragraph "Warning lights andmessages" in the "Knowing theinstrument panel" chapter).

IMPORTANT An overheated coolingsystem can damage the vehicle. In thecase of overheating, pull over and stopthe vehicle. Keep the engine at idling withair conditioning off until the temperaturedecreases. If temperature does notdecrease, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership as soon as possible.Some further measures to overcomeexceptional engine overheating arereported below:

if the air conditioner is on, turn it off.The air conditioning system contributesto overheating of the engine coolingsystem;

adjust passenger compartmentheating to the maximum, by turning airdistribution toward the floor or outsidethe vehicle, if external weatherconditions allow for open side windows;then activate the fan at maximum speed.In this way the heater will operate as an

206

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

additional radiator, contributing todissipate the heat from the enginecooling system.

IMPORTANT Coolant (antifreeze) exitingfrom the engine or vapour exiting fromthe radiator can cause serious burns. Ifvapour is seen or heard coming from theengine compartment, do not open thebonnet until the radiator has had enoughtime to cool down. Never try to removethe plug when the radiator is hot.

BROKEN-DOWNVEHICLETOWING

This paragraph describes the conditionsand methods to transport and tow abroken-down car with a breakdown truck.

IMPORTANT The vehicle should betransported with all four wheels liftedfrom the ground on the platform of aroadside assistance vehicle. Avoid towingwith only the front (or rear) wheels lifted.When towing with only the front (or rear)wheels lifted, in addition to damaging thebody, it could damage the gearbox.

IMPORTANT To carry out the operation,the assistance vehicle must be equippedwith an appropriate movement/liftingequipment to avoid damaging the vehicle.For loading on the towing vehicle, attachthe tow equipment to the main structuralcomponents of the vehicle and not to thebumpers or other related brackets.

IMPORTANT Comply with the regulationsregarding assistance and vehicle towingin force in each country.

IMPORTANT When the vehicle is securedon the platform of a breakdown truck, donot use the components of the front andrear suspension as fastening points.Towing in an incorrect manner maydamage the vehicle.The operators of the assistance vehiclemust be informed with regard to thevehicle's minimum height from ground inorder to avoid contact between the ends

of the bumpers with the equipment of thebreakdown truck.fig. 253 illustrates the front and rearattachment corners of the vehicle, to betaken into consideration when loadingthe vehicle on the assistance vehicle.

AWD versions

A: 21.7°B: 18.3°

RWD versions

A: 20.6°B: 18.8°

253 08126V0001EM

207

REARWHEELDRIVE (RWD)VERSIONS

It is recommended to tow the vehiclewith all four wheels lifted from theground on the platform of a roadsideassistance vehicle.If a breakdown truck with platform is notavailable, the vehicle must be towed withthe rear wheels LIFTED from the ground(using a trailer or special equipmentallowing lifting of the rear wheels).

IMPORTANT Towing vehicles withoutcomplying with the above mentionedprescriptions can cause serious damageto the vehicle.

FOUR-WHEELDRIVE (AWD)VERSIONS

It is recommended to tow the vehiclewith all four wheels lifted from theground on the platform of a roadsideassistance vehicle.

IMPORTANT Avoid lifting the front (orrear) wheels only, using a trailer or vehiclethat allows lifting the wheels of one axleonly. Lifting the front (or rear) wheelsonly while towing might damage thetransmission or the transfer unit.

IMPORTANT If a vehicle is towed withoutcomplying with the above requirements,the transmission and/or the transfer unitmight be seriously damaged. Damage dueto incorrect towing is not covered bywarranty.

TOWINGTHEVEHICLE

168) 169)

In order to be able to tow the vehicle,which has been in an accident or hasbroken down, on the road surface andonly for short distances, a tow hook isprovided in the tools container inside theboot.Proceed as follows to use the tow hook:

unhook the cap fig. 254 on the front orrear bumper (where provided)fig. 255 pressing on the upper part;

take the tow hook from its housing inthe boot and carefully clean the threadedhousing on the vehicle before using it;

tighten the vehicle's tow hook in itsplace for about 11 turns.

IMPORTANT The largest work angle ofthe cable to fix on the tow hook must notexceed 15°, as shown in fig. 256.

254 08136V0001EM

255 08136V0003EM

256 08136V0002EM

208

INA

NEM

ERG

ENC

Y

WARNING

168)Move the ignition device to ON andthen to STOP, without opening the door.169) The brake servo and theelectromechanical power steering will notwork while the vehicle is being towed. Youwill therefore need to apply more force onthe brake pedal and steering wheel. Do notuse flexible ropes when towing, and avoidjerky movements. During towing, make surethat the trailer hitch does not damage anycomponents it is touching.When towing thecar, you must comply with all specific trafficregulations and adopt an appropriatedriving behaviour. Do not start the enginewhile towing the car. Before tightening thering, clean the threaded housing thoroughly.Make sure that the ring is fully screwed intothe housing before towing the car.

209

This page is intentionally left blank

Correct servicing permits the performance of the vehicle to bemaintained over time, as well as limiting running costs and

safeguarding the efficiency of the safety systems.This chapter explains how.

SERVICINGANDCARESCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212ENGINE COMPARTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219BATTERY RECHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226SERVICING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227LIFTING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233WHEELS AND TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234CAR INACTIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236BODYWORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

SCHEDULEDSERVICING

Correct servicing is crucial forguaranteeing a long life for the vehicleunder the best conditions.For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planneda series of checks and maintenanceoperations at fixed distance intervalsand, for versions/markets, whereprovided, at fixed time intervals, asdescribed in the Service Schedule.Before each service, it is alwaysnecessary to carefully follow theinstructions in the Scheduled ServicingPlan (e.g. periodically check level offluids, tyre pressure, etc.).Scheduled Servicing is offered by an AlfaRomeo Dealership according to a settime schedule. If, during each operation,in addition to the ones scheduled, theneed arises for further replacements orrepairs, these may be carried out with theowner's explicit consent only.IMPORTANT Scheduled Servicingoperations are required by theManufacturer. Failure to have themcarried out may invalidate the warranty.It is advisable to inform the Alfa RomeoDealership of any small operatingirregularities without waiting for the nextservice.

PERIODIC CHECKS

Every year or 620 miles ( 1,000km) orbefore long journeys, check and top up, ifnecessary:

engine coolant level;brake fluid level (if insufficient, see an

Alfa Romeo dealership as soon aspossible);

windscreen washer fluid level;tyre inflation pressure and condition;operation of lighting system

(headlights, direction indicators, hazardwarning lights, etc.);

operation of screen washing/wipingsystem and positioning/wear of wiperblades.Every 1860 miles ( 3,000 km) check andtop up, if required, engine oil level.

DEMANDINGUSEOFTHE CAR

If the vehicle is used in one of thefollowing conditions:

dusty roads;short, repeated journeys (less than

4-5 miles (7-8 km)) at sub-zero outsidetemperatures;

engine often idling or driving longdistances at low speeds or long periodsof inactivity;

in the event of a long period ofinactivity;

the following checks must be carried outmore often than indicated in theScheduled Servicing Plan:

check front and rear disc brake padcondition and wear;

check cleanliness of bonnet andtailgate locks, cleanliness and lubricationof linkage;

visually inspect conditions of: engine,gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses(exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubberelements (gaiters/sleeves/bushes, etc.);

check battery charge and battery fluidlevel (electrolyte);

visually inspect conditions of theaccessory drive belts;

check and, if necessary, change engineoil and replace oil filter;

check and, if necessary, replace pollenfilter;

check and, if necessary, replace aircleaner;

check and, if necessary, replace theBad Fuel filter (where provided).

212

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

SERVICE SCHEDULE (2.0T4MAir petrol engine versions)

The checks listed in the Service Schedule, after reaching 90,000 miles (150,000 km)/10 years, must be cyclically repeated startingfrom the first interval, thus following the same intervals as before.

Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary.Check quick tyre repair kit recharge conditions/expiry date(where provided)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, directionindicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passengercompartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warninglights, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check exhaust emissions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check the supply/engine control and emissions systemsoperation using the diagnosis equipment ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check engine oil decay using the diagnosis equipment (2) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbodyprotection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ●

Check windscreen and rear window wiper bladeposition/wear ● ● ● ● ●

(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.(2) If the vehicle diagnostics shows that the oil quality is lower than 20%, changing the engine oil and filter is advised.

213

Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Check operation of the windscreen washer system andadjust the jets, if necessary ● ● ● ● ●

Check the cleanliness of the bonnet and luggagecompartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkages ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front disc brake padsand operation of pad wear indicators ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of rear disc brake padsand operation of pad wear indicators ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of theaccessory drive belt(s) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Change the engine oil and replace the oil filter (3)

Replace Transfer Case oil (for AWD versions) ●

Replace the spark plugs ● ●

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the car usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or message on theinstrument panel. In any cases, never exceed 1 year.

214

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Replace the accessory drive belt(s) (4)

Replace air cleaner cartridge(5) ● ● ●

Change the brake fluid (6)

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ●

(4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum distance 36,000 miles (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every 4 years, regardless of distance travelled. Dustyareas and/or heavy conditions (cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling): the recommended maximum distance is 18,000 miles (30,000 km). The belt must bereplaced every 2 years, regardless of distance travelled.

(5) If the car is used in dusty areas, this cleaner should be replaced every 9,000 miles (15,000 km).(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.(o) Recommended operations(●) Mandatory operations

215

SCHEDULEDSERVICING PLAN (2.2 JTD diesel engine versions)

After reaching 120,000 mi (200,000 km)/10 years, the checks listed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan must be repeated cyclicallystarting from the first interval, thereby following the same intervals as before.

Thousands of miles 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary.Check quick tyre repair kit recharge conditions/expiry date(where provided)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, directionindicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passengercompartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warninglights, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Check exhaust emissions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Use the diagnosis socket to check the fuel/engine controlsystem operation, emissions and the engine oildeterioration(2)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbodyprotection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes),rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

● ● ● ● ●

Check windscreen and rear window wiper bladeposition/wear ● ● ● ● ●

(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.(2) If the vehicle diagnostics shows that the oil quality is lower than 20%, changing the engine oil and filter is advised.

216

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

Thousands of miles 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer systemand adjust jets, if necessary ● ● ● ● ●

Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks,cleanliness and lubrication of linkage ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front disc brake padsand operation of pad wear indicators ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect conditions and wear of rear disc brake padsand operation of pad wear indicators ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of theaccessory drive belt(s) ● ●

Visually inspect the toothed timing drive belt ● ●

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (3)

Replace Transfer Case oil (for AWD versions) ●

Replace engine oil centrifuge filter (blow-by) (4)

Replace accessory drive belt/s (4)

Replace the toothed timing drive belt (4)

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or message inthe instrument panel. In any case it must not exceed 2 years. If the car is used mainly for urban driving or fuel not strictly compliant with European SpecificationsEN590 is used, it is advisable to change the oil and replace the filter every year.

(4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum distance 60,000 miles (100,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 5 years. Dustyareas and/or heavy conditions (cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling): the recommended maximum mileage is 36,000 mi (60,000 km). Regardless of themileage, the belt must be replaced every 3 years.

217

Thousands of miles 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Replace air cleaner cartridge (5) ● ● ●

Replace fuel filter cartridge (7) ● ● ●

Change the brake fluid (6)

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner ● ● ● ● ●

(5) If the car is used in dusty areas, this cleaner should be replaced every 12,000 miles (20,000 km).(7) If the car runs on fuel with quality below the relevant European specification, this filter must be replaced every 12,000 miles (20,000 km).(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.(o) Recommended operations(●) Mandatory operations

218

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CHECKING LEVELS

170) 171)

63)

2.0 T4 MAir engine, fig. 257

1. Engine oil filler 2. Primary engine cooling reservoir plug 3. Brake fluid reservoir cap access cover 4. Windscreen/headlightswasher fluid reservoir cap 5. Secondary engine cooling reservoir plug

257 09026V0002EM

219

2.0 T4 MAir engine - right-hand drive version, fig. 0

1. Engine oil filler 2. Primary engine cooling reservoir plug 3. Brake fluid reservoir cap access cover 4. Windscreen/headlightswasher fluid reservoir cap 5. Secondary engine cooling reservoir plug

258 09026V0003EM

220

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

2.2 JTD engine, fig. 259

1. Engine oil filler 2. Primary engine cooling reservoir plug 3. Brake fluid reservoir cap access cover 4. Windscreen/headlightswasher fluid reservoir cap 5. Secondary engine cooling reservoir plug

259 09026V0020EM

221

2.2 JTD engine - right-hand drive version, fig. 0

1. Engine oil filler 2. Primary engine cooling reservoir plug 3. Brake fluid reservoir cap access cover 4. Windscreen/headlightswasher fluid reservoir cap 5. Secondary engine cooling reservoir plug

260 09026V0021EM

222

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

ENGINEOIL

172)

64)

IMPORTANT It is advisable to check theoil level indication before long journeys.The engine oil level can be seen on theinstrument panel display every time theengine is started, or on the Connectsystem display by activating on the mainmenu (MENU button) the followingfunctions in sequence: “Apps”; “My Car”and “Oil Level”.Check on the display using the 6 notchesthat the oil level is between MIN andMAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notchesMAX level. If the oil level indicationreaches the first red mark, add oilthrough the filler 1, considering that eachnotch shown on the display correspondsto approximately:2.0T4 MAir engine

0.055 UK gal (250 ml).2.2 JTD Engine

0.033 UK gal (150 ml).65)

IMPORTANT Make sure not to add toomuch engine oil when topping up. Engineoil in excess may damage the engine.Have the car checked. Never exceed theMAX level when topping up engine oil. Itis advisable to check the oil level inintermediate steps on the display.

IMPORTANT The oil level is not refreshedimmediately on the display after toppingup. Consequently, wait for the oil level tobe refreshed on the display following toprocedure shown below.

Top-up and oil level indication updateon display

If a top-up is needed, proceed as followsto ensure correct indication of the oillevel on the display:2.0T4 MAir engine

with the car level, run the engine forapproximately 5 minutes (temperaturehigher than 176°F (80°C)) and then stopthe engine;

start the engine again and idle it forabout 2 minutes.2.2 JTD Engine

with the car level, run the engine untilthe second oil temperature notch lightsup on the display on the instrument panel,then stop the engine;

wait for at least 3 minutes, turn theignition switch to ON without starting theengine and wait for 20 seconds.

IMPORTANT If the indication is notcorrect after the procedure, contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT The oil dipstick in the enginecompartment, on versions with 2.2 JTDengine, must be used ONLY if the oil levelsensor is faulty. The latter condition is

indicated by the symbol which willappear on the instrument panel.The manual engine oil level checkingprocedure must be carried out, whennecessary, on a cold engine only.Never attempt to carry out the manualengine oil checking procedure (using thedipstick) with the engine hot. Contactwith the surrounding hot engine partscould cause burns.This operation is permitted only for thetime actually needed to restore correctoperation of the oil level sensor at an AlfaRomeo dealership.

Engine oil consumption

66)

4)

The maximum engine oil consumption isusually 0.88 lb (400 grams every620 miles (1000 km). When the car isnew, the engine needs to be run in,therefore the engine oil consumption canonly be considered stabilised after thefirst 3100 - 3700 miles(5,000–6,000 km).

223

ENGINE COOLANTFLUID

173)

67)

If the level is below the MIN mark,remove the reservoir cap and top up withsuitable fluid (see the "Fluids andlubricants" paragraph in the "Technicaldata" chapter), until it reaches the MAXmark.

IMPORTANT Never attempt to removethe cap with radiator or expansion tankhot: RISK OF BURNS!

WASHER FLUID FORWINDSCREEN/HEADLIGHTS

174) 175)

The windscreen and headlights washerfluid reservoir (where provided) isequipped with a telescopic filler. If thelevel is too low, remove the reservoir cap4 fig. 261, then lift the filler as shown inthe figure and add the fluid described inthe "Technical Specifications" chapter.After having topped up the fluid, arrangethe filler correctly and then press on thecap until you hear it click.

IMPORTANT With a low fluid level(indicated by the dedicated symbolappearing on the instrument paneldisplay), the headlight washer systemdoes not work, even though the screenwashers continue to work.

BRAKE FLUID

Check that the fluid is at the max. level. Ifthe liquid level in the tank is insufficient,contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership tohave the system checked.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONACTIVATIONSYSTEMOIL

5)

The transmission control oil level shouldonly be checked at an Alfa RomeoDealership.

USEFULADVICE FOR EXTENDINGTHELIFE OFYOURBATTERY

To avoid draining your battery and makeit last longer, observe the followinginstructions:

when you park the car, ensure that thedoors, tailgate and bonnet are closedproperly, to prevent any lights fromremaining on inside the passenger'scompartment;

switch off all roof lights inside the car:the car is however equipped with asystem which switches all internal lightsoff automatically;

do not keep accessories (e.g. radio,hazard warning lights, etc.) switched onfor a long time when the engine is notrunning;

before performing any operation onthe electrical system, disconnect thecable from the negative battery terminal.If, after purchasing the car, you wish toinstall electrical accessories whichrequire permanent electrical supply (e.g.alarm, etc.) or accessories whichinfluence the electrical supplyrequirements, contact an Alfa Romeo

261 09086S0666EM

224

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

Dealership, whose qualified staff willevaluate the overall electricalconsumption.

IMPORTANT If the battery wasdisconnected, do not start the engineimmediately after reconnecting theterminals, but press the start button,without operating the pedals, to turn onthe instrument panel and then start theengine.The symbol on the instrument panelwill remain on, indicating that thesteering must be initialised. To do this,turn the steering wheel from one end tothe other and bring it back to the centreposition within 30 seconds from startingthe engine. If any red warning lights onthe instrument panel remain lit, stop theengine, wait for at least 5 seconds andrepeat the starting procedure describedabove.

IMPORTANT If the charge level remainsunder 50% for a long time, the battery isdamaged by sulphation, reducing itscapacity and efficiency at start-up. Thebattery is also more prone to the risk offreezing (at temperatures as high as 14°F(-10°C)).

BATTERY

176) 177) 178) 178) 179)

6)

The battery does not require theelectrolyte to be topped up with distilledwater. A periodic check carried out at an

Alfa Romeo Dealership is, however,necessary to check efficiency.Follow the battery manufacturer'sinstructions for maintenance.

Replacing the battery

If necessary, replace the battery withanother original battery with the samespecifications. Follow the batteryManufacturer’s instructions formaintenance.

WARNING

170)Never smoke while working in theengine compartment: gas and inflammablevapours may be present, with the risk of fire.171)Be very careful when working in theengine compartment when the engine is hot:you may get burned. Do not get too close tothe radiator cooling fan: the electric fan maystart; danger of injury. Scarves, ties andother loose clothing might be pulled bymoving parts.172) If the engine oil is being topped up, waitfor the engine to cool down before looseningthe filler cap, particularly for vehicles withaluminium cap (where provided).WARNING:risk of burns!173) The cooling system is pressurised. Ifnecessary, only replace the plug withanother original or the operation of thesystem may be adversely affected. Do notremove the reservoir plug when the engine ishot: you risk scalding yourself.

174)Do not travel with the windscreenwasher fluid reservoir empty: thewindscreen washer is essential forimproving visibility. Repeated operation ofthe system without fluid could damage orcause rapid deterioration of some systemcomponents.175)Some commercial additives forwindscreen washer fluid are flammable. Theengine compartment contains hotcomponents which may start a fire.176)Battery fluid is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with the skin andeyes. Keep open flames away from thebattery and do not use objects that mightcreate sparks: risk of explosion and fire.177)Using the battery with insufficientfluid irreparably damages the battery andmay cause an explosion.178) If the vehicle must remain unused for along time at a very low temperature, removethe battery and take it to a warm place, toavoid freezing.179)When performing any operation on thebattery or near it, always protect your eyeswith special goggles.

IMPORTANT

63)Be careful not to confuse the varioustypes of fluids while topping up: they are notcompatible with each other! Topping up withan unsuitable fluid could severely damageyour vehicle.64) The oil level must never exceed the MAXreference.

225

65) If the MAX mark is exceeded (last notchon the right turns red) after the top-up, go toan Alfa Romeo Dealership as soon aspossible to have the oil in excess removed.66)Do not add oil with specifications otherthan those of the oil already in the engine.67)Use a fluid of the same type as thatalready present in the reservoir for anytopping up of the engine cooling system.Thefluid cannot be mixed with other types ofantifreeze fluids. In the event of topping upwith an unsuitable product, under nocircumstances start the engine and contactan Alfa Romeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT

4)Used engine oil and oil filters containsubstances which are harmful to theenvironment. To change the oil and filters, weadvise you to contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.5)Used transmission fluid containssubstances that are harmful to theenvironment. You are advised to contact anAlfa Romeo Dealership for oil changes.6)Batteries contain substances which arevery dangerous for the environment. Forbattery replacement, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership.

BATTERYRECHARGING

IMPORTANTNOTES

180) 181)

IMPORTANT Before using the chargingdevice, always make sure that it isappropriate for the installed battery,with constant voltage (below 14.8 V) andlow amperage (maximum 15 A).

IMPORTANT Recharge the battery in awell ventilated environment.

IMPORTANT Never charge or recharge afrozen battery: it may explode because ofthe nitrogen trapped inside the icecrystals.

IMPORTANT At all times while chargingor recharging the battery, make sure thatany sparks or open flames are keptsufficiently far away from the battery.

IMPORTANT Before using any devices tocharge or to maintain the charge of thebattery, carefully follow the instructionsprovided with the device in order toproperly and safely connect it to the carbattery.You can recharge the battery withoutdisconnecting the wires of the electricalsystem of the car.

To reach the battery, remove the loadplatform inside the luggagecompartment fig. 262;

remove the access cover fig. 263;

remove the protective cover 1fig. 264 and connect the positive cableterminal of the charger (usually red) tothe positive terminal (+) of the battery;

connect the negative terminal of thecharger (usually black) to nut 2 next tothe negative terminal (-) of the battery, asshown in fig. 264;

262 04206V0004EM

263 09036V0005EM

226

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

The vehicle is equipped with an IBS(Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is ableto measure the charge and dischargevoltage and calculate the charge leveland the general condition of the battery.The sensor is placed next to the negativeterminal (-) of the battery.For a correct charge/dischargeprocedure, the charge voltage must gothrough the IBS sensor.

Turn the charger on and follow theinstructions on the user's manual tocompletely recharge the battery;

when the battery is charged, turn thecharger off before disconnecting it fromthe battery;

first disconnect the black cableterminal of the battery charger and thenthe red cable terminal;

refit the protective cover of thepositive terminal of the battery and theaccess cover to the batterycompartment.

IMPORTANT If a "quick-type" batterycharger is used with the battery fitted onthe vehicle, before connecting itdisconnect both cables of the batteryitself. Do not use a "quick-type" batterycharger to provide the starting voltage.

WARNING

180) The process of charging or rechargingthe battery produces hydrogen, a flammablegas that can explode and cause seriousinjury.181)When charging or recharging thebattery, always follow the precautionslisted.

SERVICING PROCEDURES182) 183) 184)

68) 69) 70) 71) 72) 73) 74)

The following pages contain the rules onthe required maintenance envisaged bythe technical personnel who designed thevehicle.In addition to these specific maintenanceinstructions specified for routinescheduled servicing, there are othercomponents which may requireintervention or replacements over thevehicle’s life cycle.

ENGINEOIL

Engine oil level check

70)

To ensure correct engine lubrication, theoil must always be kept at the prescribedlevel (see "Engine compartment" in thischapter).Check the oil level at regular intervals, forexample every 1860 mi (3000 km).It must be checked about 5 minutes afterstopping the engine, once full operatingtemperature is reached. The car mustalso be parked on as level a surface aspossible.Ensure that the oil level is alwaysbetween the minimum and maximumlimits.The engine oil level can be checked usingthe Connect system. To access thefunction, activate the main menu (MENU

264 09036V0002EM

227

button) and select the following optionsin sequence: “Apps”; “My Car”; “Oil Level”.

Changing the engine oil

See the "Service Schedule" for thecorrect maintenance frequency.

Choice of engine oil type

To ensure optimal performance andmaximum protection in all operatingconditions, it is advisable to use solelyACEA-certified engine oils (seedescription in "Fluid and lubricants" in the"Technical specifications" chapter).

Additives for engine oil

It is strongly recommended not to useadditives (other than leak detection dyes)with the engine oil.The engine oil is a product designedspecially for the car and its performancemay be deteriorated through the use offurther additives.

Disposal of used engine oil and filters

For the disposal of the engine oil andfilters, contact the appropriate body todetermine local regulations.IMPORTANT Used engine oil disposed ofincorrectly may seriously harm theenvironment.

ENGINEOIL FILTER

Replacing the engine oil filter

The engine oil filter must be replacedeach time the engine oil is changed. It isadvisable to replace it with a genuine

spare part, specifically designed for thisvehicle.

AIR CLEANER

182)

Replacing the air cleaner

See the "Scheduled servicing plan" forthe correct servicing intervals. It isadvisable to replace it with a genuinespare part, specifically designed for thisvehicle.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMMAINTENANCE

74) 75)

To ensure the best possible performance,the air conditioning system must bechecked and undergo maintenance at anAlfa Romeo Dealership at the beginningof the summer.

IMPORTANT Do not use chemicals toclean the air conditioning system, sincethe internal components may bedamaged. This kind of damage is notcovered by warranty.

Replace the pollen filter

See the "Scheduled servicing plan" forthe correct servicing intervals. Forcleaner replacement, contact an AlfaRomeo Dealership.

LUBRICATINGMOVINGPARTSOFTHEBODYWORK

Ensure that the locks and bodyworkjunction points, including componentssuch as the seat guides, door hinges (androllers), tailgate and bonnet areperiodically lubricated with lithium-basedgrease to ensure correct, silent operationand to protect them from rust and wear.Thoroughly clean the components,eliminating every trace of dirt and dust.After lubricating, eliminate excess oil andgrease. Also pay particular attention tothe bonnet closing devices, to ensurecorrect operation. During operations onthe bonnet, to be carried out with theengine cold, also remember to check,clean and lubricate the locking, releaseand safety devices.Lubricate the external lock barrels twicea year. Apply a small amount ofhigh-quality lubricant directly into thelock barrel.If necessary, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership as soon as possible.

WINDSCREENWIPER

Periodically clean the windscreen andrear window and rubber profile of thewindscreen wiper blades, using a spongeor a soft cloth and a non-abrasivedetergent. This eliminates the salt orimpurities accumulated while driving.Prolonged operation of the windscreenwindow wipers with dry glass may causethe deterioration of the blades, in

228

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

addition to abrasion of the surface of theglass. To eliminate the impurities on thedry glass, always operate the windscreenwashers.In the event of very low outdoortemperatures, below zero degrees,ensure that the movement of the rubberpart in contact with the glass is notobstructed. Use a suitable deicingproduct to release it if required.Avoid using the windscreen wipers toremove frost or ice.Also avoid contact of the rubber profileof the blades with petroleum derivativessuch as engine oil, petrol, etc.

IMPORTANT The envisaged life of thewindscreen wiper blades variesaccording to the usage frequency. In anycase, it is advisable to replace the bladesapproximately once a year. When theblades are worn, noise, marks on theglass or streaks of water may be noticed.In the presence of these conditions, cleanthe windscreen wiper blades or, ifnecessary, replace them.

IMPORTANT Driving with wornwindscreen wiper blades is a serious risk,because visibility is reduced in badweather conditions.

Raising the windscreen wiper blades("Service position" function)

The "Service position" function allows thedriver to replace the windscreen wiperblades more easily. It is alsorecommended to activate this function

when it is snowing and to make it easierto remove any dirt deposits in the areawhere the blades are normallypositioned, when washing.

Activation of the function

To activate this function disable thewindscreen wiper (ring nut fig. 265 inposition O) before setting the ignitiondevice to STOP.This function can only be activated within2 minutes of setting the ignition deviceto STOP.To activate this function, move the leverupwards (unstable position) for at leastthree seconds.

Function deactivation

The function is deactivated if:wait for longer than 2 minutes before

turning the starter switch to the STOPposition, after having raised the leverfig. 265, and starting the Serviceprocedure in this way;

the ignition device is taken to positionON and the windscreen wiper control.If, after using the function, the ignitiondevice is set back to ON with the bladesin a position other than rest position (atthe base of the windscreen), they will onlyreturn to rest position following acommand given using the stalk (stalkupwards, into unstable position) or whena speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.

Replacing the windscreen/rearscreenwiper blades

Proceed as follows:raise the wiper arm, press tab

fig. 266 of the attachment spring andremove the blade from the arm;

fit the new blade, inserting the tab inthe dedicated housing in the arm andchecking that it is locked;

lower the wiper arm onto thewindscreen.

265 09046V0001EM

266 09046V0002EM

229

IMPORTANT Do not operate thewindscreen wiper with the blades liftedfrom the windscreen.

Windscreen/rear window washer

The screen washer jets fig. 267 arelocated on the windscreen wiper arms.

The rear screen washer jet is fixedfig. 268.

If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check that

there is fluid in the reservoir (seeparagraph “Engine compartment” in thischapter).Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged; use a needle to unblock them ifnecessary.

EXHAUSTSYSTEM

183) 184)

71)

Adequate maintenance of the engineexhaust system represents the bestprotection against leaks of carbonmonoxide into the passengercompartment.If an unusual noise from the exhaust orthe presence of smoke in the passengercompartment is identified, or if theunderbody or rear part of the car havebeen damaged, have the entire exhaustsystem and adjoining bodywork areaschecked at an Alfa Romeo Dealership toidentify any components which arebroken, damaged, worn or have movedfrom their correct fitting position.Open welding or loose connections maypermit exhaust gas to enter thepassenger compartment.Have the exhaust system checked everytime the car is raised. Replace thecomponents where necessary (for theseoperations, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership).In normal operating conditions, thecatalytic converter does not require

maintenance. To ensure that it operatescorrectly, however, and prevent it fromgetting damaged, it is extremelyimportant that the engine operatesperfectly.To minimise the risk of damaging thecatalytic converter, proceed as follows:

do not stop the engine or deactivatethe ignition device with gear engaged andcar in motion;

do not attempt to start the engine bybump starting;

do not persist in using the car if idlingis very irregular or the operatingconditions are very notably irregular.

COOLING SYSTEM

Engine coolant (antifreeze) leaks orvapour from the system components(tank, pipes, radiators, etc.) can causeserious burns.If vapour is seen coming from the enginecompartment, or its hissing is heard, donot open the bonnet until the radiator hascooled.

IMPORTANT Never attempt to removethe cap with radiator or expansion tankhot: RISK OF BURNS!

Engine coolant check

Check the engine coolant level every620 mi (1000 km) or before long trips.If there are impurities in the enginecoolant, the system must be drained,flushed and refilled: contact an Alfa

267 09046V0003EM

268 09046V0004EM

230

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

Romeo Dealership.Inspect the front of the radiator to checkfor an accumulation of insects, leaves andother debris. Should it be dirty, clean it byspraying delicately with water.Check the engine cooling system hosesto make sure that the rubber has notperished and that there are no cracks,tears, cuts or obstructions in theconnectors on the expansion tank side,radiator side and engine side. Shouldthere be any doubt regarding leaks fromthe system (e.g. if frequent top ups arerequired), have the seal checked at anAlfa Romeo Dealership.With the engine off and at normaloperating temperature, check that thecooling system radiator cap is closedproperly.

IMPORTANT DO NOT remove the capwhen the engine is hot, the fluid could beboiling hot: DANGER OF SCALDING!

IMPORTANT Before removing the enginecoolant reservoir cap, wait for the systemto cool down.

Topping up / draining / flushing theengine coolant

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty,have cleaning and flushing carried out atan Alfa Romeo Dealership.See the "Scheduled servicing plan" forthe correct servicing intervals.

Important notesFor topping up, use a fluid with the

same characteristics as those indicatedin the "Fluids and lubricants" table (see"Technical specifications" chapter).

Do not use pure water, alcohol-basedcoolants, corrosions inhibitors oradditional anti-rust products becausethey may be incompatible with the enginecoolant and cause the clogging of theradiator. The use of propyleneglycol-based coolant is also notrecommended.

Engine cooling system cap

To prevent loss of engine coolant, makesure that the expansion tank cap isclosed. If it is open, screw it completelyuntil you reach/hear the click.Periodically check the cap and clean itfrom any foreign bodies that may havedeposited on the external surface.

Important notesNever add coolant with the engine hot

or overheated.Do not attempt to cool an overheated

engine by loosening or removing the cap.The heat causes a considerable increasein pressure in the cooling system.

To prevent damage to the engine, onlyuse the engine cooling circuit capsprovided.

Disposal of used engine coolant

Disposal of engine coolant is subject tolegal requirements: contact theappropriate body to determine localregulations.

Important notesTo prevent the fluid from being

ingested by children or animals, do notkeep it in open containers or pour it onthe ground. If ingested, contact a doctorimmediately. Eliminate any traces of fluidfrom the ground immediately.

When the car stops after a shortjourney, vapour may be seen coming outfrom front of the bonnet. This is a normalphenomenon which is due to thepresence of rain, snow or a lot ofmoisture on the surface of the radiator.

With engine and system cold, do nottop up with coolant beyond the maximumlevel indicated on the reservoir in theengine compartment.

BRAKINGSYSTEM

The guarantee the efficiency of thebraking system, periodically check itscomponents: for this operation, contactan Alfa Romeo Dealership.See the "Scheduled servicing plan" forthe correct servicing intervals.

IMPORTANT Driving with your footresting on the brake pedal maycompromise its efficiency, increasing therisk of accidents. When driving, never

231

keep your foot on the brake pedal anddon’t put unnecessary strain on it toprevent the brakes from overheating:excess pad wear may cause damage tothe braking system.

Important notesWhen a low oil level is detected,

contact an Alfa Romeo Dealership assoon as possible to have the systemchecked.

Always keep the cap of the brake fluidreservoir (in the engine compartment)completely closed.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

72)

Use only a gearbox oil with the samecharacteristics as those indicated in the"Fluids and lubricants" table (see"Technical specifications" chapter).

Special additives

Do not use any type of additive with theautomatic transmission oil. Theautomatic transmission oil is a productdesigned specially for this vehicle and itsperformance may be compromisedthrough the use of further additives.Avoid the use of transmission sealers,since they may compromise theefficiency of the automatic transmissionseals.

IMPORTANT Do not use chemicals toflush the transmission, since this maydamage its components.

Frequency of oil changes

In normal vehicle operating conditions, itis not necessary to change thetransmission oil.If fluid leaks are noticed or irregularoperation of the transmission isdetected, have it checked immediately atan Alfa Romeo Dealership.

IMPORTANT Driving the vehicle with aninsufficient oil level may cause seriousdamage to the transmission.

REPLACINGTHEBATTERY

If necessary, replace the battery withanother battery with the samespecifications. It is advisable to contactan Alfa Romeo Dealership forreplacement.Follow the battery manufacturer'sinstructions for maintenance.

WARNING

182) The air intake system (air cleaner,rubber hoses, etc.) can be a protection in thecase of blowbacks from the engine. DO NOTREMOVE this system unless you need tocarry out repair or servicing operations.Before starting the engine, ensure that thesystem has not been removed: failure toobserve this precaution may result in seriousinjury.183) Exhaust emissions are very dangerous,and may be lethal. They contain carbonmonoxide, a colourless, odourless gas whichcan cause fainting and poisoning if inhaled.

184) The exhaust system may reach hightemperatures and may cause a fire if thevehicle is parked on flammable material. Drygrass or leaves can also catch fire if theycome into contact with the exhaust system.Do not park or use the vehicle in a place inwhich the exhaust system might come intocontact with flammable material.

IMPORTANT

68) Incorrect servicing of the vehicle orfailure to carry out operations or repairs(when necessary) may lead to moreexpensive repairs, damage to othercomponents or have a negative impact onthe vehicle performance. Have anymalfunction inspected immediately by anAlfa Romeo Dealership.69) The vehicle is equipped with fluids whichare optimised or protecting its performanceand life and extending service intervals. Donot use chemicals for washing thesecomponents since they may damage theengine, the gearbox or the climate controlsystem.This damage is not covered by thevehicle’s warranty. If any component needsto be washed due to malfunctioning, use onlythe specific liquid for that procedure.70)An excessive or insufficient amount ofoil inside the base is extremely damaging tothe engine. Make sure it is always at anadequate level.

232

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

71)Vehicles equipped with catalyticconverter must be fuelled only with unleadedpetrol. Leaded petrol would permanentlydamage the catalytic converter andeliminate its ability to reduce pollutingemissions, seriously compromising theengine performance, which would beirreparably damaged. If the engine does notwork correctly, especially if it startsirregularly or if there is a reduction of itsperformance, immediately go to an AlfaRomeo Dealership. Prolonged and faultyoperation of the engine may causeoverheating of the converter and, as aconsequence, possible damage to theconverter and the vehicle.72)Using a gearbox fluid different from thatapproved may compromise gearshiftingquality and/or cause vibration of thegearbox itself.73) It is recommended to have the vehicleserviced by an Alfa Romeo Dealership.Whencarrying out normal periodic operations andsmall servicing interventions personally onthe vehicle, it is recommended to usesuitable equipment, genuine spare parts andthe necessary fluids. Do not carry out anyinterventions if you don't have the necessaryexperience.74)Always require the use of onlycompressor coolants and lubricantsapproved and suitable for the specific airconditioning system fitted on the vehicle.Some non-approved coolants are flammableand may explode, with the risk of injuries. Theuse of non-approved coolants or lubricantsmay adversely affect system efficiency,leading to expensive repairs.

75) The air conditioner system containscoolant under high pressure: to avoid injuriesto people or damage to the system, anycoolant addition or repair that requires todisconnect the cables must be carried out byan Alfa Romeo Dealership.

LIFTINGTHEVEHICLE

If the car needs to be jacked up, go to anAlfa Romeo Dealership which is equippedwith shop jacks and jack arms.The vehicle lifting points are marked onthe side skirts with the symbols (seefig. 269 ).

269 09056V0001EM

233

WHEELSANDTYRES

SAFETY INFORMATION

Before embarking on a long trip, andevery two weeks, check the tyre inflationpressure. Check the tyres when cold.It is normal for the pressure to increasewhen the vehicle is used due to tyreheating; for the correct tyre inflationpressure, see the "Rims and Tyres"paragraph in the "Technicalspecifications" chapter.Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 270:

1 - normal pressure: tread evenly worn;2 - low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges;3 - high pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.The tyres must be replaced when thetread reaches the minimum thicknessreference on the tyres themselves.

GENERAL INFORMATION

185) 186) 187)

Take the following precautions toprevent damage to the tyres:

avoid braking suddenly, racing startsand violent impact against the curb,potholes or other obstacles and drivingfor extended periods on uneven roadsurfaces;

periodically check that the tyres haveno cuts in the side wall, abnormal swellingor irregular tread wear;

avoid travelling with the vehicleoverloaded. If a tyre is punctured, stopimmediately and change it;

every 6200/9300 miles(10000/15000) kilometres, switch thetyres, keeping them on the same side ofthe vehicle;

tyres age even if they are not usedmuch. Cracks in the tread and on thesidewalls are a sign of ageing. In anyevent, have the tyres checked byspecialised personnel if they have beenfitted for longer than 6 years;

in the case of replacement, always fitnew tyres, avoiding those of unknownorigin.

RIMSANDTYRES

For the type of wheel rims and tyresfitted on the vehicle see the "Rims andTyres" paragraph in the "Technical data"chapter.

SNOWCHAINS

76)

Rear Wheel Drive and All-wheel driveversions

It is possible to fit 0.5 in (13 mm) chainson all the tyres except for R20.We recommend using snow chainsavailable from the Alfa RomeoDealership.

Important notes

The use of snow chains should be incompliance with local regulations of eachcountry. In certain countries, tyresmarked with code M+S (Mud and Snow)are considered as winter equipment;therefore their use is equivalent to thatof the snow chains.

IMPORTANT The snow chains may beapplied only to the rear wheel tyres.Installing them on the rear wheel tyrescould damage the suspension andtransmission.Check the tension of the snow chainsafter the first few metres have beendriven.

IMPORTANT Using snow chains withtyres with non-original dimensions maydamage the vehicle.

IMPORTANT Using different size or type(M+S, snow, etc.) tyres between front andrear axle may adversely affect vehicledriveability, with the risk of losing controlof the vehicle and resulting accidents.

270 09066S0001EM

234

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

SUGGESTIONSABOUTTHEROTATIONOFTHETYRES

The front and rear tyres are subject todifferent loads and stress due tosteering, manoeuvres and braking. Forthis reason they are subject to unevenwear.To resolve this problem, tyres should berotated at the appropriate time (6.200 /9.300 miles (10000 / 15000 km)).Inverting the tyres means moving themto different positions on the same side ofthe car (front to back and vice versa).

IMPORTANT Crossing the tyres is notadvised, so placing a tyre on a differentaxle on the other side of the car isimpossible.Tyre rotation contributes to thepreservation of the grip and tractionperformance on wet, muddy or snowyroads, guaranteeing optimal driveabilityof the vehicle.In the case of irregular wear of the tyresidentify the cause and correct it as soonas possible, by contacting an Alfa RomeoDealership.The suggested method for inverting thetyres is shown in fig. 271 (the arrowindicates the vehicle's travel direction).

AllWheel Drive (AWD) versions

It is recommended to avoid situationswith a large difference in wear betweenthe front and rear tyres and to strictlyuse winter tyres of the sizes given in the“Rims and tyres provided” table.

WARNING

185) The road holding qualities of the caralso depend on the correct inflation pressureof the tyres.186) If tyre pressure is too low, it mayoverheat and be severely damaged as aresult.187)Never submit alloy rims to repaintingtreatments requiring the use oftemperatures exceeding 150°C. Themechanical properties of the wheels couldbe impaired.

IMPORTANT

76)Keep your speed down when snow chainsare fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h (or theequivalent in miles). Avoid potholes, do notdrive over steps or sidewalks and do notdrive long distances over roads withoutsnow, to avoid damaging both your vehicleand the road surface.

271 09066V0002EM

235

CAR INACTIVITY

If the vehicle is left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be observed:

park the car in covered, dry and ifpossible well-ventilated premises andslightly open the windows;

check that the electric parking brake isnot activated;

disconnect the negative batteryterminal and check the battery charge.Repeat this check once every threemonths during storage;

if the battery is not disconnected fromthe electrical system, check its state ofcharge every thirty days;

clean and protect the painted partsusing protective wax;

clean and protect the shiny metalparts using special compounds availablecommercially;

sprinkle talcum powder on thewindscreen wiper rubber blades and liftthem off the glass;

cover the vehicle with a fabric orperforated plastic sheet, payingparticular care not to damage the paintedsurface by dragging any dust that mayhave accumulated on it. Do not usecompact plastic sheets which do notallow humidity to evaporate from thesurface of the car;

inflate tyres to +7.2 psi (+0.5 bar)above the standard prescribed pressure

and check it periodically;do not drain the engine cooling system;any time the car is left inactive for two

weeks or more, operate the airconditioning system with engine idlingfor at least 5 minutes, setting external airand with fan set to maximum speed. Thisoperation will ensure appropriatelubrication for the system, thusminimising the possibility of damage tothe compressor when the system isoperated again.

IMPORTANT After setting the ignitiondevice to STOP and having closed thedriver side door, wait at least one minutebefore disconnecting the electricalsupply from the battery. Whenreconnecting the electrical supply to thebattery, make sure that the ignitiondevice is in the STOP position and thedriver side door is closed.

BODYWORK

PROTECTIONAGAINSTATMOSPHERICAGENTS

The car is equipped with the bestavailable technological solutions toprotect the bodywork against corrosion.These include:

painting products and systems whichgive the vehicle resistance to corrosionand abrasion;

use of galvanised (or pre-treated)steel sheets, with high resistance tocorrosion;

spraying of plastic parts, with aprotective function in the more exposedpoints: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc.;

use of “open” boxed sections toprevent condensation and pockets ofmoisture which could favour theformation of rust inside;

use of special films to protect againstabrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing,doors, etc.).

BODYANDUNDERBODYWARRANTY

Your vehicle is covered by warrantyagainst perforation due to rust of anyoriginal element of the structure orbodywork. For the general terms of thiswarranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet.

236

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

PRESERVINGTHEBODYWORK

Paintwork

77) 7)

Touch up abrasions and scratchesimmediately to prevent the formation ofrust.Maintenance of paintwork consists ofwashing the car: the frequency dependson the conditions and environment wherethe car is used. For example, it isadvisable to wash the car more often inareas with high levels of atmosphericpollution or salted roads.Some parts of the vehicle may becovered with a matt paint which, in orderto be maintained intact, requires specialcare: see the instructions in the warningat the end of this paragraph

78)

To correctly wash the vehicle, followthese instructions:

if high pressure jets or cleaners areused to wash the vehicle, hold at least15.8 in [40 cm] away from the bodyworkto avoid damage or alteration. Build up ofwater could cause damage to the car inthe long term;

to make it easier to remove any dirtdeposits in the area where the blades arenormally located it is recommended toposition the windscreen wipers vertically(service position), for more informationconsult the “Servicing procedures”paragraph in this chapter;

wash the bodywork using a lowpressure jet of water if possible;

wipe a sponge with a slightly soapysolution over the bodywork, frequentlyrinsing the sponge;

rinse well with water and dry with a jetof air or a chamois leather.Dry the less visible parts (e.g. doorframes, bonnet, headlight frames, etc.)with special care, as water may stagnatemore easily in these areas. Do not washthe car after it has been left in the sun orwith the bonnet hot: this may alter theshine of the paintwork.Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the vehicle.If you want to wash a car with automatictransmission in a car wash that moves it,you must do the following:

make sure that the car is on a flatsurface and that automatic engagementof the parking brake when the engine isswitched off is disabled (for how todisable it, refer to the “Electric parkingbrake” section in the “Starting anddriving” chapter);

with the car stationary, the gear in N(Neutral) and the brake pedal up: pressthe start button.The car will remain in N(Neutral) for 15 minutes, after which P(Park) mode will be activated.

Avoid parking under trees; the resindropped by trees makes the paintworkgo opaque and increases the possibilityof corrosion.

Windows

Use specific detergents and clean clothsto prevent scratching or altering thetransparency.

IMPORTANT Wipe the inside surface ofthe rear window gently with a cloth in thedirection of the filaments to avoiddamaging the heating device.

Front headlights

Use a soft cloth soaked in water anddetergent for washing cars.

IMPORTANT Never use aromaticsubstances (e.g. petrol) or ketones (e.g.acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses ofthe headlights.

IMPORTANT When cleaning the car with apressure washer, keep the water jet atleast 8 in (20 cm) away from theheadlights.

Engine compartment

At the end of every winter, wash theengine compartment thoroughly, takingcare not to aim the jet of water directly atthe electronic control units or at thewindscreen wiper motors. Have thisoperation performed at a specialisedworkshop.

IMPORTANT The washing should takeplace with the engine cold and the

237

ignition device in the STOP position.After the washing operation, make surethat the various protections (e.g. rubbercaps and guards) have not been removedor damaged.

IMPORTANT

77) In order to preserve the aestheticappearance of the paint abrasive productsand/or polishes should not be used forcleaning the vehicle.78)Avoid washing with rollers and/orbrushes in washing stations.Wash thevehicle only by hand using neutral pHdetergents; dry it with a wet chamois leather.Abrasive products and/or polishes shouldnot be used for cleaning the car. Birddroppings must be washed off immediatelyand thoroughly as the acid they contain isparticularly aggressive. Avoid (if at allpossible) parking the vehicle under trees;remove vegetable resins immediately as,when dried, it may only be possible to removethem with abrasive products and/or polishes,which is highly inadvisable as they could alterthe typical opaqueness of the paint. Do notuse pure windscreen washer fluid forcleaning the front windscreen and rearwindow; dilute it min. 50% with water. Onlyuse pure screen washer fluid when strictlynecessary due to outside temperatureconditions.

IMPORTANT

7)Detergents pollute the environment. Onlywash your vehicle in areas equipped tocollect and treat wastewater from this typeof activity.

INTERIOR188) 189) 190)

Periodically check the cleanliness of theinterior, beneath the mats, which couldcause oxidation of the sheet metal.

SEATSAND FABRIC PARTS

Remove dust with a soft brush or avacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use amoist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub theseats with a sponge moistened with asolution of water and neutral detergent.

LEATHERSEATS(where provided)Remove the dry dirt with a chamois orslightly damp cloth, without exerting toomuch pressure.Remove any liquid or grease stains usingan absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing.Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskincloth dampened with water and mildsoap. If the stain persists, use specificproducts and observe the instructionscarefully.

IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Makesure that the cleaning products usedcontain no alcohol or alcohol derivatives,even in small quantities.

PLASTIC AND COATEDPARTS

79)

Clean interior plastic parts with a dampcloth (if possible made from microfibre),and a solution of water and neutral,non-abrasive detergent.

238

SER

VIC

ING

AN

DC

AR

E

To clean oily or persistent stains, usespecific products free from solvents anddesigned to maintain the originalappearance and colour of thecomponents.Remove any dust using a microfibrecloth, if necessary moistened with water.The use of paper tissues is notrecommended as these may leaveresidues.

GENUINE LEATHERPARTS(where provided)Use only water and mild soap to cleanthese parts. Never use alcohol oralcohol-based products.Before using a specific product forcleaning interiors, make sure that it doesnot contain alcohol and/or alcohol basedsubstances.

CARBONFIBRE PARTS

To eliminate small scratches and markson the carbon, contact an Alfa RomeoDealership Authorized Point. Animproperly performed operation mayirreparably damage the carbon.

WARNING

188)Never use flammable products, such aspetrol ether or rectified petrol to clean theinside of the car. The electrostatic chargeswhich are generated by rubbing during thecleaning operation may cause a fire.

189)Do not keep aerosol cans in the car:they might explode. Aerosol cans must notbe exposed to a temperature exceeding50°C.When the vehicle is exposed tosunlight, the internal temperature cangreatly exceed this value.190) There must be no obstacles on thefloor underneath the pedals; make sure thatmats are always flat and do not interferewith the pedals.191)Do not use aggressive organicsubstance such as: gasoline, kerosene, oil,acetone or solvents.

IMPORTANT

79)Never use alcohol, petrols andderivatives to clean the dashboard andinstrument panel lens.

239

This page is intentionally left blank

Everything you may find useful for understanding how your vehicleis made and works is contained in this chapter and illustrated with

data, tables and graphics.For the enthusiasts and the technician, but also just for those who

want to know every detail of their vehicle.

TECHNICAL DATAIDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250RIMS AND TYRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258REFUELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265FUEL CONSUMPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266CO2 EMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLEAT THE END OF ITS LIFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

IDENTIFICATIONDATA

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)is stamped on a plate on the front leftcorner of the dashboard trim fig. 272,which can be seen from outside thevehicle, through the windscreen.

This number is also stamped on thechassis at the front left shock absorberand can be seen by opening the bonnetfig. 273.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER(VIN) PLATE

The plate is located on the left side frontdoor pillar fig. 274 and shows the dataabout:

1: correct value of smoke coefficient(for Diesel engines);

2: name of the manufacturer,type-approval number of the car,identification number of the car, max.permitted weights;

3: engine identification, type variantversion, spare part number, colour code,additional information.

272 10016V0001EM

273 10016V0002EM

274 10016V0003EM

242

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORKVERSIONS

PETROLVERSIONS

Versions Engine code Bodywork versions

2.0 T4 Mair 280 HP 55273835 949AXA2A

2.0 T4 Mair 200 HP 55273835 949AXF2A

DIESELVERSIONS

Versions Engine code Bodywork versions

2.2 JTD 210 HP 55271838 949AXB2A

2.2 JTD 180 HP RWD 55275156 949AXC1A

2.2 JTD 180 HP AWD 55271838 949AXE2A

2.2 JTD 150 HP 55275156 949AXD1A

243

ENGINE

2.0 T4 MAir engine 200 HP 280 HP

Cycle Otto Otto

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84 / 90 84 / 90

Total displacement (cm³) 1995 1995

Compression ratio 10 ± 0.35 10 ± 0.35

Maximum power (ECE) (kW) 148 206

Maximum power (ECE) (HP) 200 280

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 4500 5250

Maximum torque (ECE) (Nm) 330 400

Maximum torque (ECE) (kgm) 33.6 40.8

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 1750 2250

Spark plugs NGK ILZKR7G

Fuel Unleaded petrol 95 R.O.N. (EN228 specifications)

244

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

2.2 JTD engine 150 HP 180 HP 210 HP

Cycle Diesel Diesel Diesel

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 83 / 99 83 / 99 83 / 99

Total displacement (cm³) 2143 2143 2143

Compression ratio 15.5 ± 0.4 15.5 ± 0.4 15.5 ± 0.4

Maximum power (ECE) (kW) 110 132 154

Maximum power (ECE) (HP) 150 180 210

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 4000 3750 3750

Maximum torque (ECE) (Nm) 450 450 470

Maximum torque (ECE) (kgm) 45.9 45.9 47.9

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 1750 1750 1750

Fuel Automotive diesel fuel (EN590 and EN16734 specifications)

245

POWERSUPPLY192)

Power supply

2.0 T4 MAir engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control

Power supply

2.2 JTD engineDirect injection with electronically-controlled MultiJet Common Rail

system, with intercooler

WARNING

192)Modifications or repairs to the supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system technical specifications intoaccount can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

246

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

TRANSMISSION

Version Gearbox Traction

2.0 T4 MAir engineEight forward gears plus reverse with

synchronisers for forward gears and reverse

Rearor

All-wheel drive

Version Gearbox Traction

2.2 JTD EngineEight forward gears plus reverse with

synchronisers for forward gears and reverse

Rearor

All-wheel drive

247

BRAKES

Version Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.0 T4 MAir engine Disc Disc Electric

Version Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.2 JTD Engine Disc Disc Electric

IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time thebrakes are applied.

IMPORTANT For maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 310 mi (500 km) is needed: during thisperiod it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

248

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

SUSPENSION

Version Front Rear

2.0 T4 MAir engine Front double-wishbone independent wheels Multilink system independent wheels

Version Front Rear

2.2 JTD Engine Front double-wishbone independent wheels Multilink system independent wheels

249

STEERING

Version Kerb-to-kerb turning circle (ft/m) Type

2.0 T4 MAir engine 38.5 / 11.75 Rack and pinion with electric powersteering

Version Kerb-to-kerb turning circle (ft/m) Type

2.2 JTD Engine 38.5 / 11.75 Rack and pinion with electric powersteering

250

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

RIMSANDTYRESAlloy rims. Tubeless radial carcass tyres.All approved tyres are listed in theRegistration Document.

IMPORTANT If there are anydiscrepancies between the OwnerHandbook and the RegistrationDocument, take the information from thelatter. For safe driving, the car must befitted with tyres of the same make andtype on all wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use air chamberswith tubeless tyres.

CORRECTREADINGOFTHETYRE

Example fig. 275: 215/65 R16 98H

215 Rated width (S, distance in mmbetween the sides)

65 Height/width ratio (H/S) as apercentage

R Radial tyre16 Rim diameter in inches (Ø)98 Load index (capacity)H Maximum speed index

Maximum speed index

Q up to 160 km/hR up to 170 km/hS up to 180 km/hT up to 190 km/hU up to 200 km/hH up to 210 km/hV up to 240 km/hW up to 270 km/hY up to 300 km/h

Maximum speed index for snow tyres

QM + S up to 160 km/hTM + S up to 190 km/hHM + S up to 210 km/h

Load index (capacity)

60= 250 kg

80= 450 kg

61= 257 kg

81= 462 kg

Load index (capacity)

62= 265 kg

82= 475 kg

63= 272 kg

83= 487 kg

64= 280 kg

84= 500 kg

65= 290 kg

85= 515 kg

66= 300 kg

86= 530 kg

67= 307 kg

87= 545 kg

68= 315 kg

88= 560 kg

69= 325 kg

89= 580 kg

70= 335 kg

90= 600 kg

71= 345 kg

91= 615 kg

72= 355 kg

92= 630 kg

73= 365 kg

93= 650 kg

74= 375 kg

94= 670 kg

75= 387 kg

95= 690 kg

275 10096S0001EM

251

Load index (capacity)

76= 400 kg

96= 710 kg

77= 412 kg

97= 730 kg

78= 425 kg

98= 750 kg

79= 437 kg

CORRECTREADINGOFTHERIMCODE

Example fig. 275: 7J x 17 H2 ET 40

7 rim width in inches (1).J rim drop centre outline (side projection

where the tyre bead rests) (2).17 rim fitting diameter in inches

(corresponds to the diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø).

H2 shape and number of humps(circumference measurement whichkeeps the bead of tubeless tyres inposition on the rim).

ET 40 wheel compensation (distancebetween the disc/rim supportplane and the wheel rim centreline).

252

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

RIMSANDTYRES PROVIDED

193)

Version Wheels Tyres

2.0 T4MAir engine2.2 JTD Engine

17 x7.5J 225/65R17102V

17 x8J 235/65R17104V

18 x8J 235/60R18103W

19 x8J 235/55R19101Y

20 x8.5J 255/45R20105V

Space saver sparewheel(where provided) 195/7518106P

NOTEThe approved tires are given in the vehicle registration document.

IMPORTANTUsing tyres of a different size, type, brand or design at the front and rearmay adversely affect car driveability.Werecommend using tyres approved by themanufacturer. Themanufacturer cannot determine if unapproved tyres are suitable for useand therefore cannot guarantee vehicle safety in those conditions.

IMPORTANT It is possible to install winter tyres of the same size as those given in the registration document.We recommendwintertyreswith a speed index "V" and load index equal to or greater than those of the original ones.

253

COLDTYRE INFLATIONPRESSURE

When the tyres are warm, the inflation pressure should be +4.35 psi (+0.3 bar) in relation to the recommended figure. However,recheck that the value is correct with the tyre cold.If it is necessary to raise the vehicle, refer to the "Raising the vehicle" paragraph in the "In an emergency" chapter.2.0 T4 MAir and 2.2 JTD engines

TyresUnladen/medium load [psi / bar] Full load [psi / bar]

Front Rear Front Rear

225/65 R1730.5 / 2.1 (°) 33.3 / 2.3 (°)

34.8 / 2.4 37.7 / 2.632 / 2.2 (+) 34.8 / 2.4 (+)

235/65 R17 30.5 / 2.1 33.3 / 2.3 33.3 / 2.3 37.7 / 2.6

235/60 R18 30.5 / 2.1 33.3 / 2.3 33.3 / 2.3 37.7 / 2.6

235/55 R19 30.5 / 2.1 33.3 / 2.3 33.3 / 2.3 37.7 / 2.6

255/45 R20 33.3 / 2.3 36.3 / 2.5 34.8 / 2.4 39.2 / 2.7

195/75 18(Space-saver wheel) 43.5 / 3.0

For 225/65 R17 tyres, in medium load conditions, there are two possible pressure settings depending on the mode required:comfort (°) and ECO (+). Restore the inflation pressures accordingly. ECO configuration consumption is not guaranteed with comfortconfiguration pressuresIf winter tyres are fitted, always use the same inflation pressures as for the tyres originally installed (table above). For225/65 R17 tyres in medium load conditions, use the comfort configuration pressures.

254

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

SNOW CHAINS

80)

Rear Wheel Drive and All-wheel drive versions

It is possible to fit 0.5 in (13 mm) chains on all the tyres except for R20.We recommend using snow chains available from the Alfa Romeo Dealership.

Important notes

The use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations of each country. In certain countries, tyres marked with codeM+S (Mud and Snow) are considered as winter equipment; therefore their use is equivalent to that of the snow chains.

IMPORTANT The snow chains may be applied only to the rear wheel tyres. Installing them on the rear wheel tyres could damage thesuspension and transmission.Check the tension of the snow chains after the first few metres have been driven.

IMPORTANT Using snow chains with tyres with non-original dimensions may damage the vehicle.

IMPORTANT Using different size or type (M+S, snow, etc.) tyres between front and rear axle may adversely affect vehicledriveability, with the risk of losing control of the vehicle and resulting accidents.

WARNING

193) If winter tyres with a lower speed rating than that indicated in the Registration Document are used, do not exceed the maximum speedcorresponding to the speed rating of the tyres used.

IMPORTANT

80)Keep your speed down when snow chains are fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid potholes, do not drive over steps or sidewalks and do notdrive long distances over roads without snow, to avoid damaging both your vehicle and the road surface.

255

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in inches/mm and refer to the car equipped with its original tyres. Height is measured with an unladenvehicle, with the driver.

A B C D E F G H I

33.9 / 861 110.94 /2818 39.68 / 1008 184.5 /

468765.78 / 1671 (*)65.6 / 1666 (**)

63.5 / 1613 65.08 /1653

85.16 /2163

74.9 /1903

(*) AWD versions(**) RWD versionsSmall variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

276 10106V0001EM

256

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTVOLUME

Capacity (VDA standards)

Rear seats not folded

Car unladen: 115.5 UK gal (525 litres)

257

WEIGHTS

Weights [lb / kg] 2.0 T4 MAir engine

200 HP 280 HP

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 3660 / 1660 3660 / 1660

Payload including the driver (*) 1411 / 640 1411 / 640

Maximum permitted loads (**)

– front axle 2359 / 1070 2359 / 1070

– rear axle 2910 / 1320 2910 / 1320

– total 5070 / 2300 5070 / 2300

Towable loads

– braked trailer 4409 / 2000 5070 / 2300

– trailer without brakes 1653 / 750 1653 / 750

Maximum load on roof 165 / 75 165 / 75

Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes) 176 / 80 209 / 95

(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximumpermitted loads.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

258

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Weights [lb / kg] 2.2 JTD Engine

150 HP – 180 HPRWD

180 HP – 210 HPAWD

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment) 3536 / 1604 3657 / 1659

Payload including the driver (*) 1479 / 671 1479 / 671

Maximum permitted loads (**)

– front axle 2326 / 1055 2381 / 1080

– rear axle 2888 / 1310 2932 / 1330

– total 5015 / 2275 5137 / 2330

Towable loads

– braked trailer 3748 / 1700 5137 / 2330

– trailer without brakes 1653 / 750 1653 / 750

Maximum load on roof 165 / 75 165 / 75

Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes) 150 / 68 209 / 95

(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximumpermitted loads.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

259

REFUELLING

2.0 T4 MAir engine

Fuel tank [UK gal / litres] 14 / 64

including a reserve of [UK gal / litres] 2.11 / 9.6

Main tank cooling system UK gal / [litres] 2.10 / 9.55

Secondary tank cooling system [UK gal / litres] 1.15 / 5.25

Engine oil filter [UK gal / litres] 0.13 / 0.6

Engine oil sump [UK gal / litres] 1.01 / 4.6

Hydraulic brake circuit [UK gal / litres] 0.2 / 0.9

Windscreen washer tank [UK gal / litres] 0.9 / 4.1

Automatic transmission AWD [UK gal / litres] 2.05 / 9.3

Automatic transmission RWD [UK gal / litres] 2.07 / 9.4

RDU 230-LSD differential [UK gal / litres] 0.2 / 0.9

RDU 210-eLSD differential (where available) [UK gal / litres] 0.3 / 1.4

RDU 210/215-LSD differential [UK gal / litres] 0.24 / 1.1

AWD System FAD transfer case [UK gal / litres] 0.11 / 0.5

AWD System TRANSFER CASE [UK gal / litres] 0.15 / 0.7

260

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

2.2 JTD Engine

Fuel tank [UK gal / litres]12.76 / 5814 / 64 (*)

including a reserve of [UK gal / litres] 1.76 / 8.0

Main tank cooling system UK gal / [litres] 1.96 / 8.9

Secondary tank cooling system [UK gal / litres] 1.12 / 5.1

Engine oil filter [UK gal / litres] 0,065 / 0.3

Engine oil sump [UK gal / litres] 0.88 / 4.0

Hydraulic brake circuit [UK gal / litres] 0.02 / 0.9

Windscreen washer tank [UK gal / litres] 0.92 /4.2

Automatic transmission, 2.2 JTD engine [UK gal / litres] 2.0 / 9.1

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV [UK gal / litres] -

RDU 230-LSD differential [UK gal / litres] 0.2 / 0.9

RDU 210-eLSD differential (where available) [UK gal / litres] 0.31 / 1.4

RDU 210/215-LSD differential [UK gal / litres] 0.24 / 1.1

AWD System FAD transfer case [UK gal / litres] 0.11 / 0.5

AWD System TRANSFER CASE [UK gal / litres] 0.15 / 0.7

(*) For markets where provided.

261

FLUIDSAND LUBRICANTS

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of theScheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications.Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

81)

PRODUCTSPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE LUBRICATION

262

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Use Features SpecificationOriginal fluids and

lubricantsReplacement interval

2.0 T4 MAir engineSAE 0W-30

ACEA C2API SN

9.55535–GS1

SELENIA DIGITEK P.E.0W-30

Contractual TechnicalReference No.F020.B12

According to ScheduledServicing Plan

2.2 JTD Engine150CV - 180HP

SAE 0W-20ACEA C2 9.55535–DSX

SELENIA W.R. FORWARD0W-20

Contractual TechnicalReference N° F013.K15

According to ScheduledServicing Plan

SAE 0W-30ACEA C2 9.55535–DS1

SELENIA W.R. FORWARD0W-30

Contractual TechnicalReference N° F842.F13

According to ScheduledServicing Plan

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to topup; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

2.2 JTD Engine 210 HP

Use Features SpecificationOriginal fluids and

lubricantsApplications

Lubricants and greasesfor drive transmission

ATF Synthetic lubricant 9.55550-AV5

TUTELA TRANSMISSIONAS 8

Contractual TechnicalReference No. F139.I11

Automatic transmission

SAE 75W-85 syntheticlubricant 9.55550-DA9

TUTELA TRANSMISSIONLS AXLE FLUID

Contractual TechnicalReference No. F059.N15

DifferentialRDU 230-LSD RDU

210-eLSD RDU 210/215-LSD

SAE 75W-80 APLGL-5 synthetic lubricant 9.55550-DA10

TUTELA TRANSMISSIONHYPOIDE GEAR OIL

Contractual TechnicalReference n° F060.N15

AWD System FAD transfercase

SAE 75W syntheticlubricant 9.55550-DA11

TUTELA TRANSMISSIONTRANSFER CASE

Contractual TechnicalReference No. F061.N15

AWD System TRANSFERCASE

Lubricants and greasesfor drive transmission

NLGI 0-1 low frictioncoefficient grease for

constant velocity joints9.55580-GRAS II

TUTELA STAR 700Contractual Technical

Reference No. F701.C07

Differential side constantvelocity joints

NLGI 1-2 molybdenumdisulphide grease for high

temperatures9.55580-GRAS II

TUTELA ALL STARContractual Technical

Reference No. F702.G07

Wheel side constantvelocity joints

Brake fluid DOT 4 9.55597

TUTELA BRAKE FLUIDEXTREME HT

Contractual TechnicalReference No. F001.N15

Hydraulic brakes and clutchcontrols

Protective agent forradiators

CUNA NC 956–16ASTMD3306 9.55523

PARAFLU UPContractual Technical

Reference N°F101.M01

Use rate 50% Not mixablewith different formulation

products. (*)

(*) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralised water.

263

Use Features SpecificationOriginal fluids and

lubricantsApplications

Windscreen washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 9.55522

PETRONAS DURANCE SC35

Contractual TechnicalReference N° F001.D16

To be used diluted orundiluted in windscreenwasher/wiper systems

Diesel fuel additiveAntifreeze additive for

diesel fuel for diesel engineprotection

PETRONAS DURANCEDIESEL ART

Contractual TechnicalReference N°F601.C06

To be mixed with diesel fuel(25 cc per 10 litres)

HVAC R1234yf or R134a(depending on market)

IMPORTANT

81) The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by thewarranty.

264

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

PERFORMANCETop performance after the initial period of car usage.

Versions Maximum speed (mph / km/h)Acceleration from 0-60 mph / (0-100 km/h)

(sec.)

2.0 T4 MAir 200 HP AWD engine 134 / 215 7.2

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 143 / 230 5.7

2.2 JTD 150 HP RWD engine 123 / 198 8.8

2.2 JTD 180 HP RWD engine 130 / 210 7.6

2.2 JTD 180 HP AWD engine 130 / 210 7.6

2.2 JTD 210 HP AWD engine 134 / 215 6.6

265

FUEL CONSUMPTION

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption figures given in the table below are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests laid down by specificEuropean Directives.The following procedures are used to measure the fuel consumption:

urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the vehicle;extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extra-urban use of the car: speed varies between 0 and 75 mph

(0 and 120 km/h);combined fuel consumption: calculated with a weighting of approximately 37% of the urban cycle and 63% of the extra-urban

cycle.

IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the car, trim level/equipment/accessories, use of the climate control system, car load, presence of roof racks and other situations that adversely affectthe aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to different fuel consumption values than those measured.

IMPORTANT The fuel consumption will get more regular only after having driven the first 1860 mi (3000 km).

FUEL CONSUMPTIONACCORDINGTOTHE CURRENTEUROPEANDIRECTIVE (litres/100 km)

266

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined

2.0 T4 MAir 200 HP AWD engine 8.9 5.9 7.0

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 8.9 5.9 7.0

2.2 JTD 150 HP RWD engine 5.5 4.3 4.7

2.2 JTD 180 HP RWD engine 5.5 4.3 4.7

2.2 JTD 180 HP AWD engine 5.5 4.4 4.8

2.2 JTD 210 HP AWD engine 5.5 4.4 4.8

2.2 JTD 180 HP RWD ECO engine 5.3 4.1 4.5

CO2 EMISSIONS

The CO 2 emission levels given in the following table refer to combined consumption.

267

VersionsCO EMISSIONS2

ACCORDING TO THE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE IN FORCE (g/km)

2.0 T4 MAir 200 HP AWD engine 161

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 161

2.2 JTD 150 HP RWD engine 124

2.2 JTD 180 HP RWD engine 124

2.2 JTD 180 HP AWD engine 127

2.2 JTD 210 HP AWD engine 127

2.2 JTD 180 HP RWD ECO engine 119

PRESCRIPTIONS FORHANDLINGTHEVEHICLE ATTHE ENDOF ITS LIFE(where provided)For years, Alfa Romeo S.p.A. has pursued a global commitment to protect and respect the environment by continually improving itsproduction processes and developing increasingly "eco-compatible" products. To grant customers the best possible service in termsof respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, AlfaRomeo S.p.A. is offering its customers the chance to hand over their car at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs.The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses as aresult of it having a zero or negative market value.To hand your car over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our dealerships if you are purchasing another car or anAlfa Romeo S.p.A.-authorised collection and scrapping centre. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality servicefor the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment.You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an Alfa Romeo S.p.A. dealership or by callingthe number in the Warranty Booklet or by consulting the Alfa Romeo S.p.A. website.

268

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

OFFICIALTYPEAPPROVALS

ELECTRONIC KEY (versions with Keyless Start system)

277 10196S0003EM

269

Country

AustriaHiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [Fobik] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.Frequenzband:[125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Belgium

Hierbij verklaar ik, Continental, dat het type radioapparatuur [Fobik] conform is met Richtlijn2014/53/EU.Frequentieband:[125kHz]Maximaal zendvermogen: [66dBuA/m @10m max]Le soussigné, Continental, déclare que l'équipement radioélectrique du type [Fobik] est conforme à ladirective 2014/53/UE.Bande de fréquences:[125kHz]Puissance d’émission maximale: [66dBuA/m @10m max]Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [Fobik] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.Frequenzband:[125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Bulgaria

Снастоящото Continental декларира, че този тип радиосъоръжение [Fobik] е в съответствие сДиректива 2014/53/ЕС.Честотна лента: [125kHz]Максималнамощност на предаване: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Cyprus

Με τηνπαρούσαο/η Continental, δηλώνει ότι ο ραδιοεξοπλισμός [Fobik] πληροί την οδηγία2014/53/ΕΕ.Ζώνησυχνοτήτων:[125kHz]Μέγιστη ισχύς εκπομπής: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

CroatiaContinental ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa [Fobik] u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU.Frekvencijski pojas:[125kHz]Maksimalna snaga odašiljanja: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Denmark

Hermed erklærer Continental, at radioudstyrstypen [Fobik] er i overensstemmelse med direktiv2014/53/EU.Frekvensbånd:[125kHz]Maksimal sendeeffekt: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Estonia

Käesolevaga deklareerib Continental, et käesolev raadioseadme tüüp [Fobik] vastab direktiivi2014/53/EL nõuetele.Sagedusriba:[125kHz]Maksimaalne ülekandevõimsus: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

270

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

FinlandContinental vakuuttaa, että radiolaitetyyppi [Fobik] on direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen.Taajuusalue:[125kHz]Maksimaalinen lähetysteho: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

France

Le soussigné, Continental, déclare que l'équipement radioélectrique du type [Fobik] est conforme à ladirective 2014/53/UE.Bande de fréquences:[125kHz]Puissance d’émission maximale: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

GermanyHiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [Fobik] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.Frequenzband:[125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Greece

Με τηνπαρούσαο/η Continental, δηλώνει ότι ο ραδιοεξοπλισμός [Fobik] πληροί την οδηγία2014/53/ΕΕ.Ζώνησυχνοτήτων:[125kHz]Μέγιστη ισχύς εκπομπής: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

England

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type [Fobik] is in compliance with Directive2014/53/EU.Frequency band:[125kHz]Maximum transmitter power: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Ireland

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type [Fobik] is in compliance with Directive2014/53/EU.Frequency band:[125kHz]Maximum transmitter power: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Italy

Il fabbricante, Continental, dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio [Fobik] è conforme alla direttiva2014/53/UE.Banda di frequenza:[125kHz]Potenza di trasmissione massima: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Latvia

Ar šo Continental deklarē, ka radioiekārta [Fobik] atbilst Direktīvai 2014/53/ES. Pilns ES atbilstībasdeklarācijas teksts ir pieejams šādā interneta vietnē:Frekvenču josla:[125kHz]Maksimālā raidīšanas jauda: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

271

Country

Lithuania

Aš, Continental, patvirtinu, kad radijo įrenginių tipas [Fobik] atitinka Direktyvą 2014/53/ES. Visas ESatitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas šiuo interneto adresu:Dažnių juosta:[125kHz]Maksimali siųstuvo galia: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

LuxembourgHiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [Fobik] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.Frequenzband:[125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Malta

B'dan, Continental, niddikjara li dan it-tip ta' tagħmir tar-radju [Fobik] huwa konformi mad-Direttiva2014/53/UE.Medda ta' frekwenza: [125kHz]Enerġija Massima tat-Trasmissjoni: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Netherlands

Hierbij verklaar ik, Continental, dat het type radioapparatuur [Fobik] conform is met Richtlijn2014/53/EU.Frequentieband:[125kHz]Maximaal zendvermogen: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Poland

Continental niniejszym oświadcza, że typ urządzenia radiowego [Fobik] jest zgodny z dyrektywą2014/53/UE.Pasmo częstotliwości:[125kHz]Maksymalna moc nadawania: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Portugal

O (a) abaixo assinado(a) Continental declara que o presente tipo de equipamento de rádio [Fobik] estáem conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE. O texto integral da declaração de conformidade estádisponível no seguinte endereço de Internet:Faixa de frequência:[125kHz]Potência máxima de transmissão: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Czech RepublicTímto Continental prohlašuje, že typ rádiového zařízení [Fobik] je v souladu se směrnicí 2014/53/EU.Kmitočtové pásmo:[125kHz]Maximální vysílací výkon: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Slovak RepublicContinental týmto vyhlasuje, že rádiové zariadenie typu [Fobik] je v súlade so smernicou 2014/53/EÚ.Frekvenčné pásmo:[125kHz]Maximálny vysielací výkon: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

272

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Romania

Prin prezenta, Continental declară că tipul de echipamente radio [Fobik] este în conformitate cuDirectiva 2014/53/UE.Bandă de frecvene:[125kHz]Putere maximă de emisie: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

SloveniaContinental potrjuje, da je tip radijske opreme [Fobik] skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU.Frekvenčni pas:[125kHz]Maksimalna moč oddajanja: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Spain

Por la presente, Continental declara que el tipo de equipo radioeléctrico [Fobik] es conforme con laDirectiva 2014/53/UE.Banda de frecuencias:[125kHz]Máxima potencia de transmisión: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Sweden

Härmed försäkrar Continental att denna typ av radioutrustning [Fobik] överensstämmer med direktiv2014/53/EU.Frekvensband:[125kHz]Maximal sändningseffekt: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

HungaryContinental igazolja, hogy a [Fobik] típusú rádióberendezés megfelel a 2014/53/EU irányelvnek.Frekvencia-szalag:[125kHz]Maximális jeladási teljesítmény: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

273

OFFICIALTYPEAPPROVALS FORSPECIFICMARKETS

Country FOBIK system type approval code

BeninAGREE PAR L’ATRPT BENIN

Numéro d’agrément : MR nnnn ANRT nnnnDate d’agrément : nnnnnn

Botswana BOCRAREGISTERED NO: nnnnnn

Ghana NCA APPROVED: 3R8-8M-7DF-28D

Malaysia

Israel

ALFA434

Continental Automotive GmbHSiemensstrasse 1293055 Regensburg

Germany

South Korea

MSIP-CRM-TAL-ALFA434

Continental Automotive GmbHFOBIK

ALFA434

274

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country FOBIK system type approval code

Moldavia

Nigeria

Philippines

ESD-1612654C

MoroccoAGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC

Numéro d’agrément: MR 11026 ANRT 2015Date d’agrément: 03/11/2015

Qatar

reg. No.: nnnnnImporter No.: nnnnn

Taiwan

Republic of South Africa

ContinentalM3N-82135300TA-2015/1882

275

Country FOBIK system type approval code

Vietnam

Name: Continental Automotive GmbHCode: C0166061115AF04A2

276

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

IGNITIONDEVICE (versions with Keyless Start system)

278 10196S0005EM

277

279 10196S0004EM

278

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

280 10196S0008EM

279

Country

Austria

Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [Radio Transmitter] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EUentspricht.Frequenzband: [125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Belgium

Hierbij verklaar ik, Continental, dat het type radioapparatuur [Radio Transmitter] conform is metRichtlijn 2014/53/EU.Frequentieband: [125kHz]Maximaal zendvermogen: [66dBuA/m @10m max]Le soussigné, Continental, déclare que l'équipement radioélectrique du type [Radio Transmitter] estconforme à la directive 2014/53/UE.Bande de fréquences: [125kHz]Puissance d’émission maximale: [66dBuA/m @10m max]Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [Radio Transmitter] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EUentspricht.Frequenzband: [125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Bulgaria

Снастоящото Continental декларира, че този тип радиосъоръжение [Radio Transmitter] е всъответствие сДиректива 2014/53/ЕС.Честотна лента: [125kHz]Максималнамощност на предаване: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Cyprus

Με τηνπαρούσαο/η Continental, δηλώνει ότι ο ραδιοεξοπλισμός [Radio Transmitter] πληροί τηνοδηγία 2014/53/ΕΕ.Ζώνησυχνοτήτων: [125kHz]Μέγιστη ισχύς εκπομπής: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Croatia

Continental ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa [Radio Transmitter] u skladu s Direktivom2014/53/EU.Frekvencijski pojas: [125kHz]Maksimalna snaga odašiljanja: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Denmark

Hermed erklærer Continental, at radioudstyrstypen [Radio Transmitter] er i overensstemmelse meddirektiv 2014/53/EU.Frekvensbånd: [125kHz]Maksimal sendeeffekt: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

280

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Estonia

Käesolevaga deklareerib Continental, et käesolev raadioseadme tüüp [Radio Transmitter] vastabdirektiivi 2014/53/EL nõuetele.Sagedusriba: [125kHz]Maksimaalne ülekandevõimsus: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

FinlandContinental vakuuttaa, että radiolaitetyyppi [Radio Transmitter] on direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen.Taajuusalue: [125kHz]Maksimaalinen lähetysteho: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

France

Le soussigné, Continental, déclare que l'équipement radioélectrique du type [Radio Transmitter] estconforme à la directive 2014/53/UE.Bande de fréquences: [125kHz]Puissance d’émission maximale: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Germany

Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [Radio Transmitter] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EUentspricht.Frequenzband: [125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Greece

Με τηνπαρούσαο/η Continental, δηλώνει ότι ο ραδιοεξοπλισμός [Radio Transmitter] πληροί τηνοδηγία 2014/53/ΕΕ.Ζώνησυχνοτήτων: [125kHz]Μέγιστη ισχύς εκπομπής: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

England

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type [Radio Transmitter] is in compliance withDirective 2014/53/EU.Frequency band: [125kHz]Maximum transmitter power: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Ireland

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type [Radio Transmitter] is in compliance withDirective 2014/53/EU.Frequency band: [125kHz]Maximum transmitter power: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Italy

Il fabbricante, Continental, dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio [Radio Transmitter] è conformealla direttiva 2014/53/UE.Banda di frequenza: [125kHz]Potenza di trasmissione massima: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

281

Country

Latvia

Ar šo Continental deklarē, ka radioiekārta [Radio Transmitter] atbilst Direktīvai 2014/53/ES. Pilns ESatbilstības deklarācijas teksts ir pieejams šādā interneta vietnē:Frekvenču josla: [125kHz]Maksimālā raidīšanas jauda: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Lithuania

Aš, Continental, patvirtinu, kad radijo įrenginių tipas [Radio Transmitter] atitinka Direktyvą2014/53/ES. Visas ES atitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas šiuo interneto adresu:Dažnių juosta: [125kHz]Maksimali siųstuvo galia: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Luxembourg

Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [Radio Transmitter] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EUentspricht.Frequenzband: [125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Malta

B'dan, Continental, niddikjara li dan it-tip ta' tagħmir tar-radju [Radio Transmitter] huwa konformimad-Direttiva 2014/53/UE.Medda ta' frekwenza: [125kHz]Enerġija Massima tat-Trasmissjoni: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Netherlands

Hierbij verklaar ik, Continental, dat het type radioapparatuur [Radio Transmitter] conform is metRichtlijn 2014/53/EU.Frequentieband: [125kHz]Maximaal zendvermogen: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Poland

Continental niniejszym oświadcza, że typ urządzenia radiowego [Radio Transmitter] jest zgodny zdyrektywą 2014/53/UE.Pasmo częstotliwości: [125kHz]Maksymalna moc nadawania: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Portugal

O (a) abaixo assinado(a) Continental declara que o presente tipo de equipamento de rádio [RadioTransmitter] está em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE. O texto integral da declaração deconformidade está disponível no seguinte endereço de Internet:Faixa de frequência: [125kHz]Potência máxima de transmissão: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Czech Republic

Tímto Continental prohlašuje, že typ rádiového zařízení [Radio Transmitter] je v souladu se směrnicí2014/53/EU.Kmitočtové pásmo: [125kHz]Maximální vysílací výkon: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

282

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Slovak Republic

Continental týmto vyhlasuje, že rádiové zariadenie typu [Radio Transmitter] je v súlade so smernicou2014/53/EÚ.Frekvenčné pásmo: [125kHz]Maximálny vysielací výkon: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Romania

Prin prezenta, Continental declară că tipul de echipamente radio [Radio Transmitter] este înconformitate cu Directiva 2014/53/UE.Bandă de frecvene:[125kHz]Putere maximă de emisie: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

SloveniaContinental potrjuje, da je tip radijske opreme [Radio Transmitter] skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU.Frekvenčni pas: [125kHz]Maksimalna moč oddajanja: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Spain

Por la presente, Continental declara que el tipo de equipo radioeléctrico [Radio Transmitter] esconforme con la Directiva 2014/53/UE.Banda de frecuencias: [125kHz]Máxima potencia de transmisión: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Sweden

Härmed försäkrar Continental att denna typ av radioutrustning [Radio Transmitter] överensstämmermed direktiv 2014/53/EU.Frekvensband: [125kHz]Maximal sändningseffekt: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Hungary

Continental igazolja, hogy a [Radio Transmitter] típusú rádióberendezés megfelel a 2014/53/EUirányelvnek.Frekvencia-szalag: [125kHz]Maximális jeladási teljesítmény: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

283

OFFICIALTYPEAPPROVALS FORSPECIFICMARKETS

Country RFHM system type approval code

Ghana NCA APPROVED: 3R8-8M-7DF-301 NCA/TA/10/2010

Malaysia

Israel

ALFARFHM1

Continental Automotive GmbHSiemensstrasse 1293055 Regensburg

Germany

South Korea

MSIP-RRM-TAL-AlfaRFMH2

Continental Automotive GmbHRFHM

S180222030

Morocco

AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROCTransmitter :

Numéro d’agrément : MR 11317 ANRT 2015Date d’agrément : 21/01/2016

Receiver :Numéro d’agrément : MR 5833 ANRT 2010

Date d’agrément : 08/10/2010

284

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country RFHM system type approval code

Qatar

reg. No.: R-3189Importer No.: xxxxxxxx

Taiwan

Republic of South Africa

Continental Automotive GmbHM3N-82135300

Vietnam

285

Country RFHM system type approval code

Republic of Kazakhstan

Continental Automotive GmbHSiemensstrasse 1293055 Regensburg

GermanyModel: AlfaRFHM1

286

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

TPMS (Tyre PressureMonitoring System)

281 10196S0001EM

287

Country

Austria

Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [TPMS System] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EUentspricht.Frequenzband: [125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Belgium

Hierbij verklaar ik, Continental, dat het type radioapparatuur [TPMS System] conform is met Richtlijn2014/53/EU.Frequentieband: [125kHz]Maximaal zendvermogen: [66dBuA/m @10m max]Le soussigné, Continental, déclare que l'équipement radioélectrique du type [TPMS System] estconforme à la directive 2014/53/UE.Bande de fréquences: [125kHz]Puissance d’émission maximale: [66dBuA/m @10m max]Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [TPMS System] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EUentspricht.Frequenzband: [125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Bulgaria

Снастоящото Continental декларира, че този тип радиосъоръжение [TPMS System] е всъответствие сДиректива 2014/53/ЕС.Честотна лента: [125kHz]Максималнамощност на предаване: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Cyprus

Με τηνπαρούσαο/η Continental, δηλώνει ότι ο ραδιοεξοπλισμός [TPMS System] πληροί την οδηγία2014/53/ΕΕ.Ζώνησυχνοτήτων: [125kHz]Μέγιστη ισχύς εκπομπής: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Croatia

Continental ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa [TPMS System] u skladu s Direktivom2014/53/EU.Frekvencijski pojas: [125kHz]Maksimalna snaga odašiljanja: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Denmark

Hermed erklærer Continental, at radioudstyrstypen [TPMS System] er i overensstemmelse meddirektiv 2014/53/EU.Frekvensbånd: [125kHz]Maksimal sendeeffekt: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

288

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Estonia

Käesolevaga deklareerib Continental, et käesolev raadioseadme tüüp [TPMS System] vastab direktiivi2014/53/EL nõuetele.Sagedusriba: [125kHz]Maksimaalne ülekandevõimsus: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

FinlandContinental vakuuttaa, että radiolaitetyyppi [TPMS System] on direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen.Taajuusalue: [125kHz]Maksimaalinen lähetysteho: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

France

Le soussigné, Continental, déclare que l'équipement radioélectrique du type [TPMS System] estconforme à la directive 2014/53/UE.Bande de fréquences: [125kHz]Puissance d’émission maximale: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Germany

Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [TPMS System] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EUentspricht.Frequenzband: [125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Greece

Με τηνπαρούσαο/η Continental, δηλώνει ότι ο ραδιοεξοπλισμός [TPMS System] πληροί την οδηγία2014/53/ΕΕ.Ζώνησυχνοτήτων: [125kHz]Μέγιστη ισχύς εκπομπής: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

England

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type [TPMS System] is in compliance withDirective 2014/53/EU.Frequency band: [125kHz]Maximum transmitter power: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Ireland

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type [TPMS System] is in compliance withDirective 2014/53/EU.Frequency band: [125kHz]Maximum transmitter power: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Italy

Il fabbricante, Continental, dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio [TPMS System] è conforme alladirettiva 2014/53/UE.Banda di frequenza: [125kHz]Potenza di trasmissione massima: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

289

Country

Latvia

Ar šo Continental deklarē, ka radioiekārta [TPMS System] atbilst Direktīvai 2014/53/ES. Pilns ESatbilstības deklarācijas teksts ir pieejams šādā interneta vietnē:Frekvenču josla: [125kHz]Maksimālā raidīšanas jauda: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Lithuania

Aš, Continental, patvirtinu, kad radijo įrenginių tipas [TPMS System] atitinka Direktyvą 2014/53/ES.Visas ES atitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas šiuo interneto adresu:Dažnių juosta: [125kHz]Maksimali siųstuvo galia: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Luxembourg

Hiermit erklärt Continental, dass der Funkanlagentyp [TPMS System] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EUentspricht.Frequenzband: [125kHz]Maximale Sendeleistung: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Malta

B'dan, Continental, niddikjara li dan it-tip ta' tagħmir tar-radju [TPMS System] huwa konformimad-Direttiva 2014/53/UE.Medda ta' frekwenza: [125kHz]Enerġija Massima tat-Trasmissjoni: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Netherlands

Hierbij verklaar ik, Continental, dat het type radioapparatuur [TPMS System] conform is met Richtlijn2014/53/EU.Frequentieband: [125kHz]Maximaal zendvermogen: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Poland

Continental niniejszym oświadcza, że typ urządzenia radiowego [TPMS System] jest zgodny zdyrektywą 2014/53/UE.Pasmo częstotliwości: [125kHz]Maksymalna moc nadawania: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Portugal

O (a) abaixo assinado(a) Continental declara que o presente tipo de equipamento de rádio [TPMSSystem] está em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE. O texto integral da declaração deconformidade está disponível no seguinte endereço de Internet:Faixa de frequência: [125kHz]Potência máxima de transmissão: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Czech Republic

Tímto Continental prohlašuje, že typ rádiového zařízení [TPMS System] je v souladu se směrnicí2014/53/EU.Kmitočtové pásmo: [125kHz]Maximální vysílací výkon: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

290

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Slovak Republic

Continental týmto vyhlasuje, že rádiové zariadenie typu [TPMS System] je v súlade so smernicou2014/53/EÚ.Frekvenčné pásmo: [125kHz]Maximálny vysielací výkon: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Romania

Prin prezenta, Continental declară că tipul de echipamente radio [TPMS System] este în conformitatecu Directiva 2014/53/UE.Bandă de frecvene:[125kHz]Putere maximă de emisie: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

SloveniaContinental potrjuje, da je tip radijske opreme [TPMS System] skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU.Frekvenčni pas: [125kHz]Maksimalna moč oddajanja: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Spain

Por la presente, Continental declara que el tipo de equipo radioeléctrico [TPMS System] es conformecon la Directiva 2014/53/UE.Banda de frecuencias: [125kHz]Máxima potencia de transmisión: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Sweden

Härmed försäkrar Continental att denna typ av radioutrustning [TPMS System] överensstämmer meddirektiv 2014/53/EU.Frekvensband: [125kHz]Maximal sändningseffekt: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

Hungary

Continental igazolja, hogy a [TPMS System] típusú rádióberendezés megfelel a 2014/53/EUirányelvnek.Frekvencia-szalag: [125kHz]Maximális jeladási teljesítmény: [66dBuA/m @10m max]

291

OFFICIALTYPEAPPROVALS FORSPECIFICMARKETS

Country TPMS system type approval code

Israel

A2C97146500Continental Siemensstrasse 1293051 RegensburgGermany

South Korea

Mexico

RLVCOTI15–0793

Moldavia

Australia

Malaysia RAQP/45AI0615/S(15–1836)

Morocco

292

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country TPMS system type approval code

SingaporeComplies withIDA StandardsDB01752

Republic of South Africa

Ukraine

Brazil

293

Country TPMS system type approval code

United Arab Emirates

TRAREGISTERED No:ER38595/15DEALER No:xxxxxxx

294

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

TAIWANESEMARKETOFFICIALTYPEAPPROVAL

282 10196S0002EM

295

HOME LINK

Country

Bulgaria

Снастоящото Gentex Corporation декларира, че HomeLink® Model SAHL5C е в съответствие сДиректива 2014/53/ЕСза радиосъоръженията. Пълният текст наДекларацията засъответствие наЕСедостъпен на следния интернет адрес: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryЧестотни ленти, на които работи радиосъоръжението:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Адрес на притежателя на сертификата:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464САЩ

Croatia

Gentex Corporation ovime izjavljuje da je HomeLink® Model SAHL5C usklađen s Direktivom o radijskojopremi 2014/53/EU. Cjelokupni tekst EU izjave o sukladnosti dostupan je na mrežnoj adresi:http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrekvencijski pojasevi na kojima radi radijska oprema:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Adresa nositelja certifikata:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464SAD

296

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Denmark

Hermed erklærer Gentex Corporation at HomeLink® Model SAHL5C er i overensstemmelse medRadioudstyrsdirektivet 2014/53/EU. Den fulde ordlyd af EU-overensstemmelseserklæringen ertilgængelig på følgende internetadresse: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrekvensbånd, hvor radioudstyret opererer:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Certifikatindehavers adresse:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

Estonia

Gentex Corporation teatab, et HomeLink® mudel SAHL5C on vastavuses raadioseadmete direktiiviga2014/53/EL. ELi ühilduvusdeklaratsiooni kogutekst on saadaval järgmisel internetiaadressil:http://www.homelink.com/regulatorySagedusribad, millel raadioseadmed toimivad:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Sertifikaadiomaniku aadress:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

297

Country

Finland

Gentex Corporation ilmoittaa täten, että HomeLink® Model SAHL5C on radiolaitteista annetundirektiivin, 2014/53/EU, mukainen. EU:n vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus kokonaisuudessaan onsaatavilla verkossa osoitteesta: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryTaajuuskaistat, joilla radiolaite toimii:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Sertifikaatin haltijan osoite:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464Yhdysvallat

France

Par les présentes, Gentex Corporation déclare que HomeLink® Model SAHL5C est conforme à laDirective sur les équipements radioélectriques 2014/53/EU. Le texte complet de la Déclaration deconformité de l’UE est disponible à l’adresse : http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryBandes de fréquence sur lesquelles l’équipement radio fonctionne :

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Adresse du titulaire du certificat :Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464États-Unis

298

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Germany

Hiermit erklärt die Gentex Corporation, dass HomeLink® Modell SAHL5C der Richtlinie fürFunkanlagen 2014/53/EU entspricht. Der vollständige Text der EU-Konformitätserklärung kann unterfolgender Internetadresse eingesehen werden: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrequenzbereiche, in denen die Funkanlage arbeitet:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Adresse des Zertifikatsinhabers:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

Greece

Δια τηςπαρούσης, η εταιρεία Gentex Corporation δηλώνει ότι τοπροϊόν HomeLink® ΜοντέλοSAHL5C συμμορφώνεται προς τηνΟδηγία 2014/53/ΕΕσχετικά με τον ραδιοεξοπλισμό. Τοπλήρες κείμενο τηςΔήλωσηςΣυμμόρφωσηςΕΕδιατίθεται στην ακόλουθη διαδικτυακή διεύθυνση:http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryΖώνες συχνοτήτωνστις οποίες λειτουργεί ο ραδιοεξοπλισμός:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.ΔιεύθυνσηΚατόχουΠιστοποιητικού:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464Η.Π.Α.

299

Country

England

Hereby, Gentex Corporation declares that HomeLink® Model SAHL5C is in compliance with RadioEquipment Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at thefollowing internet address: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrequency Bands in which the radio equipment operates:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Certificate Holder’s Address:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

Island

Hér með lýsir, Gentex Corporation því yfir að HomeLink® Model SAHL5C uppfylli kröfur tilskipunar umfjarskiptabúnað 2014/53/ESB. Heildartexti ESB-samræmisyfirlýsingarinnar liggi frammi áeftirfarandi veffangi: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryTíðnisvið sem fjarskiptabúnaðurinn starfar á:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Heimilisfang handhafa vottorðs:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464BNA

300

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Italy

Con il presente, Gentex Corporation dichiara che l'HomeLink® Model SAHL5C è conforme alla Direttivasulle Apparecchiature Radio 2014/53/UE. Il testo integrale della Dichiarazione di conformità UE èdisponibile al seguente indirizzo internet: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryBande di frequenza in cui opera l'apparecchiatura radio:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Indirizzo del titolare del certificato:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

Latvia

Ar šo Gentex Corporation paziņo, ka HomeLink® modelis SAHL5C atbilst Radioiekārtu Direktīvas2014/53/ES prasībām. Viss ES atbilstības deklarācijas teksts ir atrodams šajā interneta adresē:http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrekvenču joslas, kurās radioiekārtas darbojas:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Sertifikāta īpašnieka adrese:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464ASV

301

Country

Lithuania

„Gentex Corporation� pareiškia, kad „HomeLink® Model SAHL5C� atitinka Radijo įrenginių direktyvą2014/53/ES. Pilną ES atitikties deklaracijos tekstą galima rasti šiuo internetu adresu:http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryDažnių juostos, kuriose veikia radijo įrenginys:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Pažymėjimo turėtojo adresas:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464JAV

Malta

Hawnhekk, Gentex Corporation tiddikjara li HomeLink® Mudell SAHL5C hu konformi mad-Direttivadwar it-Tagħmir tar-Radju 2014/53/UE. Il-kitba sħiħa tad-Dikjarazzjoni tal-Konformità tal-UE hidisponibbli fl-indirizz tal-Internet li ġej: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryIl-Meded tal-Frekwenza li fihom jaħdem it-tagħmir tar-radju:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.L-Indirizz tad-Detentur taċ-Ċertifikat:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464L-iStati Uniti tal-Amerika

302

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Norway

Herved erklærer Gentex Corporation at HomeLink® Model SAHL5C er i samsvar medradioutstyrsdirektivet 2014/53/EU. Den fullstendige teksten i EUs samsvarserklæring er tilgjengeligpå følgende internettadresse: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrekvensbånd hvor radioutstyret opererer:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Sertifikatinnehaverens adresse:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

Netherlands

Bij deze verklaart Gentex Corporation dat HomeLink® Model SAHL5C beantwoordt aan de Richtlijnbetreffende radio apparatuur 2014/53/EU. De volledige tekst van de conformiteitsverklaring van deEU is beschikbaar op het volgende internetadres: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrequentiebanden waarop de radioapparatuur werkt:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Adress van de certificaathouder:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland, MI 49464VS

303

Country

Poland

Niniejszym Gentex Corporation deklaruje, że urządzenie HomeLink® Model SAHL5C jest zgodne zprzepisami Dyrektywy Radiowej (RED) 2014/53/UE. Pełna treść Deklaracji Zgodności UE jestdostępna pod następującym adresem internetowym: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryPasma częstotliwości, w których pracuje urządzenie radiowe:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Adres posiadacza świadectwa:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

Portugal

A Gentex Corporation declara pelo presente que o Modelo SAHL5C do HomeLink® está emconformidade com Diretiva Relativa aos Equipamentos de Rádio 2014/53/UE. O texto integral daDeclaração de Conformidade da UE está disponível no seguinte endereço da Internet:http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryBandas de Frequências nas quais o equipamento de rádio funciona:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Endereço do Titular do Certificado:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464EUA

304

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Czech Republic

Společnost Gentex tímto prohlašuje, že HomeLink® Model SAHL5C splňuje požadavky stanovenésměrnicí o radiových zařízeních 2014/53/EU. Úplný text Prohlášení o shodě Evropské unie je dostupnýna internetové adrese: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryKmitočtová pásma, kterých radiové zařízení používá:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Adresa držitele osvědčení:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

Slovak Republic

Spoločnosť Gentex Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že výrobok HomeLink® Model SAHL5C je v súlade sosmernicou o rádiovom zariadení 2014/53/EÚ. Plné znenie Vyhlásenia o zhode pre EÚ je k dispozícii natejto internetovej adrese: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrekvenčné pásma, v ktorých zariadenie funguje:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Adresa držiteľa osvedčenia:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

305

Country

Slovenia

Družba Gentex Corporation izjavlja, da je HomeLink® Model SAHL5C skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EUo radijski opremi. Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti je na voljo na naslednjem spletnem naslovu:http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrekvenčni pasovi, v katerih radijska oprema deluje:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Naslov imetnika certifikata:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464ZDA

Spain

Por este medio, Gentex Corporation declara que HomeLink® Modelo SAHL5C cumple con la Directivade equipos de radio 2014/53/UE. El texto completo de la Declaración de conformidad de la UE estádisponible en la siguiente dirección de Internet: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryBandas de frecuencia en las que opera el equipo de radio:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Dirección del Titular del Certificado:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464EE. UU.

306

TEC

HN

ICA

LD

ATA

Country

Sweden

Gentex Corporation förklarar härmed att HomeLink® Model SAHL5C efterleverradioutrustningsdirektivet 2014/53/EU. Den fullständiga texten för EU-försäkran omöverensstämmelse finns på följande webbadress: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryFrekvensband inom vilka radioutrustningen fungerar:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Certifikatinnehavarens adress:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

Hungary

Ezennel a Gentex Corporation kijelenti, hogy a HomeLink® Model SAHL5C megfelel arádióberendezésekre vonatkozó 2014/53/EU rendeletnek. Az EU-megfelelőségi nyilatkozat teljesszövege megtalálható a következő címen: http://www.homelink.com/regulatoryA frekvenciasávok, amelyekben a rádióberendezés üzemel:

433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.

868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

868.70MHz-869.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.

869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.Tanúsítvány tulajdonosának címe:Gentex Corporation600 North Centennial StreetZeeland MI 49464USA

307

Ask your mechanic for

It’s in the heart of your engine.

Your car has chosen PETRONAS Selenia

The quality of PETRONAS Selenia is divided into a range of technologically advanced products:

SELENIA WR FORWARD 0W-30/0W-20Fully synthetic, latest generation lubricant specifically formulated for EURO 6 diesel engines. Its fully synthetic formula and 0W-30 viscosity grade guaran-tee excellent performance in terms of fuel economy for diesel engines equipped with high efficiency turbo-charger. PETRONAS Selenia Forward also features excellent resistance to oxidation, thus maintaining its technical characteristics and promoting maximum engine performance throughout the entire oil-change interval.

SELENIA DIGITEK P.E. 0W-30Is the fully synthetic lubricant created for the most modern petrol engines. Its special viscosity grade and its specific formulation enhance the fuel economy features and, consequently the reduction of CO2 emissions. Especially created for TwinAir two-cylinder engines, it ensures maximum engine protection even under high mechanical stress due to mainly city use.

SELENIA MULTIPOWER C3Is a high performance synthetic lubricant designed for petrol and diesel engines requiring products able to reduce ash deposits to the absoluteminimum. It provides increased protection against wear and tear and has excellent fuel economy characteristics. It protects the particle filter (DPF) in diesel engines.

SELENIA SPORT POWERIs a fully synthetic lubricant designed to enhance the sporting characteristics of direct injection petrol engines (GDI). It maximizes sporting performances while maintaining complete engine protection, even under the most severe conditions of use.

The PETRONAS Selenia range is completed with Selenia StAR Pure Energy, Selenia StAR, Selenia WR Pure Energy, Selenia Sport, and Selenia Racing.

For further information concerning PETRONAS Selenia products, consult the website: www.pli-petronas.com

The engine of your car was made with PETRONAS Selenia, the range of engine oils that satisfies the most advanced international specifications. Subject to specific tests and boasting outstanding technical characteristics,

PETRONAS Selenia is a lubricant designed to equip your engine with reliable, winning performance standards”

NOTES

INDEX

Alfa DNA system . . . . . . . . . . . .147

ABS (system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Accessories purchased by the owner . . .3Active Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . .155Active safety systems . . . . . . . . . .100Additional heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . .52AFS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Air conditioner parameters display . . .48Airbag

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Airbag (SRS supplementary restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) . . . . .149

Automatic dual-zone climate controlsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . .142

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . .226Bodywork (cleaning and maintenance).236Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . .224Broken-down vehicle towing . . . . . .207BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) . . . . . .104

Car inactivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Carrying children safely . . . . . . . . .118

Checking levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219Child protection systems . . . . . . . .118Child safety device. . . . . . . . . . . . .26Climate control system . . . . . . . . . .46CO2 emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267Control panel and on-board

instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66Courtesy lights

Luggage compartment courtesylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Courtesy mirror light (bulbreplacement). . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Cup/can holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Daytime running lights (DRL) . . . . . .37Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256Dipped beam headlights (bulb

replacement). . . . . . . . . . . . . .187Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .39Direction indicators (changing a bulb).188Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Door light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23DPF (particulate filter) . . . . . . . . . .64Driving assistance systems. . . . . . .104DTC (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Dusk sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Electric parking brake. . . . . . . . . .140Electric steering wheel heating . . . . .34

Electric sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53Emergency refuelling . . . . . . . . . .206Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

Engine coolant level . . . . . . . . .224Engine Codes - bodywork versions . .243Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . .219Engine compartment (washing) . . . .237Engine Immobilizer (system) . . . . . . .21Engine oil

Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Engine oil temperature gauge . . . . . .68Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . .206Environmental protection systems . . .64EOBD system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100External lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Fire extinguisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Fluids and lubricants . . . . . . . . . . .262Fog lights (bulb replacement) . . . . .188Forward Collision Warning (system). .106Front ceiling light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Front light cluster with main

beam/dipped beam halogenheadlights (bulb replacement) . . .187

Front light cluster with mainbeam/dipped beam Xenon gasdischarge headlights (bulbreplacement). . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

Front seat electric heating . . . . . . . .30Front seats (electric adjustment) . . . .28Front seats (manual adjustments). . . .28Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . .266Fuel cut-off system . . . . . . . . . . .206Fuel level gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Fuse boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191Fuses (replacement) . . . . . . . . . . .190

Glove compartment. . . . . . . . . . . .61Glove compartment light . . . . . . . . .41Glove compartment light (bulb

replacement). . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . .184Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . .184

HDC (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Headlight alignment corrector . . . . . .39Headlight regulation . . . . . . . . . . . .39Headlights (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . .237HSA (Hill Start Assist) system . . . . .101

i-Size child restraint systems . . . . .124

Identification data . . . . . . . . . . . .242Ignition device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Installing electrical/electronic devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Interior Ambient Lighting . . . . . . . . .42

Interior fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Interiors (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . .238

ISOFIX child restraint system(installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

KeysElectronic key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Lane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Lane Departure Warning System . . .166Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .233Light bulbs

Types of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .185Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Luggage compartment light (bulb

replacement). . . . . . . . . . . . . .189Luggage compartment tailgate . . . . .56

Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . .38Automatic main beam headlights . .38

Main beam headlights (changing a bulb). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Occupant protection systems. . . . .113Official type approvals . . . . . . . . .269

Paintwork (cleaning and maintenance). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Park Sensors system . . . . . . . . . .162Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .140Passenger compartment air diffusers .46Passive Entry (system) . . . . . . . . . .24PBA (Panic Brake Assist) system . . .101

Performance (top speed) . . . . . . . .265Power Lock (device) . . . . . . . . . . . .26Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246Pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Load limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Prescriptions for handling the car at

the end of its life . . . . . . . . . . .268

Radio transmitters and mobile phones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44RCP system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Rear Back-up Camera / Dynamic

Gridlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169Rear ceiling light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Rear central armrest . . . . . . . . . . .63Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . .45Reconfigurable TFT display . . . . . . .69Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260Refuelling procedure . . . . . . . . . .171Refuelling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . .171Replacing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . .184Replacing an external bulb . . . . . . .187Replacing an internal bulb. . . . . . . .189Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Rims and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234Rims and tyres provided . . . . . . . .253

IND

EX

Run Flat Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Saving fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173SBA (Seat Belt Alert) . . . . . . . . . .115

Scheduled servicing . . . . . . . . . . .212Scheduled servicing plan (2.2 JTD

diesel engine versions) . . . . . . . .216Screen wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . .43

Smart washing function . . . . . . . .44Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Service schedule (2.0 T4 MAir petrol

engine versions) . . . . . . . . . . . .213Servicing procedures . . . . . . . . . .227Side bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152Speedometer (speed indicator) . . . . .68SRS (supplementary restraint system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Start & Stop Evo . . . . . . . . . . . . .150Starting the engine. . . . . . . . . . . .138Starting with flat key battery . . . . . .21Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Suggestions for driving . . . . . . . . .173Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

TC (Traction Control) system . . . . .101TFT Display (3.5”) . . . . . . . . . . . . .66TFT Display (7”). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67The keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Tire Repair Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .208Towing trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Transporting animals . . . . . . . . . .174Transporting passengers . . . . . . . .174Tyres (inflation pressure) . . . . . . . .254

Use of the Owner Handbook . . . . . . .5

Vehicle changes/alterations . . . . . . .3Vehicle identification number . . . . .242

Warning lights and messages . . . . . .75Washer fluid for

windscreen/headlights. . . . . . . .224Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

(correct reading of the tyre) . . . .251correct reading of the rim code . . .252

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . .234Window bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134Windows (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . .237Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

replacing blades . . . . . . . . . . . .229

FCA Italy S.p.A. - MOPAR - Technical Services - Service EngineeringLargo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Turin (Italy)

Print no. 603.93.152GB WEB- 12/2017- 2 Edition--

ALFA ROMEO GENUINE SPARE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

PERFECT FOR YOUR VEHICLE, RIGHT DOWN TO THE SMALLEST DETAIL

The Alfa Romeo Genuine Spare Parts and Accessories follow the rigid component engineering and manufacturing specifi cations used in the assembly line to meet the technical specifi cations of your new Alfa Romeo and to enhance its style and performance. They undergo strict approval tests and quality controls to ensure they comply with safety and environmental standards.

All of the components on your new Alfa Romeo, from the smallest bulb to the most complex mechanical, electrical and electronic systems, are designed to work in harmony and guarantee you a comfortable and safe drive, in full respect for the environment. The Genuine Accessories fully enhance the style of your new vehicle.

Entrust the experience and quality of Alfa Romeo Dealerships to fi nd the full range of Alfa Romeo Genuine Spare Parts and Accessories.

Find your nearest Dealership on www.alfaromeo.com

ENGLISH